CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF Pump …

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF

Pump Station 022 Replacement

100% Submittal

City of Hampton

March 2018

Prepared by Woolpert, Inc.


March 2018 TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PUMP STATION 022 REPLACEMENT

PAGE

I. TABLE OF CONTENTS ……………………………………………………….. TOC 1 - 2

II. SCOPE OF WORK……………………………….……………………………… SOW 1 - 2

III. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01014 - Protection of Underground Utilities .......................................... 01014-1 – 01014-2

Section 01110 - Summary of Work ..................................................................... 01110-1 – 01110-4

Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures .............................................................. 01330-1 – 01330-12

Section 01575 - Temporary Environmental Controls ....................................... 01575-1 – 01575-12

Section 01781 - Operation and Maintenance Data .............................................. 01781-1 – 01781-4

DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK

Section 02060 – Building and Structure Demolition........................................... 02060-1 – 02060-4

Section 02100 - Clearing and Grubbing .............................................................. 02100-1 – 02100-4

Section 02315 - Excavation and Fill ................................................................. 02315-1 – 02315-10

Section 02610 - Underground Utility Pipe .......................................................... 02610-1 – 02610-4

Section 02741 - Bituminous Concrete Pavement ................................................ 02741-1 – 02741-4

Section 02821 – Chain Link Fencing & Gates .................................................... 02821-1 – 02821-6

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete ............................................................ 03300-1 – 03300-10

Section 03400 – Precast Concrete Wet Wells and Valve Vault ........................ 03400-1 – 03400-12

Section 03410 – Precast Structural Concrete Buildings .................................... 03410-1 – 03410-20

DIVISION 04 MASONRY – NOT USED

DIVISION 05 METALS

Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals and Fabrications .................................. 05500-1 – 05500-10

DIVISION 06 WOODS & PLASTICS – NOT USED

DIVISION 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION –NOT USED

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08255 - Doors and Frames .................................................................... 08255-1 – 08255-8


March 2018 TOC - 2

Section 08710 - Door Hardware .......................................................................... 08710-1 – 08710-6

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings ................................................................. 09900-1 – 09900-18

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

Section 10201 - Metal Wall Louvers ................................................................... 10201-1 – 10201-4

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT

Section 11330 – Non-Clog Submersible Centrifugal Pumps And Drives ........... 11330-1 – 11330-8

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ................................ 15050-1 – 15050-4

Section 15060 - Interior Process Pipe, Fittings and Valves .............................. 15060-1 – 15060-10

Section 15190 - Hydrostatic Testing of Piping Systems ..................................... 15190-1 – 15190-2

Section 15200 – Heating and Ventilating Equipment ......................................... 15200-1 – 15200-6

Section 15210 - Domestic Water and Waste Piping............................................ 15210-1 – 15210-6

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

Section 16010 – Electrical Basic Requirements ............................................... 16010-1 – 16010-10

Section 16020 – Utility Service and Service Entrance ....................................... 16020-1 – 16020-2

Section 16035 – Electrical Testing and Placing in Service ................................ 16035-1 – 16035-4

Section 16110 – Raceways ................................................................................. 16110-1 – 16110-6

Section 16120 – Wires and Cables ...................................................................... 16120-1 – 16120-8

Section 16130 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings ................................................... 16130-1 – 16130-6

Section 16135 – Wiring Devices ........................................................................ 16135-1 – 16135-4

Section 16190 – Supporting Devices ................................................................. 16190-1 – 16190-6

Section 16195 – Electrical Identification ........................................................... 16195-1 – 16195-4

Section 16410 – Pump Control Panel ............................................................... 16410-1 – 16410-30

Section 16440 – Disconnect Switches ................................................................ 16440-1 – 16440-4

Section 16450 – Grounding ................................................................................. 16450-1 – 16450-4

Section 16470 – Panelboards ............................................................................... 16470-1 – 16470-6

Section 16475 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) ................................. 16475-1 – 16475-2

Section 16482 – Motor Starters ........................................................................... 16482-1 – 16482-4

Section 16510 – LED Lighting Fixtures ............................................................. 16510-1 – 16510-4

Section 16690 – Variable Frequency Drive ........................................................ 16690-1 – 16690-8

Section 16920 – Programmable Logic Controller ............................................ 16920-1 – 16920-18

IV. APPENDICES:

Appendix A – Geotechnical Report

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


March 2018 SOW-1

SCOPE OF WORK

SCOPE OF WORK:

The scope of the Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Construction of a submersible style wastewater pump station. The project includes a precast

concrete wet well, prefabricated building with all appurtenances, two submersible style sewage

pumps, controls, piping, flow meter and vault, emergency power generator connection and

associated site work.

Gravity sewer as shown on the drawings. Force main from the new pump station to connect to

existing 8” force main within the parcel. Construction access driveway from the asphalt alleyway

within the unnamed ingress/egress easement. New concrete driveway from the asphalt alleyway.

Demolition of the existing Pump Station 022 and removal of the existing 8” force main.

END OF SCOPE OF WORK


March 2018 SOW-2

This Page Intentionally Left Blank


March 2018 01014 - 1

SECTION 01014 - PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

1. GENERAL

1.1 DRAWINGS

Data regarding the presence, size, character and location of existing underground structures

has been shown on the contract drawings for informational purposes only. There is no

certainty of the accuracy of this information and the Contractor shall perform his own

investigations and survey to ascertain any and all obstructions. The location of underground

structures shown may not be wholly accurate and other obstructions than those shown may

be encountered. In general, house services, buried electric, gas, CATV, telephone, water and

sewer services to houses may not be shown. The Contractor shall assume that such services

exist and shall be responsible for protecting, maintaining and relocating such services or

having them replaced when damaged by his operations. The Contractor hereby expressly

agrees that neither the Owner nor the Engineer is responsible for the correctness or

sufficiency or absence of information regarding obstructions either revealed or not revealed

by the plans and that he shall have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility

under the Contract, in case the location, size or character of any pipe or other underground

structure is not as indicated or not shown on the plans. The Contractor shall not purchase

any materials nor initiate any work until he is completely satisfied that all underground

structures or utilities have been fully located and identified.

The Contractor should be aware that in some instances buried cables, gas lines, water lines,

etc., two inches and smaller in diameter may have to be excavated by hand and slightly

relocated to facilitate construction of the pipeline under this contract. This shall be

considered incidental to the work, and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK

Should the location of any pipe or conduit greater than 2 inches in diameter, pole, or other

structures, above or below the ground be such that in the opinion of the Owner or his

representative its removal, realignment, or change will be required due to work to be

performed under this Contract, the removal, realignment, or change will be done as a Change

Order, or will be done by the Owner of the obstructions, without cost to the Contractor. The

Contractor shall maintain at his own expense the structures until such removal and before

and after such realignment or change. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for

damages or extra compensation because of the presence of said structure, or because of any

delay in the removal or relocation of the same.


March 2018 01014 - 2

1.3 RESPONSIBILITY

The Contractor shall not interfere with any persons, firms or corporations, or with the Owner

or any agency having jurisdiction in protecting, removing, changing, or replacing their pipes,

conduits, poles, or other structures; but he shall suffer said persons, firms or corporations, or

the Owner, to take all such measures as they may deem necessary or advisable for the

purpose aforesaid, and the Contractor shall thereby be in no way relieved of any of his

responsibility under the Contract.

1.4 NOTIFICATION

The Contractor shall notify all owners of underground and overhead utilities at least 48 hours

prior to the commencement of excavation work where it is obvious or probable due to the

presence of nearby homes, markers and/or other types of structures that underground utilities

such as water, sewer, power, gas petroleum, telephone and the like exist near the site of

construction to ascertain the exact location of same so as not to interfere with or disrupt

service to the public.

1.5 COMPLIANCE

In addition to the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor is specifically

cautioned that he must comply with the requirements, including all revisions and

amendments thereto, of the Virginia "Underground Utility Damage Prevention Act" of 1979,

which became effective on July 1, 1980.

1.6 COORDINATION

Contractor is to contact and coordinate with "Miss Utility of Virginia" (811) when

excavating in the vicinity of underground utilities. Contractor shall also coordinate with

other contractors who may be working in the vicinity of the project site and installing

underground utilities as these utilities may not be marked by Miss Utility.

2. PRODUCTS

Not Used.

3. EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 01110-1

SECTION 01110 - SUMMARY OF WORK

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 Project Description

The project will replace the existing sewage pump station located at 279 W Gilbert

Street, Hampton, VA. Included is the replacement of Pump Station number 22,

associated site work for the new pump station, and the demolition of the existing pump

station. The project is comprised of the construction of a permanent single-story sanitary

sewage pumping station building. The pump station will provide services for the existing

service area. The pumps will convey flow from the gravity sewer collection system via a

new sanitary force main to discharge to the existing 8” force main.

1.1.2 Location

The majority of the work shall be located at the pump station site as shown on the

drawings.

1.1.3 Sequence of Construction

The following is a suggested sequence of construction:

1. PERFORM PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AND CONTRACTOR TO

OBTAIN ALL PERMITS.

2. CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM PRE-CONSTRUCTION SURVEY.

3. CITY TO INSTALL TEMPORARY EMERGENCY PUMP CONNECTION (EPC)

AND ESTABLISH BYPASSING PUMPING OPERATIONS FROM MH 022-0101.

4. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL E&SC MEASURES FOR THE SITE AS INDICATED

ON SHEET C-2.

a. AN E&S INSPECTION IS REQUIRED AND MUST BE APPROVED PRIOR

TO THE CONTRACTOR OBTAINING ANY OTHER PERMITS.

5. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE EXISTING 6' VYNL PRIVACY FENCE ALONG THE

NORTH SIDE OF THE PUMP STATION #022 SITE AS INDICATED ON SHEET C-

2.

6. CITY TO PROVIDE TEMPORARY PLUG FOR THE EFFLUENT 12” PIPE IN MH

022-0101.

a. CITY TO BEGIN CONTINUOUS BYPASS FROM MH 022-0101.

• THE CITY SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MAINTENANCE

AND MONITORING OF FLOWS FOR THE DURATION OF

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES.

b. CITY TO SHUT DOWN THE EXISTING PUMP STATION #022. THE

EXISTING STATION WILL REMAIN OUT OF OPERATION FOR THE

DURATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD.


March 2018 01110-2

7. CONTRACTOR TO ABANDON EXISTING PUMP STATION #022. SEE PS

ABANDONMENT NOTES ON SHEET C-2.

8. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SHEETING AND EXCAVATE.

9. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL 8' DIAMETER PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL.

10. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE SHEETING.

11. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL PROPOSED FORCE MAIN, MAGMETER & VALVE

VAULT, AND THE PERMANENT EPC.

12. CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM PRESSURE TEST ON FORCE MAIN. AFTER

SUCCSSFUL PRESSURE TEST, CONNECT TO THE EXISTING 6" GATE VALVE.

a. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH THE CITY FOR THE

CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING 6" GATE VALVE.

b. CITY TO BYPASS FLOWS FROM MH 022-0101 TO THE PERMANENT

EPC.

13. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL AND CONDUITS

AS INDICATED ON SHEET C-3.

14. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL THE PROPOSED WATER SERVICE AS INDICATED

ON SHEET C-3. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION OF

CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING WATER SERVICE.

15. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL PREFABRICATED PUMP STATION BUILDING

AND INSTALL STATION COMPONENTS.

16. CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM PS OPERATIONAL TESTS AS DIRECTED BY

CITY OF HAMPTON, WASTEWATER OPERATIONS PERSONNEL.

17. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL THE PROPOSED 12" GRAVITY AS INDICATED ON

SHEET P-3 AND PROVIDE CONNECTION TO MH 022-0101. REMOVE

TEMPORARY PLUG.

a. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE WITH CITY PERSONEL PERFORMING

BYPASS OPERATIONS TO HOLD AND MONITOR FLOWS AS NEEDED

AT MH 022-0102, LOCATED IN THE EXISTING EASEMENT IN THE BACK

OF 306 ROANE DRIVE, AND MH 022-0104, LOCATED ON W GILBERT

STREET.

18. CITY TO REMOVE ALL BYPASSING ONCE PUMP STATION #022 IS ONLINE.

19. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL CONCRETE DRIVE AND ADJUST MH 022-0101 TO

INDICATED GRADE.

20. CONTRACTOR TO GRADE & LANDSCAPE THE SITE AS INDICATED ON

SHEET C-4.

21. CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM SITE RESTORATION ACTIVITIES.

22. CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM POST-CONSTRUCTION CONDITION SURVEY.

23. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE E&SC MEASURES.

a. A FINAL E&S INSPECTION IS REQUIRED AND MUST BE APPROVED

PRIOR TO PROJECT RELEASE.


March 2018 01110-3

1.2 EXISTING WORK

The contractor shall endeavor to protect existing structures, piping and landscaping in

accordance with applicable provisions in the contract documents. In addition, the

contractor shall:

A. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to

any portions of the existing work designated to remain.

B. Repair or replace portions of existing work, which have been altered during

construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the

Owner. At the completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition equal

to or better than that which existed before new work started.

1.3 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

Conform to Section 01014, "Protection of Underground Utilities." Obtain digging

permits prior to start of excavation. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic or

sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities

are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of

underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be removed but indicated or

discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work

to be installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole

or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made.

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 01110-4



March 2018 01330-1

SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Submittal

Shop drawings, product data, samples, and administrative submittals presented for review

and approval.

1.1.2 Types of Submittals

All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal Descriptions (SD)".

Submittals also are grouped as follows:

A. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other

data prepared specifically for this contract, by contractor or through contractor by

way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier

contractor, to illustrate portion of work.

B. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules,

performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive

literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate portion of work, but not prepared

exclusively for this contract.

C. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or

workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work, illustrating portion of

work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both.

D. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that

administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure directly

that work is in accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract

documents.

1.1.3 Submittal Descriptions (SD)

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Certificates of insurance

Surety bonds

List of proposed subcontractors

List of proposed products

Construction Progress Schedule

Submittal schedule

Schedule of values


March 2018 01330-2

Health and safety plan

Work plan

Quality control plan

Environmental protection plan

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the

work.

Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the

product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.

Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and

interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.

SD-03 Product Data

Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and

brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or

equipment for some portion of the work.

Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties.

SD-04 Samples

Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and

aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the

work can be judged.

Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if

specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project.

Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which

the ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which

are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of

the work.

SD-05 Design Data

Calculations, mix designs, analyses, or other data pertaining to a part of work.


March 2018 01330-3

SD-06 Test Reports

Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or

system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in

accord with specified requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date

of contract award for the project.)

Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an

actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job

site.

Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the

job site, on portion of work during or after installation.

Investigation reports

Daily checklists

Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

SD-07 Certificates

Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material

attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. Must be

dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project.

Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or subcontractor through

Contractor, the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion

of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel

qualifications.

Confined space entry permits.

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including

special notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances, hazards and

safety precautions.

SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's

representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.

Factory test reports.


March 2018 01330-4

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals. Comply with

section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data, and with specific sections of the

specifications.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to

establish an administrative mechanism.

As-built drawings

Special warranties

Posted operating instructions

Training plan

1.1.4 Approving Authority

Person authorized to approve submittal.

1.1.5 Work

As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract documents,

including labor necessary to produce construction and materials, products, equipment,

and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section.


Submittal register

1.3 USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER

Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses.

1.3.1 Submittal Register

Submit submittal register periodically throughout the project. Verify that all submittals

required for project are listed and add missing submittals. Complete the following on the

register:


March 2018 01330-5

Specification Section: Specification number requiring the submittal.

Contractor Approval Date: Date contractor needs approval of submittal.

Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of consecutive numbers.

List date of submittal transmission.

List date approval received.

List date of submittal receipt.

List date returned to contractor.

1.3.2 Contractor Action Code and Action Code

Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form):

NR - Not Received

AN - Approved as noted

A – Approved as submitted

R - Rejected

RR - Revise and Resubmit

SI – Submit Specified Item

1.3.3 Copies Delivered to the Engineer

Deliver one copy of submitted register updated by Contractor to Engineer with each

invoice request.

1.4 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority

Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in

compliance with contract requirements. Approving authority on submittals is Engineer or

his representative unless otherwise specified for a specific submittal.


March 2018 01330-6

1.4.2 Constraints

A. Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this

section, unless explicitly stated otherwise.

B. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work; components of

definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time.

C. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or materials

included in separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be returned without

review.

D. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply approval of

assembly in which item functions.

1.4.3 Scheduling

A. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with

performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing.

Allow for potential requirements to resubmit.

B. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by

approving authority, which includes at least 15 working days for submittals for

approval. Period of review for submittals begins when Engineer or his

representative receives submittal from the contractor. Period of review for each

resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.

C. Certain submittals, such as the Emergency Generator, Odor Control Systems, Pump

Station Control Panels, Pumps, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, etc., require

additional review and approval from the locality. Contractor shall allow an

additional 10 working days for review of these submittals. Contractor shall request

the identity of these particular submittals upon submission of the Submittal Register.

1.4.4 Variations

Variations from contract requirements require Engineer approval and will be considered

where advantageous to Owner.

1.4.4.1 Considering Variations

Discussion with the Engineer prior to submission will help ensure functional and quality

requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals.


March 2018 01330-7

1.4.4.2 Proposing Variations

When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Engineer, with documentation of

the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial

to the City. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals

required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.

1.4.4.3 Warranting That Variation Are Compatible

When delivering a variation for approval, contractor warrants that this contract has been

reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other

elements of work.

1.4.4.4 Review Schedule Is Modified

In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be

allowed for consideration by the Engineer of submittals with variations.

1.4.5 Contractor's Responsibilities

A. Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field construction criteria;

review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements

of the work and contract documents.

B. Transmit submittals to Engineer or his representative in accordance with schedule

on approved Submittal Register, and to prevent delays in the work, delays to

Engineer, or delays to separate contractors.

C. Advise Engineer of variation, as required by paragraph entitled "Variations."

D. Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority. When

resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal, the

contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all

reviewer comments for use by approving authority. Direct specific attention in

writing or on resubmitted submittal, to revisions not requested by approving

authority on previous submissions.

E. Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by Engineer, to a limit of 5

copies per submittal.

F. Complete work that must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in time to allow

submittal to occur as scheduled.

G. Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as

"approved," or "approved as noted", except to the extent that a portion of work must

be accomplished as basis of submittal.


March 2018 01330-8

1.4.6 Engineer's Responsibilities

When approving authority is Engineer or his representative, the Engineer will:

A. Note date on which submittal was received from Contractor, on each submittal for

which the Engineer is approving authority.

B. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for

conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.

C. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled

"Actions Possible" and with markings appropriate for action indicated.

1.4.7 Actions Possible

Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:

A. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been previously

reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed

and approved by contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed"

will be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit

submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete, with

appropriate action, coordination, or change.

B. Submittals marked "approved" or "approved as submitted" authorize contractor to

proceed with work covered.

C. Submittals marked "approved as noted" authorize contractor to proceed with work

as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the notations.

D. Submittals marked "revise and resubmit" or "rejected" indicate submittal is

incomplete or does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract

documents and shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall

proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved.

E. Submittals marked “submit specified item” authorize contractor to proceed with the

portions of the work except for the item noted by the approving authority. The

specified item shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed

for this item until resubmittal is approved.


March 2018 01330-9

1.5 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

1.5.1 Transmittal Form

Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to office of

approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by Engineer

and standard for project. The transmittal form shall identify contractor, indicate date of

submittal, and include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in

paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals." Process transmittal forms to record actions

regarding sample panels and sample installations.

1.5.2 Identifying Submittals

Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the following

information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each

submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically,

with the following:

A. Project title and location.

B. Construction contract number.

C. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.

D. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.

E. When a resubmission, alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for example, SD-

10A, to indicate resubmission.

F. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer and

any other second tier contractor associated with submittal.

G. Product identification and location in project.

1.5.3 Format for Product Data

A. Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume.

Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers for product data.

B. Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate

specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.

C. Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal

requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as

developed specifically for project.


March 2018 01330-10

1.5.4 Format for Shop Drawings

A. Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 x 42

inches.

B. Present 8 1/2 x 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for

submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.

C. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and

dates, in addition to information required in paragraph entitled "Identifying

Submittals."

D. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare drawings

demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Identify materials and products

for work shown.

1.5.5 Format of Samples

A. Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the

manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified:

(1) Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.

(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.

(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by 11

inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.

(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be

supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are

conduit and handrails.

(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials are

sand and paint.

(6) Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches.

(7) Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.

(8) Sample Installation: 100 square feet.

B. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to

nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing

extremes and middle of range.


March 2018 01330-11

C. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or

indicated. Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use.

D. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area

constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of project.

E. When color, texture, or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and

style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.

1.5.6 Format of Administrative Submittals

A. When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become part

of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply contractor's approval stamp

to document, but to a separate sheet accompanying document.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with Section

01781, "Operation and Maintenance Data.".

1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

1.6.1 Number of Copies of Product Data

A. Submit four copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval in

addition to those submittals required for contractor’s records and suppliers.

B. If Contractor elects to provide submittals electronically (via internet e-mail or FTP),

submit in Adobe PDF, TIFF, JPEG, or other acceptable digital format approved by

the Engineer. Submittals provided electronically will be returned electronically in

PDF, JPEG, or TIFF format, as appropriate. Contractor shall assume responsibility

for printing multiple copies of returned submittals for contractor’s records and

suppliers. Engineer shall forward appropriate copies to the developer and the

locality.

1.6.2 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product

data.

1.6.3 Number of Samples

A. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation, of each

required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by approving

authority and one will be returned to contractor.

B. Submit one sample panel. Include components listed in technical section or as

directed.


March 2018 01330-12

C. Submit one sample installation, where directed.

D. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.

1.6.4 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals

A. Unless otherwise specified, submit administrative submittals compliance with

quantity requirements specified for product data.

B. Submit administrative submittals required under "SD-19 Operation and

Maintenance Manuals" to conform to Section 01781, "Operation and Maintenance

Data."

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 01575-1

SECTION 01575 -TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The referenced

publications shall be the current effective edition.

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

40 CFR 122.26 EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

Permit Regulations

40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste

40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential,

Commercial, and Institutional Solid Waste

40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 263 Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264 Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standard for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal

Facilities

40 CFR 266 Management of Specific Hazardous Wastes and Specific

Types of Hazardous Waste Management Facilities

40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions

40 CFR 279 Used Oil Regulations

40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution

Contingency Plan

49 CFR 173 Shipments and Packagings


March 2018 01575-2

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 832-R-92-005 Storm Water Management for Construction Activities

VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATION AND RECREATION (DCR)

VESCH Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook

1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Sediment

Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind.

1.2.2 Solid Waste

Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material (except hazardous waste as

defined in paragraph entitled "Hazardous Waste" or hazardous debris as defined in

paragraph entitled "Hazardous Debris"), including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained

gaseous materials resulting from domestic, industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural

operations. Material not regulated as solid waste are: nuclear source or byproduct

materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended; suspended

or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation return flows, or other

regulated point source discharges; regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated

with natural gas or crude oil exploration or production.

A. Green waste: The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and grubbing,

including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small trees and saplings, tree

stumps and plant roots. Marketable trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to

remain, be re-located, or be re-used are not included.

B. Surplus soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required for this work,

including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site mixing of concrete, mortars

and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the definition of hazardous material or

hazardous waste is not included.

C. Inert construction and demolition debris: Broken or removed concrete, masonry,

and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may

be reinforced with or contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments.

D. Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard, hardboard.

Treated and/or painted wood that meets the definition of lead contaminated or lead

based contaminated paint is not included.


March 2018 01575-3

E. Scrap metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as re-enforcing

steel, structural shapes, pipe and wire that are recovered or collected and disposed of

as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous

waste is not included.

F. Paint cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents, thinners and adhesives. If

permitted by the paint can label, a thin dry film may remain in the can.

G. Recyclables: Materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors, windows, door

and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors that are recovered and

sold as recyclable. Metal meeting the definition of lead contaminated or lead based

paint contaminated may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal

company. Paint cans may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal

company.

1.2.3 Debris

Non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition, or

renovation of a structure which exceeds 2.5 inch particle size that is: a manufactured

object; plant or animal matter; or natural geologic material (e.g. cobbles and boulders). A

mixture of debris and other material such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as

debris if the mixture is comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual

inspection.

1.2.4 Hazardous Debris

As defined in paragraph entitled "Debris" of this section, debris that contains listed

hazardous waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore structure)

per 40 CFR 261; or debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste per 40 CFR

261.

1.2.5 Chemical Wastes

This includes salts, acids, alkalies, herbicides, pesticides, and organic chemicals.

1.2.6 Garbage

Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of

food.

1.2.7 Hazardous Waste

Hazardous waste as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and local

regulations.


March 2018 01575-4

1.2.8 Oily Waste

Petroleum products and bituminous materials.

1.3 REPORTS

1.3.1 Preconstruction Survey

Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site, and take photographs showing

existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site. A report shall be made

available upon request by the Engineer or Owner.

1.3.2 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste

Submit a copy, upon request by the Engineer or Owner, of the applicable EPA and State

permit(s), manifest(s), or license(s) for transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of

hazardous and regulated waste by permitted facilities.

1.3.3 Regulatory Notification

The Contractor is responsible for all regulatory notification requirements in accordance

with Federal, State and local regulations. The Contractor shall forward copies to the

Engineer prior to commencement of work activities.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental protection as defined.

Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops

during normal construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective

measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of

permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project. Comply with

Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to the environment, including water, air,

solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.

1.4.1 Licenses and Permits

The contractor is responsible for acquiring and maintaining all licenses, permits, and

approvals necessary for this project as noted in the Contract Documents. Upon request,

provide copies to the Engineer or Owner. Post all permits in a weatherproofed enclosure

visible from the entrance to the site a minimum of four feet off the ground.


March 2018 01575-5

1.4.1.1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) must be maintained at the site by the

Contractor. The Engineer has prepared a SWPPP for the Contractor’s use. The

Contractor may submit, for review and approval, an alternate plan. A guide for preparing

the SWPPP can be found at the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) website:

http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/swppp.cfm. It describes the SWPPP development

process and provides helpful guidance and tips for developing and implementing an

effective SWPPP. In addition, the guide provides customizable SWPPP templates and a

sample inspection report, in Microsoft Word format.

1.4.1.2 Responsible Land Disturber (RLD)

The Contractor shall supply the name and registration number of the “Responsible Land

Disturber” to the Owner prior to construction.

1.4.1.3 Land Disturbing Permit

Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring a Land Disturbing Permit from the local

authority.

1.4.1.4 Right of Way Land Use Permit

The Contractor shall pay for and acquire any right of way land use permits required by

the local authority or VDOT. The Contractor will be responsible for completing the work

according to the terms of the permit. The Contractor will post the bond for the permit.

The Contractor's performance bond will cover his performance of all work in the project,

including compliance with right of way regulations. Where the word "Permittee" appears

in the permit and in special provisions tied to the permit, it shall be the responsibility of

the Contractor to meet these requirements.

1.4.1.5 Building Permits

Contractor is responsible for obtaining all building permits (including structural,

mechanical, electrical, and plumbing) required by the local authority. Contractor shall

coordinate all required inspections to obtain a Certificate of Occupancy prior to project

completion.

1.4.2 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection

The Contractor is advised that this project and the Owner are subject to Federal, State,

and local regulatory agency inspections to review compliance with environmental laws

and regulations. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with any representative from any

Federal, State, or local regulatory agency who may visit the job site and shall provide

immediate notification to the Owner, who shall accompany them on any subsequent site

inspections. The Contractor shall complete, maintain, and make available to the owner or

regulatory agency personnel all documentation relating to environmental compliance


March 2018 01575-6

under applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations. The Contractor shall

immediately notify the Engineer and Owner if a Notice of Violation (NOV) is issued to

the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from

Contractor fault or negligence as well as for the payment of any civil fines or penalties

which may be assessed by any Federal, State or local regulatory agency as a result of the

Contractor's or any subcontractor's violation of any applicable Federal, State or local

environmental law or regulation. Should a Notice of Violation (NOV), Notice of

Noncompliance (NON), Notice of Deficiency (NOD), or similar regulatory agency notice

be issued to the Owner as facility owner/operator on account of the actions or inactions of

the Contractor or one of its subcontractors in the performance of work under this

contract, the Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner in defending against

regulatory assessment of any civil fines or penalties arising out of such actions or

inactions.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 FILTER FABRIC

Synthetic pervious sheet of propylene, nylon, polyester or ethylene yarn meeting the

following requirements:

Physical Property Test Requirement

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D1682 220 lbs minimum

Elongation at Failure ASTM D1682 220 lbs minimum

Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D3786 430 lbs minimum

Puncture Strength ASTM D751 125 lbs minimum

2.2 SAFETY FENCE

Plastic fencing 4 ft high meeting the following requirements:


Tensile Yield ASTM D638 Avg. 2000 lbs.

Ultimate Tensile Strength ASTM D638 Avg. 2900 lbs.

Elongation at Break ASTM D638 >1000%

Chemical Resistance Inert to most chemicals


March 2018 01575-7

Color "International" orange

2.3 TREE PROTECTION

Plastic safety fencing, described above, secured to conventional metal "T" or "U" posts.

Posts shall be driven a minimum of 18 inches in the ground and placed on 6-foot

minimum centers.

2.4 SILT FENCE

Synthetic pervious sheet of propylene, nylon, polyester or ethylene yarn secured on the

upslope to 2 inch square oak or 4 inch square pine stakes driven a minimum of 12 inches

in the ground on 6-foot minimum centers and meeting the following minimum

requirements:


Filtering Efficiency ASTM D5141 75%

Tensile Strength @ VTM-52 Standard Strength

20% Elongation 30 lbs/inch

Flow Rate ASTM D5141 0.2 gal./sq.ft./min.

UV Radiation Stability ASTM G26 90%

2.5 SUPER SILT FENCE

Standard silt fence installed with wire backing per VESCH specification 3.05-1.

2.6 STONE CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

No. 1 graded aggregate. Construct in accordance with VESCH.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE INSPECTIONS

Periodic site inspections will be made of the erosion and sediment control measures to

determine their condition and performance. The Contractor shall respond immediately by

making necessary repairs, adjustment or replacement of erosion and sediment control

measures in order to prevent erosion and/or sedimentation from the project site.


March 2018 01575-8

3.1.1 Pre-Installation Meeting

The Contractor shall contact the local authority’s environmental compliance office prior

to performing any work on the project site to allow them to determine if a meeting to

review Sediment and Control measures is necessary or required.

3.2 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of

permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of

work. Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or

specified.

3.2.1 Land Resources

Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or

shrubs without the Owner's permission. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to

existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by the Owner. Where such use of

attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor shall be responsible for any

resultant damage.

3.2.1.1 Protection of Trees

Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured, bruised, defaced, or

otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove displaced rocks from uncleared

areas. By approved excavation, remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root

systems destroyed. Delineate protected trees with safety fencing where noted on the

Drawings. Safety orange colored silt fence may be used in lieu of safety fencing where

approved by the environmental inspector.

3.2.1.2 Replacement

Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations,

and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape features. Obtain Engineer's

approval before replacement.

3.2.2 Water Resources

3.2.2.1 Oily and Hazardous Substances

Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or

local bodies of water. For oil, fuel oil, or other hazardous substance spills, verbally

notify the Engineer immediately. Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage

tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents

of the tanks in the event of leakage or spillage.


March 2018 01575-9

3.2.2.2 Wetland Buffers

Disturbance within wetlands buffers is prohibited. Do not allow silt to enter wetlands

buffers. The limits of the wetland buffers are denoted on the drawings. Discharges from

dewatering operations must pass through an approved dewatering structure or sediment

trap prior to entering wetlands buffers. Delineate wetlands buffers with safety fencing

within 50 feet of disturbed areas. Safety orange colored silt fence may be used in lieu of

safety fencing.

3.2.3 Fish and Wildlife Resources

Do not disturb fish and wildlife. Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly

disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and

wildlife, except as indicated or specified.

3.3 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Engineer and Owner historical

and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work.

Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed by the Owner to resume

work. The Owner retains ownership and control over all historical and archaeological

resources.

3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

All temporary or permanent erosion and sediment control practices necessary for

retaining sediments on the construction site shall be installed and tree protection fencing

shall be erected at the locations as specified on the site plan prior to any land clearing,

grubbing, grading or earth moving activities. Maintenance of all erosion and sediment

control practices shall be scheduled on a weekly basis and after each rainfall producing

runoff. Necessary repair, adjustment or replacement shall be performed immediately.

3.4.1 Burnoff

Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.

3.4.2 Protection of Erodible Soils

Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or specified.

Where finished grades are not indicated, restore to original grade. Immediately protect

the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct

earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils.


March 2018 01575-10

3.4.2.1 Construction entrance (CE)

Stone pad(s) shall be installed concurrently with the initiation of clearing and grubbing

operations. Where construction vehicle access routes intersect paved roads, provisions

shall be made to minimize the transport of sediment by vehicular tracking onto the paved

surface. Where sediment is transported onto a public road surface, the road shall be

cleaned thoroughly at the end of each day. Sediment shall be removed from the roads by

shoveling or sweeping and transported to a sediment control disposal area. Street

washing shall be allowed only after sediment is removed as prescribed above.

3.4.3 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils

Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation:

3.4.3.1 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site. This

includes construction of diversion ditches, benches, berms, and use of silt fences and

straw bales to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses and sediment

trapping devices.

3.4.3.1.1 Site Drainage

The installation of storm drainage facilities shall take precedence over all other

construction activities. Site drainage facilities shall be completed within 60 days

following completion of the rough grading operations at any point on the project.

3.4.3.1.2 Inlet Protection (IP)

Inlet protection practices shall be installed around the perimeter of all inlets to prevent

sediments from entering the structure prior to any clearing, grubbing, grading or earth

moving activities.

3.4.3.1.3 Sediment Basins (SB) / Sediment Traps (ST)

All effluent from excavations (including building) shall be filtered through a properly

sized sediment trap before discharging into the project storm drain system. The discharge

shall be filtered adequately so it does not adversely affect downstream wetlands.

Sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes, sediment barriers and other measures

intended to trap sediment shall be constructed at the initiation of land disturbing

activities, and shall be made functional before upslope land disturbance takes place. The

basin(s) are to be kept clear of debris. Sediment accumulations shall be cleaned out

periodically during and after construction activities. All other storm water management

facilities shall be installed and made operational within 30 days following the start of

land disturbance.


March 2018 01575-11

3.4.3.1.4 Diversions (DV), Diversion Dikes (DD), Outlet Protection (OP)

All temporary or permanent earthen structures such as dams, dikes and diversion shall be

stabilized (seeded) immediately after their construction. Stone outlet(s) shall be provided

as required.

3.4.3.1.5 Trenches and Dewatering Structures (DS)

All areas designated for underground utilities shall be stabilized as soon as practical but

not exceeding 15 days following their installation and backfilling. No more than 300 feet

of sanitary sewer, storm drain, water main, or any other line trench shall be opened at any

one time. Excavated material shall be placed on the uphill side of trenches. Effluent

from dewatering operations shall be filtered or passed through an approved sediment

trapping device, or both, and discharged in a manner that does not adversely affect

flowing streams or property beyond the contract limits.

3.4.3.2 Vegetation and Mulch

Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is

completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection. Permanent or

temporary stabilization (PS & TS) shall be applied to denuded areas within seven days

after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Temporary soil stabilization shall

be applied within seven days to denuded areas that may not be a final grade but will

remain dormant (undisturbed) for longer than 30 days. Permanent stabilization shall be

applied to areas that are to be left dormant for more than one year. Temporary vegetative

cover shall consist of seeding as scheduled on the drawings. Temporary vegetative cover

may be eliminated in favor of the permanent vegetative cover if site conditions permit

and the Architect/Engineer so directs. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent

vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching (MU), or netting. Stabilize slopes by

hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with anchored netting, sodding, or

such combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control.

Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include topsoil (TO) or nutriment

during the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of grass. The seeding

operation shall be as specified on the Drawings.

3.4.3.2.1 Stockpile Treatment

Material such as topsoil, waste, spoils, sand and other erodible materials which are to be

stockpiled for use or later disposal shall be located away from streams, drainage ditches

and other waterways. Such stockpiles shall have slopes no steeper than a 2:1 ratio and

shall be protected against erosion with temporary vegetation, covers, and silt fencing

around the stockpile. Removal of material from such stockpile shall be done from the

side(s) away from the down grade slope. After each removal or stockpile operation,

disturbed area must be restabilized. Storage areas on the project site must be approved by

the Owner prior to installation.


March 2018 01575-12

3.5 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES

Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly emptied. Do not

prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas

when handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean.

Remove all solid waste (including non-hazardous debris) from the property and dispose

off-site at an approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most

stringent local, State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241, 40 CFR 243, and

40 CFR 258.

3.6 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES

3.6.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management

The Contractor shall identify all construction activities which will generate hazardous

waste/debris. The Contractor must provide a documented waste determination for all

resultant waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris shall be identified, labeled, handled,

stored, and disposed of in accordance with all Federal, State, and local regulations

including 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR

266, and 40 CFR 268. Hazardous waste shall also be managed in accordance with the

approved Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan.

Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173. No

hazardous waste shall be brought onto Owner property. For hazardous wastes spills,

verbally notify the Owner immediately. Spill response shall be in accordance with 40

CFR 300 and applicable State regulations.

3.7 DUST CONTROL

Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods. Sprinkle or treat,

with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by

operations. Dry power brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet

mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for

cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be

permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not

unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.

3.8 NOISE

Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the EPA.

Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 01781-1

SECTION 01781 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit operation and maintenance (O&M) data which is specifically applicable to this

contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment or product.

Data containing extraneous information to be sorted through to find applicable

instructions will not be accepted. Present information in sufficient detail to clearly

explain user O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly

level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with Section

01330, "Submittal Procedures."

1.1.1 Quantity

Submit copies of the manufacturers' information specified herein for the components,

assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, and accessories. The items for which O&M data

is required are listed in the technical sections which specify that particular item. Where

not specifically called for in the technical sections, supply Data Package 2S.

1.1.2 Package Content

For each product, system, or piece of equipment requiring submission of O&M data,

submit the package required in the individual technical section. At a minimum, package

content shall be as required in the paragraph entitled "Schedule of Operations and

Maintenance Data Packages." The operation and maintenance manuals are to be put in a

format and with content acceptable to the locality and the Engineer.

1.1.3 Delivery

Four copies of Operations and Maintenance Manuals must be submitted to the Engineer

for review and approval prior to acceptance by the locality to operate the pump station.

Submit Operations and Maintenance data to the Engineer for review and approval to use

in the manual; submit data specified for a given item within 30 calendar days after the

item is delivered to the contract site. The locality will not accept the station without

submission of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.1.4 Changes to Submittals

Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the

Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M

data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Owner for final acceptance of

submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the

notification of this change requirement.


March 2018 01781-2

1.2 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES

1.2.1 Safety Precautions

List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating

conditions.

1.2.2 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-shutdown Procedures

Include a control sequence for each of these operations.

1.2.3 Environmental Conditions

Include a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant

data) which are best suited for each product or piece of equipment and describe

conditions under which equipment should not be allowed to run.

1.2.4 Lubrication Data

Include lubrication data, other than instructions for lubrication in accordance with

paragraph entitled "Operator Service Requirements":

A. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and

applications;

B. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points,

recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities; and

C. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency.

1.2.5 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions.

Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought.

Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and

equipment may be reused or require replacement.

1.2.6 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and

control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate

depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number

electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each

type, identically to actual installation numbering.


March 2018 01781-3

1.2.7 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

Include instructions and list tools required to restore product or equipment to proper

condition or operating standards.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES

Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The required

information for each O&M data package is as follows:

1.3.1 Data Package 1S

A. Safety precautions

B. Environmental conditions

C. Wiring and control diagrams

D. Maintenance procedures

1.3.2 Data Package 2S

A. Safety precautions

B. Environmental conditions

C. Lubrication data

D. Wiring and control diagrams

E. Maintenance and repair procedures

F. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures

G. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 01781-4



March 2018 02060-1

SECTION 02060 — BUILDING AND STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

1. GENERAL

1.1 Summary

A. This section addresses the work related to furnishing all supervision, labor,

materials and equipment in the work for demolition of existing buildings and structures.

1.2 Section Includes

A. Demolition of designated structures and appurtenances, backfilling, and

removal of materials from site.

B. Demolition and removal of foundations and slabs-on-grade.

C. Disconnecting and abandonment or removal of identified utilities.

D. Filling of underground structures and abandonment of piping.

E. Demolition and removal of fences.

1.3 Record Drawings

A. Submit in accordance with supplemental specification for water and sanitary

sewer record drawings.

B. Accurately record actual locations of abandoned utilities or subsurface

obstructions remaining on site.

1.4 Regulatory Requirements

A. Comply with Laws and Regulations for demolition of structures, protection of

adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities.

C. Notify affected utility companies and CITY before starting work and comply

with their requirements.

D. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permits.

E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials

are encountered.


March 2018 02060-2

2. PRODUCTS

A. Lime shall be in accordance with the Erosion & Sediment Control Notes

within the Construction Documents.

B. Topsoil shall be in accordance with Erosion & Sediment Control Notes within

the Construction Documents.

C. Sand shall be defined as material complying with ASTM D2487 Unified Soil

Classification System groups SW and SP.

D. Fill shall be in accordance with Section 02315.

E. Flowable fill shall be in accordance with the Hampton Roads Planning

District Commission Regional Construction Standards, latest edition.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures, which

are not to be demolished.

C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and

shoring.

D. Mark location of existing utilities.

E. Dewater all tanks and structures designated to be demolished; remove and

legally dispose of all liquid, sludge, and scum.

F. Remove all designated equipment, piping, electrical components, and

appurtenances.

3.2 Demolition Requirements

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures.

B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

Notify CITY. Do not resume operations until so directed by CITY.

C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses.

Maintain and protect egress and access at all times.

D. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when

demolition equipment or activity will affect their property.


March 2018 02060-3

E. Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses, water connections,

and water for this purpose.

F. Repair or replace structures, equipment, piping, etc. that is to remain in

service if they are damaged by demolition operations. CITY shall have sole

authority to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.

3.3 Demolition

A. Disconnect and cap all utilities designated for removal within demolition

areas, as required. Provide appropriate blind flanges, plugs, and caps for

remaining piping. When piping is removed in an area to be abandoned by

filling, remaining wall castings and pipes shall be plugged by filling with

flowable fill.

B. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of 3 feet below finished

grade or as designated on the drawings. Structures less than 4 feet in depth

shall be removed entirely.

C. Remove concrete slabs on grade.

D. Add 200 pounds of agricultural grade lime in four (4) equally spaced (50 lb)

layers throughout fill as the structure is being filled with sand. Top-most lime

layer shall be 3-feet below finished grade.

E. Fill structures with sand and cover with 6-inch topsoil layer.

F. Remove demolished materials from site.

G. Do not burn materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.

H. Remove temporary work.

I. Fill and grade site; follow Section 02315.

J. Seed all areas of fill and other earth areas disturbed by operations; follow the

Erosion and Sediment Control Notes within the Construction Documents.

3.4 Schedules

A. The City shall be given the opportunity to salvage equipment from the existing

station prior to demolition. Removal and disposal of all remaining equipment

shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02060-4



March 2018 02100-1

SECTION 02100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

1. GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Clearing

Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, brush, down timber, rotten wood, rubbish, any

other vegetation, and objectionable material at or above original ground elevation not

designated to be saved; clearing also includes removal of fences, walls, guard posts, guard

rail, signs, and other obstructions interfering with the proposed work.

1.1.2 Grubbing

Grubbing is defined as the removal from below the surface of the natural ground of stumps,

roots and stubs, brush, organic materials, and debris.

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS

The Contractor may clear and grub all obstructions within the limits indicated. The

Contractor shall endeavor to minimize the clearing required and make every effort to save

trees and shrubbery. All areas disturbed during the course of construction shall be returned to

a condition equal to or better than those existing prior to the commencement of construction

and in accordance with the plans and specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."

SD-02 Shop Drawings

VDOT Tree Trimming Permit

The Contractor will obtain the necessary permit, if required, and supply one copy to the

Owner.

Burning Permits

If permitted by local and state jurisdiction, provide one copy to the Engineer and post

and maintain one copy on-site with other permits.

Debris Disposal

If debris is to be disposed of on private lands, obtain a letter from the owner of the land

granting permission. Provide one copy to the Engineer.


March 2018 02100-2

Erosion and Sediment Control Permit (aka Land Disturbing)

Will be acquired by the Contractor.

Certificate to Construct

Will be acquired by the Owner.

Post all permits in a weatherproofed enclosure visible from the entrance to the site. The

sign shall be a minimum of four feet off the ground.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FENCING

Safety fencing specified in Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls."

2.2 WOOD TREE GUARDS

2.2.1 Wood posts

2"x4" Southern Pine Lumber

2.2.2 Wood stringers

2"x2" Southern Pine Lumber

2.3 WRAPPING MATERIALS

2.3.1 Burlap

AASHTO M182, Class 1

2.3.2 Krinkle-kraft waterproof paper

4" width

2.4 TREE WOUND DRESSING

Antiseptic and waterproof, asphalt base.

2.5 STRAW BALES

Wheat or oat straw, reasonably free of viable seed, well cured.


March 2018 02100-3

2.6 FILTER BARRIER:

Geotextile fabric conforming to Section 245.02 of the VDOT Road and Bridge

Specifications.

2.7 SILT FENCE

Conform to Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls."

2.8 ROCK CHECK DAMS


2.9 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE:


3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Mark areas to be cleared, the areas to be grubbed, and items to be saved with stakes,

flags, paint or plastic colored ribbon for the approval of the Engineer.

2. Protect benchmarks, utilities, existing trees, shrubs and other landscape features

designated for preservation with temporary barricades satisfactory to the Engineer.

3. No material shall be stored or construction operation carried on within 5 feet of any

tree to be saved or within the tree protection fencing.

4. When a private enclosure fence encroaches on the work area, notify the property

owner at least 5 days in advance of the clearing/grubbing operations to permit the

owner to remove it, construct a supplemental fence, or make such other arrangements

as may be necessary for security purposes; in failure of the property owner to

reasonably proceed with the work required to secure his property, carefully remove

the fence, in whole or in part, and neatly pile the materials onto the owner's property.

3.2 CLEARING

Confine clearing to within the permanent and construction rights-of-way or property. Fell

trees in a manner that will avoid damage to trees, shrubs, and other installations which are to

be retained. Where stumps are not required to be grubbed, flush-cut with ground elevation.


March 2018 02100-4

3.3 GRUBBING

Grub areas within the construction limits to remove roots and other objectionable material to

a minimum depth of 8". Remove all stumps within the cleared areas except those designated

to be saved as indicated on the plans.

3.4 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL

Strip topsoil to whatever depth it may occur from areas to be excavated, filled, or graded and

stockpile at a location approved by the Engineer for use in finish grading. The topsoil is the

property of the Owner and shall not be used as backfill. Topsoil shall not be removed from

the site unless otherwise authorized by Engineer. Provide silt fence around toe of stockpile.

3.5 DEBRIS DISPOSAL

Trees, logs, branches, brush, stumps, and other debris resulting from clearing and grubbing

operations shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed of. Do

not deposit or bury on the site debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work. Debris

may be burned on-site if local ordinances allow open-air burning, if required permits are

obtained, and if burning operations are conducted in compliance with local ordinances and

regulations. Burning contract and permits shall be acquired by Contractor.

3.6 RESTORATION

Repair all injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, and roots of remaining plants by properly dressing,

cutting, tracing and painting, using approved arboricultural practices and materials. Replace

trees, shrubs and plants designated to be saved which are permanently injured or die during

the period of the warranty as a result of construction operations with like species acceptable

to the Owner. Remove protective fences, enclosures and guards upon the completion of the

project. Restore guard posts, guard rail, signs and other interferences to the condition equal

to that existing before construction operations.

3.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

Install in accordance with details shown on drawings, in accordance with Section 01575,

"Temporary Environmental Controls," and in compliance with all applicable sections of the

Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, latest edition.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02315-1

SECTION 02315 - EXCAVATION AND FILL

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. The

referenced publications shall be the current effective edition.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m))

ASTM D 1140 Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200

(75-Micrometer) Sieve

ASTM D 1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-

Cone Method

ASTM D 1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))

ASTM D 1883 Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio

(CBR) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils

ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances

CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)

COE EM-385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual


March 2018 02315-2

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures."

SD-06 Test Reports

Fill, common fill and backfill test

Select material test

Capillary Water Barrier

Density tests

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.

1.4 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING

Base bids on the following criteria:

A. Surface elevations are as indicated.

B. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.

C. Groundwater elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time

subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent groundwater

elevation at the time of construction.

D. Character of soil material to be encountered is as indicated in the geotechnical

evaluation report.

E. Hard materials will not be encountered.

F. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in a manner approved by the

Owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and

frozen, deleterious, unsuitable or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the

maximum particle diameter shall not exceed one-half the lift thickness at the intended

location.


March 2018 02315-3

2.1.1 Common Fill

Unclassified soil material that can be compacted to form a dense stable soil mass to the

density specified for the intended location.

2.1.2 Backfill and Fill Material (Not at Building or Vaults Foundations)

ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC with a maximum

ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35, maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12, and a

maximum of 25 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve.

Contractor shall re-utilize suitable excavated material as fill. Contractor shall coordinate

with the City for excavated material suitability. Excavated material deemed suitable for

use shall be stored onsite if not needed when first excavated. (May not leave then come

back).

2.1.3 Backfill and Fill Material (At Building and Vault Foundations)

ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, SW, SP, SM, with a maximum ASTM D 4318

liquid limit of 20, maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 6, a maximum of 25

percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve and should be free of rubble,

organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material.

2.1.4 Topsoil

Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of

subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and

other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5

to 7.

2.1.5 Select Material

ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, SW, SP with not more than 5 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and maximum particle size not exceeding 2

inches.

2.2 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER

ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 7 with a maximum of 3 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and conforming to the general soil material

requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Soil Materials."


March 2018 02315-4

2.3 BORROW

Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from

sources off-site or identified by the Owner.

2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

Metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning

tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.

Provide tape on rolls, 6-inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the

intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters

continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read,

"CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and

printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes

Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials

Orange: Telephone and Other Communications

Blue: Water Systems

Green: Sewer Systems

2.5 PIPE BEDDING AND AGGREGATE BASES

ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 7 with a maximum of 3 percent by weight

passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, and conforming to the general soil material

requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Soil Materials."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

3.1.1 Protection

3.1.1.1 Protection Systems

Provide shoring, bracing, and sheeting in accordance with COE EM-385-1-1.

3.1.1.2 Site Drainage

Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water and waterborne

sediment encountered during construction. Provide appropriate erosion and sediment

control measures as indicated and in accordance with Section 01575, “Temporary

Environmental Controls.”


March 2018 02315-5

3.1.2 Surface Preparation

3.1.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Comply with Section 02100, “Clearing and Grubbing.”

3.1.2.2 Stripping

Strip existing topsoil to a depth of 4 inches without contamination by subgrade material.

Stockpile topsoil separately from other excavated material and locate convenient to finish

grading area.

3.1.2.3 Unsuitable Material

Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish

underneath paved areas, foundations or concrete slabs.

3.2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall

physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to

starting construction. Conform to Section 01014, "Protection of Underground Utilities."

3.3 EXCAVATION

Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials

that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended

location. Keep excavations free from water. Discharge from dewatering operations shall

be directed to appropriate sediment trapping devices. Excavate soil softened or made

unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather or due to Contractor's

operations. Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D

698 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated

depth with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698,

maximum density at no additional cost or time.

3.3.1 Pipe, Conduit and Utility Trenches

Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform

support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.

3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

3.4.1 Common Fill Placement

Provide for general site. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or

compactors with mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by


March 2018 02315-6

rain to satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with

a smooth roller, or both.

3.4.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement

Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select material is

provided. Place in 6 inch lifts. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the

structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when

approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure.

3.4.3 Select Material Placement

Provide under capillary water barrier for structures not pile supported. Place in 6-inch

lifts. Placement adjacent to structures shall be as structural elements are complete and

accepted. Place against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to

avoid loading upon or against structure.

3.4.4 Capillary Water Barrier

Provide under floor slab on a compacted subgrade. Place in 4-inch lifts.

3.4.5 Trench Backfilling

Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Place and

compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 6-inch lifts to top of trench and in 6

inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas.

3.4.5.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape

Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12-inches below

finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6-inches below top of subgrade.

3.4.5.2 Bedding Requirements

Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section or where indicated, provide

bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified

herein. Backfill to top of pipe, to top of trench under structures and paved areas, shall be

compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density.

3.5 COMPACTION

Expressed as a percentage of maximum density at optimal moisture content. Determine

in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of

existing subgrade will be required.


March 2018 02315-7

3.5.1 General Site

Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5-foot line

measured from the toe of the concrete foundation to 80 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.2 Structures and Concrete Slabs

Compact subgrades of structures, foundations and slabs to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557.

Compact select material beneath concrete slabs and drainage structures to 95 percent of

ASTM D 698.

3.5.3 Capillary Water Barrier

Compact with two passes of a hand-operated, plate type vibratory compactor.

3.5.4 Foundation Backfill

Compact areas within 5-feet of the toe of the foundation to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557.

3.5.5 Paved Areas

Compact top 12-inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557. Compact fill and

backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.6 Sidewalks

Compact top 6-inches of subgrade to 95 percent of ASTM D 698. Compact aggregate

bedding materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.

3.5.7 Deep Fill Consolidation

Fills greater than 10 feet deep shall be allowed to consolidate after placement in

accordance with recommendations from the geotechnical engineer prior to construction

of pavements, building structures, or slabs on the fill. Maximum long term settlement

shall not exceed 1 inch for pavements and equipment slabs and ½ inch for building

structures.

3.6 GRADING

Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one-foot. Grade areas to drain water away

from structures. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by

Contractor's operations, grade as directed.


March 2018 02315-8

3.6.1 Topsoil

Scarify existing subgrade. Provide 4-inches of topsoil for newly graded finish earth

surfaces and areas disturbed by the Contractor. Additional topsoil will not be required if

work is performed in compliance with stripping and stockpiling requirements. If there is

insufficient on-site topsoil meeting specified requirements for topsoil, provide topsoil

required in excess of that available. Seed in accordance with Section 02900,

"Landscaping and Seeding."

3.7 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL

Remove from the project site surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for

filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.8.1 Sampling

Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.

3.8.2 Testing

Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional

tests for each source change.

3.8.2.1 Fill, Common Fill and Backfill Material Testing

Test fill, common fill, and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for

conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than

the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit; ASTM D 698 or

ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.8.2.2 Select Material Testing

Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487

gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 698

or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.

3.8.2.3 Capillary Water Barrier Material Testing

Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to gradation specified

in ASTM C 33.


March 2018 02315-9

3.8.2.4 Density Tests

Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556. Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test

at the start of the job. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 500 square feet

of subgrade in fills for structures and concrete slabs, and every 625 square feet for other

fill areas and every 500 square feet of subgrade in cut.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02315-10



March 2018 02610-1

SECTION 02610 – UNDERGROUND UTILITY PIPE

1. GENERAL

This section refers to gravity sanitary sewer pipe, force main pipe, fittings, and

accessories required for buried service outside the building perimeter. Interior process

pipe and fittings shall comply with Section 15060, “Interior Process Pipe, Fittings And

Valves.” Domestic water supply piping shall comply with Section 15210, “Domestic

Water and Waste Piping.” Underground utilities shall comply with the Hampton Roads

Planning District Commission Regional Construction Standards, latest edition.

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals


AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings

for Water

AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in.

(75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other

Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings

AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other

Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. Through 24 in. (76

mm Through 610 mm) and 54 in. Through 64 in. (1,400

mm Through 1,600 mm), for Water Service

AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service


Appurtenances


March 2018 02610-2

AWWA C605 Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated

Fittings, 4 In.-12 In. (100 mm-300 mm), for Water

Distribution

AWWA C909 Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO)

Pressure Pipe, 4 In.-12 In. (100 mm-300 mm), for Water

Distribution

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Submit manufacturer’s standard catalog data sheets for pipe, pipe fittings, joints, joint

gaskets, lubricants, valves, and appurtenances.

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, joints,

joint gaskets, lubricants, valves, and appurtenances meet or exceed specification

requirements.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.3.1 Delivery and Handling

Do not place materials on private property without written permission of the property

owner. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to

materials. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Avoid shock or damage at all times. Take

measures to prevent damage to the exterior surface or internal lining of the pipe.

1.3.2 Storage

Do not stack pipe higher than recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Store all PVC

products and gaskets in a cool, dry location out of direct sunlight, covering if necessary,

and not in contact with petroleum products.


March 2018 02610-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

Sanitary force main and gravity systems shall comply with the HRPDC Regional

Construction Standards.

2.2 MARKING TAPE

All pipelines shall be marked with a continuous strip of identification tape as specified in

Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Perform trench excavation to the line and grade indicated on the Contract Drawings and

in accordance with Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill." Unless otherwise indicated on

the Contract Drawings, provide for a minimum cover of 36-inches above the top of

piping laid in trenches. Provide pipe bedding as specified in Section 02315, “Excavation

and Fill” and as detailed in the HRPDC Regional Construction Standards. Place bedding

in a manner to avoid segregation, and compact to the maximum practical density so that

the pipe can be laid to the required tolerances.

3.2 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM

Install sanitary gravity and force main sewer systems in accordance with Division 8 of the

HRPDC Regional Construction Standards.

3.3 LAYING PIPE IN TRENCHES

Lower pipe into trench using handling equipment designed for the purpose to assure

safety of personnel and to avoid damage to pipe. Do not drop pipe. Chains will not be

permitted. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with the bell or groove pointing upstream. Lay

pipe to a true uniform line with the barrel of the pipe resting solidly in pipe bedding

material throughout its length. Excavate recesses in pipe bedding material to

accommodate joints, fittings and appurtenances. Do not subject pipe to a blow or shock to

achieve solid bearing or grade. Lay each section of pipe in such a manner as to form a

close concentric joint with the adjoining section and to avoid offsets in the flow line.

Clean and inspect each section of pipe before joining. Assemble to provide tight, flexible

joints that permit movement caused by expansion, contraction, and ground movement.

Use lubricant recommended by the pipe or fitting manufacturer for making joints. If

unusual joining resistance is encountered or if the pipe cannot be fully inserted into the

bell, disassemble joint, inspect for damage, re-clean joint components, and reassemble.


March 2018 02610-4

3.4 PROGRESSION OF WORK

Disassemble and remake improperly assembled joints using a new gasket. Check each

pipe installed as to line and grade in place. Correct deviation from grade immediately. A

deviation from the designed grade as shown on the Contract Drawings, or deflection of

pipe joints, will be cause for rejection. Place sufficient backfill on each section of pipe,

as it is laid, to hold firmly in place. Clean interior of the pipe as work progresses. Where

cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe size, use a suitable swab or drag in

the pipe and pull forward past each joint immediately after the jointing has been

completed. Keep trenches and excavations free of water during construction. When the

work is not in progress, and at the end of each workday, securely plug open ends to

prevent trench water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipes or fittings.

3.5 DEFLECTION:

When it is necessary to deflect pressure mains from a straight alignment horizontally or

vertically, do not exceed 50% of manufacturer’s recommendations or per AWWA C600

or AWWA C605, as applicable, whichever is most stringent.

3.6 THRUST RESTRAINT

Provide thrust restraints for pressure pipeline at all bends, tees, valves and changes in

direction as indicated on the Drawings.

3.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

Conform to the applicable requirements of Section 03300, “Cast-In-Place Concrete,” and

as detailed on the drawings.

3.8 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

Backfill trenches as specified in Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3.9 TESTING

Provide testing in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 15190, "Hydrostatic

Testing of Piping Systems."

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02741-1

SECTION 02741 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM D 1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures

Using Marshall Apparatus

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the Virginia Department of

Transportation (VDOT), Road and Bridge Specifications, Latest Edition, except that

contractual and payment provisions do not apply, and are hereby made a part of these

specifications and as specified on the plans. The specification sections referred to herein are

VDOT specifications.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.3.1 Final Paving

The final layer of asphaltic concrete paving shall be placed no earlier than 30 days prior

to substantial completion of the project unless a written request is received and approved

by the Owner or his representative.

1.3.2 Warranty

Replace without additional cost to the Owner, all sections of paving which may become

defective within a year after date of Substantial Completion. Maintain paving free of

vegetation growing through from below for one year after date of Substantial

Completion. Any procedure required for eradication of such vegetation growth shall be

subject to approval of the Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



March 2018 02741-2

SD-07 Certificates

Asphalt concrete: Submit certificates, signed by the producer, that paving

materials and incidental construction items conform to specification requirements.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE

Provide asphalt concrete in accordance with applicable requirements of the VDOT Road

and Bridge Specifications, except where specified otherwise.

2.2 SUBGRADE MATERIALS

The subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with Section 02315,

"Excavation and Fill," and as indicated on the drawings. If material unsuitable for subgrade

is encountered during compaction, the Contractor will be required to remove the unsuitable

material and backfill with suitable soil materials. If the backfill materials are overly wet or

dry, the Contractor shall manipulate until satisfactory or at his option remove and replace at

his own expense. The extent of undercutting and backfilling operations will be determined

by the Owner’s representative.

2.3 SUBBASE MATERIALS

Stone Base Course: #21-A or #21-B Graded Aggregate per Section 208 of the VDOT

Specifications, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 PRIME COAT

The stone base course shall receive a prime coat of liquid asphalt (RC-250), prior to

subsequent course. Material and application shall conform to Sections 210 and 311 of the

VDOT Specifications. Application rates shall be .20-.25 gallon per square yard. Contractor

to immediately remove any materials, which during the application thereof, are accidentally

splattered onto curbs and gutters, etc. If bituminous pavement is 4 1/2 inches finished

thickness or more, prime coat may be omitted.

2.5 TACK COAT

The asphaltic concrete paving base course shall receive a tack coat of liquid asphalt (RC-

250), prior to subsequent course. Material and application shall conform to Sections 210

and 311 of the VDOT Specifications. Application rates shall be 0.05 - 0.10 gallons per

square yard for undiluted asphalt. Diluted asphalt shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 - 0.15

gallons per square yard. If pavement surface has not been contaminated or exposed for

more than 72 hours, tack coat may be omitted upon approval by the Engineer.


March 2018 02741-3

2.6 BASE COURSE MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide the asphalt course as indicated. Base Course shall conform to

Section 211 of the VDOT Specifications, Type BM-3 (Type BM-25.0 using "Superpave"

Mixtures). Irregularities, roller marks, etc. will not be accepted.

2.7 SURFACE COURSE MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide the asphalt course as indicated. Wearing course shall conform

Section 211 of the VDOT Specifications, Type SM-2A (Type SM-9.5A using "Superpave"

Mixtures). Irregularities, roller marks, etc. will not be accepted.

2.8 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

Excavation and filling to establish elevation of subgrade is specified in Section 02315,

"Excavation and Fill."

3. EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

Provide construction in accordance with applicable requirements of the VDOT Road and

Bridge Specifications, except where indicated or specified otherwise.

3.1.1 Subgrade

Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 02315, "Excavation and Fill."

3.1.2 Subbase

Construct subbase as specified on the plans and in accordance with Section 308 and 309 of

the VDOT Specifications. The stone subbase course shall be proof-rolled and soft spots

replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

3.1.3 Base Course

Construct base course in accordance with Section 315 of the VDOT Specifications.

Provide Prime Coat prior to placing base course as specified herein. Compact asphalt

mixture to 95 percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of same mixture prepared

in accordance with ASTM D 1559.


March 2018 02741-4

3.1.4 Surface Course

Construct wearing course in accordance with Section 315 of the VDOT Specifications.

Provide tack coat on base course as specified herein. Compact asphalt mixture to 95

percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of same mixture prepared in accordance

with ASTM D 1559.

3.2 PROTECTION

Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until surface

temperature is less than 140 degrees F (60 degrees C). Vehicular traffic shall be prohibited

from newly paved areas for 12 hours.

3.3 TOLERANCES

Upon completion of grading operations, subgrade shall be firm, hard and unyielding with a

true, even and uniform surface at required grades; finished grades shall not show any

deviation in excess of 0.04' from intended grade when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

Minor pavement surface projections, joints and minor honeycombed surfaces shall be ironed

smooth to grade as may be directed by the Owner’s representative.


Testing shall be provided by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner’s representative.

Stone base and asphalt pavement compaction shall be tested every 6,000 square feet.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

Maintain subgrade in its final condition until surfacing is completed. Maintain ditches,

drains and flowlines along subgrade to drain effectively at all times.

3.6 CLEAN-UP

Operations include removal of oil splashes from adjacent construction and prompt removal

from site of excess excavated materials, debris and surplus materials.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02821-1

SECTION 02821- CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM B 117 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM F 883 Padlocks

ASTM F 1043 Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial

Chain Link Fence Framework

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

FS RR-F-191 Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain-Link

Fence Fabric, and Accessories) (General Specification)

FS RR-F-191/1 Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain-Link Fence

Fabric) (Detail Specification)


Gates) (Detail Specification)

FS RR-F-191/3 Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts,

Top Rails and Braces) (Detail Specification)


Accessories) (Detail Specification)


March 2018 02821-2

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Gates

Post spacing

Privacy Slats

SD-03 Product Data

Chain-link fencing components

Accessories


Fence

Gates


Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to

provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES

FS RR-F-191 and detailed specifications as referenced and other requirements as

specified.

2.1.1 Fabric

FS RR-F-191/1; Type IV, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated over zinc- or aluminum-

coated steel, 9-gage core wire size. Mesh size, 2 inches. Provide selvage knuckled at

both selvages. Height of fabric, as indicated. Color shall be chosen by Architect upon

submittal of manufacturer’s standard color pallet.


March 2018 02821-3

2.1.2 Gates

FS RR-F-191/2; Type I, single swing or Type II, double swing, as indicated. Shape and

size of gate opening, as indicated. Framing and bracing members, round steel alloy.

PVC-coated over zinc- or aluminum-coated steel. Gate frames and braces of minimum

sizes listed in FS RR-F-191/3 for each Class and Grade except that steel pipe frames shall

be 1.90 inches od, 0.120 inches minimum wall thickness. Gate fabric, as specified for

fencing fabric. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges, keepers, and accessories, shall be

galvanized. Gate latches, fork type. Gate leaves more than 8 feet wide shall have

intermediate members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist.

Gate leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach gate

fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except that welding will

not be permitted. Arrange padlocking latches to be accessible from both sides of gate,

regardless of latching arrangement.

2.1.3 Posts, Rails, and Braces

FS RR-F-191/3 line posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A or B. End, corner, and pull posts;

Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A or B. Braces and rails; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A or B., in

minimum sizes listed in FS RR-F-191/3 for each class and grade. Provide PVC color

coating, minimum thickness, 0.10 inch.

2.1.3.1 Composite Posts

Composite Posts shall not be permitted on this job site.

2.1.4 Fencing Accessories

FS RR-F-191/4. Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.

Provide accessories with polyvinyl (PVC) coatings similar to that specified for chain-link

fabric or framework.

2.1.5 Privacy Slats

Provide where indicated on Architectural Elevations. Opaque “M” shaped UV stabilized

plastic slat for use with chain link fencing. Lite Link Fence Slat or approved equivalent.

Color shall be chosen by Architect upon submittal of manufacturer’s standard color

pallet.

2.1.6 Concrete

Provide as specified in Section 03300, "Cast-In-Place Concrete."

2.1.7 Grout

Provide grout of proportions one part Portland Cement to three parts clean, well-graded

sand and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.


March 2018 02821-4

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

3.1.1 Clearing and Grading

Clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded,

compacted fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence

line.

3.1.2 Excavation

Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete-embedded items, except in bedrock. If

bedrock is encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock,

whichever is less, with a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside

diameter of post. Clear post holes of loose material. Dispose of waste material on site, as

directed.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION

Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Install fence in accordance

with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.

3.2.1 Post Spacing

Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide

gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Do not exceed 500 feet on

straight runs between braced posts. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing in both

directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in grade.

Provide drawings showing location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts.

3.2.2 Post Setting

Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 72 hours before

performing other work on posts.

3.2.2.1 Earth and Bedrock

Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Compact concrete to eliminate voids and

finish to a dome shape.

3.2.2.2 Concrete Slabs and Walls

Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12

inches. Fill sleeve joint with non-shrink grout, or other approved material.


March 2018 02821-5

3.2.3 Bracing

Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a

compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and a diagonal truss

rod and truss tightener used as a tension member.

3.2.4 Top Rails

Install top rails before installing chain-link fabric. Pass top rail through intermediate post

caps. Provide expansion coupling spaced as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2.5 Tension Wires

Install tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place bottom

tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.

3.2.6 Fabric

Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom rail and tension wire, close to both

sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure fabric to

posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally

weaving to integral fastening loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full length of

each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured. Install fabric

so that bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level.

3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Post Caps

Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer. Post caps to accommodate top

rail.

3.3.2 Supporting Arms

Supporting arms to accommodate top rail. Install supporting arms as recommended by

manufacturer. In addition to manufacturer's standard connections, permanently secure

supporting arms to posts. Studs driven by low-velocity powder-actuated tools may be

used with steel, wrought iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron. Do not use studs driven by

powder-actuated tools with gray iron or other material that will fracture.

3.3.3 Gates

Install all gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 02821-6



March 2018 03300-1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

ACI 301 Structural Concrete

ACI 318 Structural Concrete and Commentary

ACI 350 Concrete Structures and Commentary


ASTM A 497 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement

ASTM A 615/A 615M Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement

ASTM C 31/C 31M Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field

ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens

ASTM C 42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams

on Concrete

ASTM C 88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate.

ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles

Machine


March 2018 03300-2

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 143 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

ASTM C 172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method

ASTM C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method

ASTM C 260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete

ASTM C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 567 Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete

ASTM C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals

ASTM C 989 Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars

ASTM C 1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM C 1478 Storm Drain Resilient Connectors between Reinforced

Concrete Storm Sewer Structures, Pipes, and Laterals

ASTM D 5759 Characterization of Coal Fly Ash and Clean Coal

Combustion Fly Ash for Potential Uses

ASTM F2510 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Structures and Corrugated High Density

Polyethylene Drainage Pipes


March 2018 03300-3

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcing layout

SD-03 Product data

Waterstops

Wall sleeves

Pipe sleeve seals

SD-06 Test Reports

Compressive strength tests

SD-07 Certificates

Concrete

Provide the dry weight of cement, saturated surface-dry-weights of fine and coarse

aggregate and quantities, type, and name of admixtures and of water (per cubic yard

of concrete used in the manufacture of each batch of concrete. Certify the concrete

is proportioned to provide concrete of quality and strength specified for its intended

purpose.

1.3 DELIVERY

Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement and embedded items are in place and

ready for concrete placement.


March 2018 03300-4

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 READY-MIXED CONCRETE

ASTM C 94, Option A. Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi,

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Slump shall be between 2 and 4 inches.

Provide ASTM C 260, 4 +/- 2 percent air entrainment for concrete exposed to freeze-

thaw conditions, normal weight concrete.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

2.2.1 Reinforcing Bars

ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed, including supplementary requirement S1.

2.2.2 Welded Wire Fabric

ASTM A 497, galvanized.

2.3 MATERIALS FOR CURING CONCRETE

2.3.1 Impervious Sheeting

Waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.

2.3.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type 2, free of paraffin or petroleum.

2.4 MOISTURE BARRIER

Polyethylene sheeting, minimum 10 mil thickness, vapor permeance rating not exceeding

0.5 perms.


March 2018 03300-5

2.5 WALL SLEEVES AND SEALS

Conduits and pipes passing through concrete floors and walls shall be made with a wall

sleeve, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

2.5.1 Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Seals constructed of an assembly of synthetic rubber links connected with corrosion

resistant stainless steel bolts shall be used to seal the space between wall sleeve and

carrier pipe for pipes entering perpendicular to the concrete surface. When the bolts are

tightened, Delrin plastic pressure plates compress the rubber links to fill the annular space

between the pipe and the wall sleeve to form a watertight seal. Seals shall be

manufactured by Link Seal or approved equal.

2.5.2 Non-Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Rubber boot connectors with stainless steel bands meeting ASTM C 923, ASTM C 1478,

and ASTM F 2510, as applicable for the application, by Kor-N-Seal, PSX, or approved

equal shall be used for conduits and pipes passing through non-perpendicular

penetrations or where entering circular structures below grade. Place non-shrink grout in

annular space (inside and outside, as applicable) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

All belowground concrete construction joints (vertical and horizontal) shall have

bentonite-type waterstops that have a 75 percent minimum bentonite content. Acceptable

waterstop is WATERSTOP-RX® by Volclay. Where a pipe, conduit, or sleeve is cast

into a concrete wall, roof or floor, a bentonite waterstop must be installed around the

outside of either the pipe or of the sleeve.

2.7 NONSHRINK GROUT

ASTM C 1107.

2.8 FORM MATERIALS

Provide metal, plywood, or hardboard forms capable of producing the required surface

without adverse effect on concrete. Do not use form coating that adversely affects

concrete surfaces or impairs subsequent applications to the concrete. Provide metal form

ties, factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off type that will leave holes less than 1/4 inch

deep and not more than one inch in diameter.

2.9 SPACERS, CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, TIES AND OTHER DEVICES

Galvanized steel or non-corroding material conforming to the Concrete Reinforcing Steel

institute (CRSI) “Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction.”


March 2018 03300-6

2.10 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1

Fly Ash: Fly ash conforming to ASTM D5759 may be used if required for ASR design

in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.

Aggregates: ASTM C 33 for normal weight concrete. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete

For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or course aggregates that contain

substances that cause spalling.

Where aggregate are alkali-reactive us low alkali cement and use admixtures in

accordance with ACI 350, or use ASR resistance aggregate in accordance with

ACI 350.

Water: Potable.

Admixtures, General: provide concrete admixture that conform to ASTM C233 and that

contain no more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

Air –Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other required admixtures.

Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASMT C 494, Type F or Type G.

Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

ACI 301.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

ACI 301. Provide bars, wire fabric, including wire ties, supports, and other devices

necessary to install and secure the reinforcement.


March 2018 03300-7

3.3 SETTING MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL

Place and secure anchors and bolts, waterstops, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such

items in position before concrete placement in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation.

3.3.1 Wall sleeves and seals

Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of

concrete. After installation of carrier pipe and pipe seal, place non-shrink grout in

annular space (both faces) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

3.3.2 Embedded pipes and conduits

Comply with ACI 318, Article 6.3.5.1 and Article 6.3.5.2. Conduits and embedded pipes

shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on center. The largest conduit size

shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of the concrete

member.

3.4 EDGE AND CORNER TREATMENTS

Chamfer edges are required for all joints and exposed edges whether indicated or not.

Slope for wet well fillets shall be as noted in the plans.

3.5 FLOOR PENETRATION CURBING

All pipe and conduit 3 inch and smaller passing through the floor shall have a 3 inch high

concrete grout curbing around it. Provide 1 inch chamfer on all exposed edges.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE BARRIER

Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab. Lap 4 inches minimum, and seal laps

and patches with pressure-sensitive adhesive or tape 2 inches wide, minimum.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

Deliver concrete from mixer to forms continuously until approved unit of operation is

completed. Provide scaffolding, ramps and walkways so that personnel and equipment

are not supported by in-place reinforcement. Placing will not be permitted when sun,

heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper

consolidation, finishing and curing. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final

position in the forms. When a vertical drop greater than 8 feet is authorized, provide

equipment to prevent segregation. Regulate depositing of concrete so that it will be

consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick. Place slabs in one layer.

Screed concrete to provide levels and profiles indicated.


March 2018 03300-8

3.8 CONSOLIDATION

Immediately after placing, consolidate each layer of concrete by internal vibrators, except

for slabs 4 inches or less. Use vibrators adequate in effectiveness and number to properly

consolidate the concrete; keep a spare vibrator at the job site during placing operations.

3.9 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

Use special protection measures as approved by Engineer, when freezing temperatures

are anticipated before expiration of the specified curing period (minimum 48 hours).

Temperature of concrete placed during warm weather shall not exceed 85 degrees F

except where an approved retarder is used.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Locate where indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end

of work shift or other type of delay, location and type of construction joint shall be

subject to approval of the Engineer.

3.11 SURFACE FINISHES

ACI 301 for repair and finish. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided

or indicated. At a minimum, provide the following finishes:

A. Rough Form - Exterior walls below grade

B. Smooth Form - Interior wet well walls

C. Smooth Rubbed - Interior walls, beams, edges of slab, housekeeping and

equipment pads, and exterior wall exposed to view.

D. Float Finish - Top of interior slabs

E. Broom Finish - Porch, steps, walks and other exterior pedestrian surfaces

above grade

F. Pavement Finish - Exterior concrete driveways and vehicular access slabs

3.11.1 Floated Finish

Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade,

and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for

floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. When bleedwater is

present prior to floating the surface, drag excess water off or remove by absorption with

porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater. Surface shall be level to

within 1/4 inch in 10 feet where floor drains are not provided.


March 2018 03300-9

3.11.2 Broomed Finished

Provide for exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide a floated finish, then finish with a flexible bristle broom. Permit surface to

harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right

angles to the slope of the slab.

3.11.3 Pavement Finish

Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and

crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After

screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straight edge to check slope and

flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by belting. Lay belt flat on

the concrete surface and advance with a sawing motion; continue until a uniform but

gritty nonslip surface is obtained. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius

of 1/8 inch.

3.12 CURING AND PROTECTION

ACI 301. Preserve moisture, protect from temperature extremes, wind and rain, and from

mechanical injury.

3.13 COATINGS

Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09900, “Paints and Coatings.”

3.14 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES

Clean and dampen concrete surface before grouting. Set plate or equipment base to line

and elevation. Provide grout at least 3/4 inches thick. Surfaces in contact with grout

shall be free of oil and grease.


3.15.1 Sampling

ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C

31/C 31M for making test specimens.

3.15.2 Testing

3.15.2.1 Slump Tests

ASTM C 143. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. Perform tests at

commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch

(minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.


March 2018 03300-10

3.15.2.2 Air Content

ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Test air-entrained concrete

for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.

3.15.2.3 Temperature Tests

Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold

weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch

(minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified

temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.

3.15.2.4 Compressive Strength Tests

ASTM C 39. Make two test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C

31/C 31M. Precautions shall be taken to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the

specimen. Test two cylinders at 28 days. Samples for strength tests of each mix design

of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for

each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 500 square feet of surface

area for slabs or walls. Each strength test result shall be the average of two cylinders from

the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive

strength test results is less than f'c or if any strength test result falls below f'c by more

than 500 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C 42 core samples from the in-place work

represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Remove concrete not meeting

strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete at no additional expense to the

Owner. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent

concrete.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 03400-1

SECTION 03400 - PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELLS AND VALVE VAULT

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section addresses the work related to furnishing and installing all

supervision, labor, materials and equipment in the work for Precast Concrete

Structural Sections, pipe connectors and accessories, placement procedures,

and finishes.

B. Related Sections

02315 Excavation and Fill 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers data in accordance with the provisions

of Division I, General Provisions, and Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures.

B. Copy of Certificate or Report showing that the Precast Concrete Manufacturer

conforms to Article 1.4 of this Specification Section.

C. Calculations and Details of Precast Concrete Structural Sections, including

buoyancy calculations to be provided and sealed by A Professional Engineer,

registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia, employed by the Manufacturer

showing or charting the following:

l) Manufacturer's Part No. or Catalogue No.

2) Inside diameter and height excluding base slab.

3) Wall thickness and base or top thickness where applicable.

4) Handling weight and lifting hole or loop description and locations.

5) Wire size, spacing, location, and steel area provided per vertical foot.

6) Reinforcing bar grade, size, spacing and location.

7) Design load for Flat Slab.

8) Concrete mix number and design strength.

9) Height, width, slope and annular space of the tongue & groove.


March 2018 03400-2

D. Pipe Connector Details, Material Specification and pipe installation procedure.

E. Joint Material Details and Material Specifications. Calculations showing the

flexible joint sealant cross section is greater than the joints annular space times

its height shall be provided when butyl rope internal seals are proposed.

F. Lifting Device and Hole Details that include design loads.

G. Structural analysis and design calculations for Flat Slab Top Precast

Components, performed in accordance with the References of this

Specification, showing that allowable stresses will not be exceeded. All

calculations must be sealed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the

Commonwealth of Virginia, employed by the Precast Concrete Manufacturer.

H. Calculations or test results verifying that the lifting device components and holes

are designed in accordance with OSHA Standard 1926.704.

I. Concrete 28 day compression strength results for every day production of

Precast Components for the project was performed, showing the required

strength according to the guidelines established in ACI 318.

J. Reinforcing and Cement mill reports for materials used in the Manufacture of

Precast Components for this project.

K. The above test reports for similar Precast Components recently produced,

submitted prior to production of Precast Components for this project.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent

referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation

only. The referenced publications shall be the current effective edition.

B. Pre-stressed Concrete Institute (PCI)

1) PCI—MNL 116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production

of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products.

2) PCI — MNL 120 Design Handbook Precast and Prestressed Concrete.

C. National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA)

1) Quality Control Manual for Precast Concrete Plants.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials

1) ASTM A82 — Standard Specifications for Steel Wire, Plain, for


March 2018 03400-3

Concrete Reinforcement.

2) ASTM A416 — Standard Specifications for Steel Strand, Uncoated

Seven- Wire for Prestressed Concrete.

3) ASTM A615 — Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain

Carbon- Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

4) ASTM C33 — Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.

5) ASTM C260 – Standard Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures

for Concrete.

6) ASTM C361 — Standard Specifications for Reinforced Concrete Low-

Head Pressure Pipe.

7) ASTM C478 — Standard Specifications for Precast Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Sections.

8) ASTM C494 — Standard Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete.

9) ASTM C857 — Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for

Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

10) ASTM C881 — Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Resin-Base

Bonding Systems for Concrete.

11) ASTM C890 — Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design

Loading for Monolithic or Sectional Precast Concrete Water and

Wastewater Structures.

12) ASTM C891 — Standard Practice for Installation of Underground

Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

13) ASTM C923 — Standard Specifications for Resilient Connectors

between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals.

14) ASTM C990 — Standard Specifications for Joints for Concrete Pipe,

Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint

Sealants.

15) ASTM C1037 — Practice for Inspection of Underground Precast

Concrete Utility Structures.


March 2018 03400-4

E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO)

1) AASHTO M198 — Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete

Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.

F. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1) ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary.

2) ACI 350 — Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering

Concrete Structures and Commentary.

G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

1) Standard 1926.704 — Requirements for Precast Concrete Submittals.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The Precast Manufacturer shall comply with one of the following

requirements:

1) Manufacture Precast Components for the project in a plant certified in

the Prestressed Concrete Institute's (PCI) Plant Certification Program.

2) Manufacture Precast Components for the project in a plant certified in

the National Precast Concrete Association's (NPCA) Plant Certification

Program.

3) Retain an independent testing or consulting engineering firm approved

by the City of Hampton for Precast Plant Inspection. The basis for Plant

Inspection shall be the National Precast Concrete Association Quality

Control Manual or the Manual for Quality Control for Plants and

Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. The above

firm shall inspect the Precast Plant two weeks prior to and at one week

intervals during production of materials for this project and issue a

report, certified by a Professional Engineer, registered in the

Commonwealth of Virginia, that materials, methods, products, and

quality control meet the Requirements of the above quality control

manuals. Tests and inspections shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Concrete compressive strength testing shall be performed in a laboratory

inspected by the CCRL of the National Bureau of Standards. Testing shall be

performed by Grade I ACI Certified Laboratory Technicians or by Level I PCI

Certified Technicians. Testing shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.


March 2018 03400-5

1.5 QUALITY

A. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the performance of all acceptance tests

as specified herein and in ASTM C478. In addition, any or all precast concrete

products to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant for

compliance with these Specifications by the City of Hampton, by an

independent testing laboratory provided by the City of Hampton, or by other

representative of the City of Hampton. The CONTRACTOR shall require the

manufacturer’s cooperation in these inspections. The cost of inspection of all

products approved for this Contract will be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Care shall be taken in shipping, handling, and installation to avoid damaging

the products. Any products damaged in shipment shall be replaced as directed

by the City of Hampton.

C. Inspections of the products will also be made by representatives of the City of

Hampton after delivery and after installation. The products shall be subject to

rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the Specification

requirements, even though they may have been accepted as satisfactory at the

place of manufacture. Products rejected after delivery shall be marked for

identification and shall be removed immediately from the work site.

D. Any precast concrete product showing a crack or damage or which has received

a blow that may have caused an incipient fracture, even though such fracture is

barely visible, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the

work site. The City of Hampton’s opinion regarding such observations and

rejections shall be final.

1.6 INSPECTION, TEST REPORTS, MARKINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. All precast concrete products to be installed under this contract shall be

inspected and tested at the place of manufacture to verify compliance with the

Specifications and Drawings.

B. The manufacturer shall perform factory testing as specified herein. Copies of

test reports shall be submitted to the City of Hampton before the product is

shipped to the project.

In the event that any of the test results fail to meet the Specifications, no

products represented by such tests shall be shipped to the job site and shall be

subject to rejection. The CONTRACTOR may perform additional tests upon

the products represented by the failed tests if he desires to verify the accuracy

of the original tests. The ENGINEER will review the test results and advise the

City of Hampton regarding the suitability of the products.


March 2018 03400-6

Products, which have been rejected by the City of Hampton, shall not be

shipped to the site or shall be removed from the site of the work by the

CONTRACTOR and replaced with products, which meet these Specifications

and Drawings.

E. Prior to the shipment of each product to the site, the CONTRACTOR shall submit

to the City of Hampton test reports and certifications as described below duly

certified by the manufacturer’s approval testing facility representative or an

independent certified testing laboratory demonstrating full compliance with the

Specifications and Drawings.

F. An original plus two copies of the following shall be submitted to the City of

Hampton.

1) The name, address, and phone number of the product manufacturer and

location of the plant at which it was manufactured.

2) Certification and certified test reports for each product (by number) of

the tests performed on concrete and concrete cores showing the results

of the tests.

G. Imperfections in and minor damage to the concrete may be repaired with epoxy

mortar subject to the approval of the City of Hampton, after demonstration by

the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs shall be

carefully inspected before final approval. Epoxy mortar shall be used for

repairs and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at the end

of seven days, and 5,000 psi at the end of 28 days when tested in three-inch by

six-inch cylinders stored in the standard manner. No repairs shall be made until

the imperfections or damage has been inspected by the City of Hampton, and

repairs authorized in writing. Repairs made prior to such authorization will be

cause for rejection of the component. Pieces proposed for repair at the factory

shall be set aside for periodic inspection at the factory by the City of Hampton.

Inspections will not be made more frequently than once per month. Rejected

pieces shall not be shipped to or used for the work.

H. Precast concrete structures may be rejected for any of the following reasons:

1) Exposure of any reinforcement, wires, positioning spacers or chairs used

to hold the reinforcement cage in position.

2) Reinforcing steel to be in excess of 1/2-inch out of the specified

position within cores.

3) Any shattering or flaking of concr ete.

4) Voids which can be detected on the interior and exterior surfaces

exceeding ¼-inch in depth.


March 2018 03400-7

5) Unauthorized application of any repair or coating.

6) A deficiency greater than ¼ -inch from the specified wall thickness.

7) A variation from the specified internal diameter in excess of 1%.

8) Defects that indicate incorrect molding of concrete or any surface

defect indicating honeycomb or other voids.

9) Any of the following cracks:

a. A crack having a width of 0.005 inches to 0.01 inches throughout

a continuous length of 36 inches or more.

b. A crack having a width of 0.01 inches to 0.03 inches or more

throughout a continuous length of 12 inches or more.

c. Any crack greater than 0.005 inches extending through the wall

and having a length in excess of the wall thickness.

d. Any crack showing two visible lines of separation for a

continuous length of two feet or more, or an interrupted length

of three feet or more anywhere in evidence both inside and

outside.

e. Any crack anywhere greater than 0.03 inches in width.

2. PRODUCTS.

2.1 MATERIALS

Antimicrobial Additive:

Antimicrobial additive, ConmicShield®, shall be used to render the concrete

uninhabitable for bacteria growth, where indicated on the plans. The liquid

antibacterial additive shall be an EPA registered material and the registration

number shall be submitted for approval prior to use in the project. The amount to

be used shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the antibacterial additive.

This amount shall be included in the total water content of the concrete mix

design. The additive shall be added into the concrete mix water to insure even

distribution of the additive throughout the concrete mixture

A. Concrete shall conform to ASTM C478 and as follows:

1) Compressive strength: 5000 psi minimum at 28 days.

2) Air Content: 6% +/- 2%.

3) Alkalinity: Minimum of 50% calcium carbonate equivalent for bases,

risers, and cones.

4) Cementitious Materials: Minimum of 470 pounds per CY


March 2018 03400-8

5) Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Sound, Crushed, Angular Limestone.

Smooth or rounded stone shall not be used.

6) Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33. Free from organic impurities.

7) Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494. Calcium Chloride or admixtures

containing calcium chloride shall not be used.

8) Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615 grade 60 deformed bar, ASTM A82 wire or ASTM A 185 welded wire fabric.

C. Lift loops shall be ASTM A416 steel strand. Lifting loops made from deformed

bars are not allowed.

D. Flexible Joint Sealants shall be butyl rubber based conforming to AASHTO M-

198, Type B - Butyl Rubber and as follows: maximum of 1% volatile matter

and suitable for application temperatures between 10 and 100 degrees F.

E. The outside of all below-grade joints shall be sealed with an eight-inch-side, adhesive butyl rubber sealant strip with Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer

(E.P.D.M.) rubber backing. (ASTM C-990-98, Paragraph 6.2) The strip shall be installed only after the non-shrink grout has cured at least 72 hours and the

surface has been prepared and primed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed directions.

1) CONTRACTOR shall obtain concurrence of City of Hampton’s Inspector regarding the adequacy of concrete surface preparation before

applying butyl rubber sealant strip.

F. Epoxy Gels for interior patching of wall penetrations shall be a 2-component, solvent-free, moisture-insensitive, high modulus, high-strength, structural

epoxy paste adhesive meeting ASTM C-881, Type I and II, Grade 3, Class B and

C, Epoxy Resin Adhesive.


March 2018 03400-9

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Precast Component Fabrication and Manufacture shall be as described in this

paragraph and as described in the paragraphs for the specific components.

1) Precast Manufacturing shall be in conformance with ASTM C478.

Wall and inside slab finishes resulting horn casting against forms

standard for the industry will be acceptable. Exterior slab surfaces

shall have a float finish. Small surface holes, normal color variations,

normal form joint marks, and minor depressions, chips and spalls will

be tolerated. Dimensional tolerances shall be those set forth in the

appropriate References and specified below.

2) Joint Surfaces between Bases and Risers shall be manufactured to the joint surface design and tolerance requirements of ASTM C361. The

maximum slope of the vertical surface shall be 2°. The maximum annular space at the base of the joint shall be 0.10 inches. The minimum

height of the joint shall be four inches.

3) Lift Inserts and Holes shall be sized for a precision fit with the lifting devices, shall comply with OSHA 1926.704, and shall not penetrate through the structure wall.

B. Precast Base Sections shall be cast monolithically without construction joints or

with an approved galvanized or PVC waterstop in the cold joint between the base slab and the walls. The width of the base extensions on Extended Base Structures

shall be no less than the base slab thickness. Base section shall incorporate base fillets shown on contract drawings.

C. Precast Riser Sections shall have a minimum height of 16 inches. Section

heights shall be configured to accommodate locations of pipe penetrations.

Penetrations shall not interfere with joint seal or compromise the joints

between precast components.

D. Precast Flat Slab Top Sections shall be designed for HS-20 traffic loadings as

defined in ASTM C890. Items to be cast into Special Flat Slab Tops shall be

sized to fit within the structure ID and the top and bottom surfaces.

E. Pipe to Precast Structure Connectors shall conform to ASTM C923. The location

of the pipe connectors shall vary from the location shown on the Project Plans no more than 1/2 inch vertically and 5 degrees horizontally.

F. Joints between Precast Components shall be sealed internally between the

tongue and the groove and additionally around the external perimeter as follows:

1) External Seals shall consist of an E.P.D.M. rubber backed flat butyl rubber sheet no less than 1/16-inch thick and eight inches wide applied

to the outside perimeter of the joint.


March 2018 03400-10

2) Internal Seals shall consist of a plastic or paper-backed butyl rubber

rope having a cross-sectional area no less than the annular space times the height of the joint.

G. Lifting devices for handling Precast Components shall be provided by the

Precast Manufacturer and shall comply with OSHA Standard 1926.704.

2.3 CONFIGURATION

A. Precast structures are to be constructed as shown on the drawings.

B. The number of joints shall be minimized.

2.4 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricators:

1) Plant-precast concrete products for below grade construction

a. Concrete Pipe & Precast, LLC

b. Oldcastle Precast

c. Coastal Precast Systems

d. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements and approved

by the City of Hampton.

3. EXECUTION.

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect Precast Structure Components prior to unloading from the delivery

truck.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Coordinate delivery with the

manufacturer, handle and store the Precast Components in accordance with

ASTM C891 and the manufacturer's recommendations using methods that will

prevent damage to the components and their joint surfaces.


March 2018 03400-11

3.3 PLACING STRUCTURE SECTIONS

A. Excavate to the required depth and remove materials that are unstable or

unsuitable for a good foundation. Prepare a level, compacted foundation

extending six inches beyond the precast structure and any added extended base.

B. Set base plumb and level.

C. Set risers, taking particular care to clean, prepare and seal joints.

D. After joining structure sections, apply the butyl sealant sheet around the outside

perimeter of the joint.

E. Lift Holes leaving less than two inches of wall thickness shall be plugged from

the outside using a sand cement mortar, then covered with butyl sealant sheet. Lift Holes penetrating the wall shall be additionally sealed with an interior

application of an epoxy gel 1/8-inch thick extending two inches beyond the penetration.

F. Perform the final finishing of the precast structure’s interior by filling all chips or fractures greater than 1/2-inch in length, width or depth and depressions more than 1/2- inch deep with a sand cement mortar. Do not fill the joints between the precast concrete sections. Clean the interior of the structure, removing all dirt, spills or other foreign matter.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 03400-12



March 2018 03410 - 1

SECTION 03410 – PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE BUILDINGS

1. GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Precast structural concrete.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete topping and placing

connection anchors in concrete.

2. Division 05 Section "Miscellaneous Metals and Fabrications" for kickers and

other miscellaneous steel shapes.

3. Division 08 Section “Doors and Frames” for door opening and frame

requirements.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved precast structural concrete color, finish,

and texture, preapproved by Architect.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall

withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated on the

design drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and

water-absorption tests.


March 2018 03410 - 2

C. Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and

sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special

reinforcement. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units.

1. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish.

2. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.

3. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Show size, length, and

type of each weld.

4. Detail loose and cast-in hardware, lifting and erection inserts, connections, and

joints.

5. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in

or attached to structure or other construction.

6. Include and locate openings larger than by 10 inches (250 mm). (To include door

openings, vent openings, louver openings, etc.)

7. Indicate location of each precast structural concrete unit by same identification

mark placed on panel.

8. Indicate relationship of precast structural concrete units to adjacent materials.

9. Indicate estimated camber for precast floor slabs with concrete toppings.

10. Indicate shim sizes and grouting sequence.

11. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance

requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings.

Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when

modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete buildings indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including concrete mix

design, concrete test reports, erection drawings, production shop drawings and analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the state of

Virginia responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, testing agency.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.

3. Admixtures.

4. Bearing pads.

5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

H. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

I. Source quality-control reports.

J. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


March 2018 03410 - 3


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast

structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility

includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer.

1. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified

plant.

B. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified, as evidenced by PCI's

Certificate of Compliance, to erect Category S1 - Simple Structural Systems and

Category S2 - Complex Structural Systems.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and

ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

D. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations in

PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable

to types of precast structural concrete units indicated.

E. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements,

quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units

required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and

Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products."

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

G. Fire-Resistance Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units

whose fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction or has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard

Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction

Assemblies," and PCI MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed

Concrete," and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same

position as during storage.

B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to

prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.


March 2018 03410 - 4

1. Store units with dunnage across full width of each bearing point unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Place adequate dunnage of even thickness between each unit.

3. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be

inspected.

C. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order

to avoid excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage.

D. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached

to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams,

templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

1.9 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. Precast Components: The manufacturer shall complete the design, including

calculations and detailing, for all precast components specified on the Contract

Drawings. Design shall be based on preliminary design criteria and conditions

provided on the Drawings and in the Specifications. The manufacturer shall

perform the complete design assuring that the manufacturing, transportation and

erection process are compatible with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

2. Erection: The manufacturer’s designer shall consider erection of the precast

components including calculations and details for guying, staying, and shoring all

precast components to assure structural stability during the construction stage and

before all permanent structural connections are completed. Provide in the

erection plan for removal, replacement, and relocation of guying, bracing, and

shoring before all permanent precast structural connections are completed. The

manufacturer’s registered professional engineer shall retain responsibility for the

erection design.

3. Design of precast components and connections shall be prepared under the direct

supervision of the manufacturer’s professional engineer registered in the state of

Virginia with approval by the Engineer of Record (EOR).

4. The connection of Precast Components to non-precast components shall be

coordinated by the contractor and manufacturer with the contract drawings.

These connections and any modifications to the non-precast components shown


March 2018 03410 - 5

on the contractor drawings to accommodate the precast components shall be

submitted for review by the Engineer of Record.

B. Design Criteria:

1. Design Loads:

a. All dead and live loads specified on the Contract Drawings.

b. All other loads specified for components, where applicable.

c. Initial handling and erection stress limits.

d. All precast components and connections to non-precast elements shall be

designed in accordance with the PCI Design Handbook.

e. All precast components shall have a minimum reinforcing in accordance

with ACI 318. Analysis of prestressed components shall include a check of

the shear reinforcing requirements at 0.1L, 0.2L, 0.25L and 0.3L, where L is

the component length.

C. Modifications:

1. All proposed modifications to the drawings and specifications shall be submitted

to the Architect and Engineer with complete design calculations and drawings.

2. The location of openings shall be shown on the drawings. Openings shall be

located and field drilled (or cut) by the trade requiring them after precast

components have been erected and grouted. Locations of all field cut openings

shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer prior to drilling or cutting.

3. Contractor is responsible for providing precast manufacturer will all necessary

information regarding openings, components, equipment, cast-in items to the

precast manufacturer.

D. Lifting Devices shall be designed and cast into the components to ensure safe and

efficient handling. Lifting devices shall be so arranged that they do not have to be

removed; or, if they must be removed, they shall be arranged so that they are readily

removed and any planned depressions in the concrete can be readily filled.

E. Lift loops and erection inserts shall be located so they are not objectable in the

completed structure with a minimum concrete or grout cover as specified in ACI 318

and the PCI Design Handbook. Inserts located in areas exposed to view shall be

recessed and patched with non-shrink, non-staining grout to match surrounding

concrete, or cover and protect in an approved manner.


March 2018 03410 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricators:

1. Plant-precast concrete building

a. Smith-Midland

b. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements and approved by the

City of Hampton.

2.2 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that

will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances

indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not

bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair

subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated.

Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent

surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

C. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final

hardening of newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.

2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M,

Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from wire into flat

sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers,

and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded

wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116.


March 2018 03410 - 7

2.4 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Pretensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 (Grade 1720) or Grade 270

(Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire or ASTM A 886/A 886M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860),

indented, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.

B. Unbonded Post-Tensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860),

uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.

1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying

with ACI 423.6 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with

ACI 423.6. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.

C. Post-Tensioning Bars: ASTM A 722, uncoated high-strength steel bar.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of

same type, brand, and mill source.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3

percent.

2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.

3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical

requirement.

4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with

coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S or Class 4S. Stockpile fine and coarse

aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for

Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material

that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same

material as coarse aggregate unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or

colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.


March 2018 03410 - 8

E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or

strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other required admixtures.

G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions

or other salts by weight of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.

H. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed

cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing

chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

2.6 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold

finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum

mechanical properties of PCI MNL 116.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.

D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property

Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563

(ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.


March 2018 03410 - 9

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490

((ASTM A 490M),) Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel

nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436

(ASTM F 436M).

1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) bolts.

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply

zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel

to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of

silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing

not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B

or SSPC-Paint 20.

M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those

surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop

apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance

requirements in MPI 79 or SSPC-Paint 25 according to SSPC-PA 1.

N. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

O. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other

accessories required to install precast structural concrete units.

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and

studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers. Lubricate threaded parts of

stainless-steel bolts with an antiseize thread lubricant during assembly.

C. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, with minimum mechanical properties of

PCI MNL 116.


March 2018 03410 - 10

2.8 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as

recommended by precast fabricator for application:

1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent

polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet,

50 to 70 Shore, Type A durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; minimum tensile

strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412.

2. Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly

oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. 70 to 90 Shore, Type A durometer

hardness, ASTM D 2240; capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi

(20.7 MPa) with no cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of

pad. Test 1 specimen for every 200 pads used in Project.

3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally

layered cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; 80 to 100 Shore, Type A

durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO

Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Specifications," Division II,

Section 18.10.2; or with MIL-C-882E.

4. Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to

stainless- or mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.

5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.

2.9 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by

volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents,

plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for

drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for

application within a 30-minute working time.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin;

ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.


March 2018 03410 - 11

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and

granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight;

metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by

qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement

permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to

ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth

mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods

according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight

concrete with the following properties:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (34.5 MPa).

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to

PCI MNL 116.

F. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial

batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on

Project, to provide lightweight concrete with the following properties:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

2. Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842

kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at

point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.

H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according

to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other

circumstances warrant.


March 2018 03410 - 12

2.11 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand

pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for

prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release

agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and

prestressing tendons by release agent.

1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide

solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete

placement. Coat form liner with form-release agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed precast structural concrete units of shapes, lines,

and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.

2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered or radiused.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate

anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design

requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in

place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect

position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors,

dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural

concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as

indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut

openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating,

placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that

reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated

reinforcement exceeds limits specified, repair with patching material compatible

with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.


March 2018 03410 - 13

2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement

during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal

support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage.

Increase cover requirements according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) when units are

exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space,

and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while

placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete

surfaces.

4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-

mm) minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel

to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or

severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar

supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie

ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces

at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset

laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and

erection stresses.

G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-

tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.

1. Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast, prestressed structural concrete

units until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive

strength as established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.

2. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or

by heat cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or

unbalanced loading.

3. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist

to avoid dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.

4. Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich, or epoxy paint to

avoid corrosion and possible rust spots.

5. Protect strand ends and anchorages with a minimum of 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick,

nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout mortar and sack rub surface. Coat or spray the

inside surfaces of pocket with bonding agent before installing grout.

H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing,

transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be

added.

I. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch

(25 mm) or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum

reinforcing cover specified.


March 2018 03410 - 14

J. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from

forming in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

K. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without

dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines,

honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying

with PCI MNL 116.

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6,

"Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."

L. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.

M. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot-weather concrete placement.

N. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure

with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings.

Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a

surface that will not show in finished structure.

O. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention

without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat

and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that

stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

P. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with

requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless

repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval.

2.13 COMMERCIAL FINISHES

A. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish

to concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch (13 mm) caused by air bubbles, normal

color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air

holes greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in (1300

sq. mm). Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not

permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch (3 mm).


March 2018 03410 - 15

2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate precast

structural concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

1. Allow testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production

equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with testing

agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be

requested for additional testing and evaluation.

B. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116

requirements.

1. Test and inspect self-consolidating concrete according to PCI TR-6.

C. Strength of precast structural concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to

comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength.

D. If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not

comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, employ a qualified testing agency to

obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive

strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.

1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect

strength, from locations directed by Architect.

2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition or, if units will be wet under service

conditions, test cores after immersion in water in a wet condition.

3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if

average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design

compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design

compressive strength.

4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with

copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will

include the following:

a. Project identification name and number.

b. Date when tests were performed.

c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.

d. Name of concrete testing agency.

e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented

by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive

strength at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of

applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.


March 2018 03410 - 16

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast structural concrete units

comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with same

precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent

precast concrete surfaces.

F. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not

comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and

texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's

approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved

samples, sample panels, and mockups.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting, cast-in-place, building structural

framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or until

supporting steel or other structure is complete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting

precast structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable

tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to

maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast

structural concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to

prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as

erection progresses.

3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting

devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align

voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs.


March 2018 03410 - 17

C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as

otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers

as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.

D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of the Architect.

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory

items to precast, prestressed concrete units.

F. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding,

welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

1. Protect precast structural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field

welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Clean weld-affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing,

and apply a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to

galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780.

3. Clean weld-affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing,

and reprime damaged painted surfaces.

4. Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to

prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding

connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot.

For friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts

at random by calibrated torque wrench.

H. Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and

joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard

enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are

completely filled.

1. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces.

2. Fill joints completely without seepage to other surfaces.

3. Trowel top of grout joints on roofs smooth and uniform. Finish transitions

between different surface levels not steeper than 1 to 12.

4. Place grout end cap or dam in voids at ends of hollow-core slabs.

5. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes

or hardens.

6. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.


March 2018 03410 - 18

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment

without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.

B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other

method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect.


A. Special Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the

following special inspections:

1. Erection of precast structural concrete members.

B. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections.

C. Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to

ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to

inspections.

D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and

Architect.

E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not

comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.

1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and

appearance of units has not been impaired.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and

uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation

between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from

a distance of 20 feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according

to ASTM A 780.


March 2018 03410 - 19

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of

shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired

or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from

concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint

treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete

fabricator's written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with

detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean

water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of

exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 03410 - 20



March 2018 05500-1

SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATIONS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AA 46 Anodized Architectural Aluminum

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC S303 Steel Buildings and Bridges

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A10.3 Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems

ANSI A14.3 Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements

ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series

ANSI B18.6.2 Slotted Head Cap Screws, Square Head Set Screws, and

Slotted Headless Set Screws

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B18.6.3 Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts

ASME/ANSI B18.21.1 Lock Washers (Inch Series)

ASME/ANSI B18.22.1 Plain Washers


ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A 47/47M Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings


March 2018 05500-2

ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded

and Seamless

ASTM A 123/A 123M Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products

ASTM A 153/A 153M Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile

Strength

ASTM A 325/325M Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A 653/A 653M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 687 High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs

ASTM A 780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 786/A 786M Rolled Steel Floor Plates

ASTM B 26/B 26M Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM B 108 Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B 209M Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

(Metric)

ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221/221M Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B 429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube

ASTM E 488 Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements


March 2018 05500-3

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)

AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)

CID A-A-1923 Shield, Expansion (Lag, Machine and Externally

Threaded Wedge Bolt Anchors)

CID A-A-1924 Shield, Expansion (Self Drilling Tubular Expansion

Shell Bolt Anchors)

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

FS TT-P-664 Primer Coating, Alkyd, Corrosion-Inhibiting, Lead and

Chromate Free, VOC-Compliant

FS RR-G-1602 Grating, Metal, Other Than Bar Type (Floor, Except for

Naval Vessels)

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS

(NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM AMP 521 Pipe Railing Manual


March 2018 05500-4

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Access doors and panels

Stairs, Ladders and Platforms

Embedded angles and plates, installation drawings

Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system,

and anchoring details as specified in AISC S303.

Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type,

grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement,

anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction.

SD-03 Product Data

Access doors and panels


SD-05 Design Data


Provide the services of a qualified professional Engineer registered in the

Commonwealth of Virginia to prepare calculations, shop drawings, and other

structural data required, including structural analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1, as necessary, using procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an

enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged

items with new items.


March 2018 05500-5

1.5 INSTALLATION LOCATION

Non-corrosive (aluminum or stainless steel) metals shall be used within the wet well. All

fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) installed in the wet well or outside of the station building shall

be stainless steel. All fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) installed inside the station pump room

may be galvanized.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel

S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.1.2 Structural Tubing

ASTM A 500.

2.1.3 Steel Pipe

ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe

Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47.

2.1.5 Anchors and Fasteners

Where exposed, shall be of the same color, and finish as the metal to which applied. All

fasteners shall be stainless steel.

2.1.5.1 Expansion Anchors

Provide embedment not less than required by manufacturer. Test expansion anchors per

ASTM E 488. No expansion anchors are allowed in wet well.

2.1.5.2 Adhesive Anchors

Two component structural epoxy injection gel complying with ASTM C881. Provide

embedment not less than 4” or as required by manufacturer. Anchor shall be stainless

steel all-thread.


March 2018 05500-6

2.1.5.3 Self-drilling concrete anchors

McMaster-Carr catalog No. 103, Item No. 97052A.

2.1.5.4 Lag Screws and Bolts

ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.

2.1.5.5 Toggle Bolts

ANSI B18.2.1.

2.1.5.6 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets

ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307, ASTM A 325.

2.1.5.7 Powder Driven Fasteners

Use when permitted by ANSI A10.3. Follow safety provisions of ANSI A10.3.

2.1.5.8 Screws

ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.6.2, and ANSI B18.6.3.

2.1.5.9 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers

for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness,

and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B18.21.1.

2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Products

Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B

26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at

least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick.


March 2018 05500-7

2.1.7 Ladders

Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to section 7 of 29 CER 1910.27. Use ¾-inch

aluminum rails for stringers and 1-inch diameter aluminum rods for rungs unless

otherwise shown on the drawings. Rungs to be as shown on drawings, but not less than

16 inches wide, spaced one foot apart, maximum, plug welded or shouldered and headed

to stringers. Install ladders so that distance from the center of the rungs to the finished

wall surface will not be less than 7 inches. Provide heavy clip angles, welded, riveted or

bolted to the stringer and drilled (for not less than two ½ inch diameter adhesive

anchors). Provide intermediate clip angles no more than every 48 inches on centers,

vertically. Coordinate clip angle locations with Precast Wet Well section joints so that

anchorage to precast well is 1 foot or more away from precast well joint so not to

compromise precast joint construction.

2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES

2.2.1 Galvanizing

Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable.

Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153Mor ASTM A 653/A 653M G-

90, as applicable. Galvanize anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices

necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.

2.2.2 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM

A 780.

2.2.3 Shop Cleaning and Painting

Provide steel with the manufacturer's standard prime coat for material to be field painted,

and manufacturer's standard coating for finished material.

2.2.4 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.

2.2.5 Aluminum Surfaces

2.2.5.1 Surface Condition

Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in scratches, kinks,

stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect

uniform appearance of finished surfaces.


March 2018 05500-8

2.2.5.2 Unexposed Sheet, Plate, and Extrusions

Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. Sandblast

castings' finish, medium, AA 45, or AA 46.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

2.3.1 Doors and Frames

Entry doors and frames shall comply with Section 08255, “Flush Doors and Frames.”

2.3.2 Louvers

Ventilation and exhaust louvered openings shall comply with Section 10201, “Metal Wall

Louvers.”

2.3.3 Embedded Access Doors

Provide flush type access doors where indicated for embedment in concrete. Fabricate

frames for embedded access doors using 1/4 inch thick one-piece, mill finish, extruded

aluminum frame, incorporating a continuous concrete anchor. Where the frame exterior

comes in contact with the concrete, provide a bituminous barrier coating. Doors shall be

constructed of 1/4 inch diamond plate aluminum with adequate reinforcing framing to

withstand a live load of 300 lbs per square foot. Door shall be double leaf and have

opening size as indicated. Door shall open 90 degrees and automatically lock with a

stainless steel hold open arm and aluminum handle. The hold open arm shall be assisted

by a fully enclosed stainless steel compression spring operator to act as a check in

retarding downward motion of the door and to assist in opening the door from below.

Door shall close flush with the frame and rest on a neoprene gasket. Hinges shall be

brass or stainless steel with stainless steel hardware. Doors shall be fitted with stainless

steel padlock hasps. Lock to be provided by locality. Frame drains shall be directed to

discharge away from the wet well and vault interiors. Embedded access doors shall be

warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of no less than five

years. Acceptable manufacturers are Halliday Products Series 'HW' Access Doors, or

approved equal.

2.4 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS)

Provide 4 inch galvanized standard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53.

Anchor posts in concrete and fill solidly with concrete with minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 2500 psi. Posts shall be coated with paint in accordance with

Section 09900, Paints and Coatings. Color shall be Safety Yellow.


March 2018 05500-9

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels,

sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from

structural steel shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as

required to support wall loads over openings. Provide with connections and fasteners.

Construct to have at least 200 mm 8 inches bearing on masonry at each end. Provide

angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize all

embedded items, whether exposed to the elements or not, according to ASTM A 123/A

123M. Piping supports within the wet well shall be aluminum or stainless steel securely

anchored to the wall with stainless steel fasteners.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install items at locations indicated and according to shop drawings.

3.2 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in

place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts,

expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts

and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag

bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous

attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials,

generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Fasteners used in

the wet well shall be stainless steel. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

3.3 BUILT-IN-WORK

Form for anchorage of metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with

suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time

for securing in place as the work progresses. Fabrications shall be installed and protected

in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 WELDING

Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS

D1.1. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in

the finished installation


March 2018 05500-10

3.5 FIELD FINISHING

3.5.1 Coatings

Coat exposed metal items in accordance with Section 09900, “Paints and Coatings.”

Aluminum items shall be anodized finish and not coated except where specified herein.

3.5.2 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete,

mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect surfaces with a

coat conforming to FS TT-P-664 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Alkyd is not to

be used on metal in contact with concrete or masonry.

3.5.3 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by

the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease,

dirt and other foreign matter. Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to

foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above

the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F

or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 08255-1

SECTION 08255 –DOORS AND FRAMES

1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





A. AAMA 1503-98 - Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of

Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.

B. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance

for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings.

C. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

D. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

E. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

F. ASTM D 256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched

Specimens of Plastics.

G. ASTM D 543 - Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.

H. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.

I. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.

J. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and

Electrical Insulating Materials.

K. ASTM D 1308 - Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic

Finishes.

L. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

M. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular

Plastics.


March 2018 08255-2

N. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid

Aging.

O. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol

Impressor.

P. ASTM D 5420 – Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of

a Falling Weight.

Q. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.

R. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

S. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of

Building Partitions.

T. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the

Specimen.

U. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

V. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

W. ASTM F 476 - Security of Swinging Door Assemblies.

X. ASTM F 1642-04 – Standard Test Method for Glazing Systems Subject to Air

Blast Loading.

Y. NWWDA T.M. 7-90 – Cycle Slam Test Method

Z. SFBC PA 201 - Impact Test Procedures.

AA. SFBC PA 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure

Loading.

AB. SFBC 3603.2 (b)(5) - Forced Entry Resistance Test.


March 2018 08255-3

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Doors

Frames

Accessories

Weatherstripping

Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware provisions, method of

glazing, and installation details.

Submit door and frame locations.

SD-03 Product Data

Doors

Frames

Accessories

Weatherstripping

Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames, and accessories.

Include data and details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement,

insulation, and door edge construction.

SD-04 Samples

Factory-applied finish. Where colors are not indicated, submit manufacturer's

standard colors and patterns for selection.


March 2018 08255-4


Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective wrappings or

packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Store doors and frames on platforms

under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace

between doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces

dry. Replace damaged materials with new.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

CP3 FRP Door and Frame FRP Division Chase Industries (See www.chem-pruf.com), or

approved equal.

Door Dimensions:

4’ – 0” x 7’ – 0”

2.1.1 FRP Doors

Doors shall be made of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using Class 1 premium resin

with no fillers that is specifically tailored to resist chemicals and contaminants typically

found in environment for which these specifications are written.

Doors shall be of flush construction, having no seams or cracks. Doors and frames shall

maintain the same physical properties throughout the structure,

2.1.2 Anchors

Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors,

zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than 18 gage.

2.1.2.1 Wall Anchors

Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more than 7.5 feet in

height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 2.5 feet or

fraction thereof.

A. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 3/16 inch

diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;

B. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete or masonry with

expansion bolts in accordance with SDI 111F.

2.1.2.2 Floor Anchors

Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each jamb member.

http://www.chem-pruf.com/


March 2018 08255-5

2.2 WEATHERSTRIPPING

As specified in Section 08710, "Door Hardware."

2.3 HARDWARE PREPARATION

All related hardware as specified must be furnished and installed by the door frame

manufacturer to maintain product quality, function and warranty as well as to ensure

sufficient support/reinforcement.

2.4 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from

defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members

shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in

true alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame

sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed

and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. On wraparound frames for

masonry partitions, provide a throat opening 1/8 inch larger than the actual masonry

thickness. Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space

between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive calking compound.

2.4.1 Grouted Frames

For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar or grout, fill the

stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout out of the stops and to facilitate

installation of stop-applied head and jamb seals.

2.4.2 Finish

Doors and frames shall have a Resin-rich gelcoat of the specified color integrally molded

in at time of manufacture resulting in a smooth gloss surface that is dense and non-

porous. To achieve optimum surface characteristics, the gelcoat shall be cured within a

temperature range of 120F to 170F creating an impermeable outer surface, uniform

bronze color throughout, and a permanent homogeneous bond with the resin/fiberglass

substrate beneath.

2.5 WARRANTY

All fiberglass doors and frames shall have a lifetime guarantee against failure due to

corrosion. Additionally, fiberglass doors and fiberglass frames shall be guaranteed for a

minimum of ten years against failure due to materials and workmanship, including warp,

Separation or delamination, and expansion of the core


March 2018 08255-6

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Frames

Set frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Plumb, align, and brace

securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts

or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction.

Backfill frames with mortar. When an additive is provided in the mortar, coat inside of

frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames in exterior walls,

ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation before grout is placed.

Note: Contractor has option to have precast building manufacturer fabricate building

wall with door frame installed during wall fabrication provided that the FRP door and

frame meet the requirements stated in this specification. Door frame width shall be

coordinated with precast building wall thickness. Frame may be either butted, cast in or

wrapped.

3.1.2 Doors

A. Doors shall be delivered at job site individually crated. Each crate to be clearly

marked with the specific opening information for quick and easy identification.

B. All single doors to be shipped completely assembled in the frame with hardware

installed. Double doors to be prehung at the factory to ensure a proper fit and that

hardware functions properly, then disassembled for shipping purposes.

C. Install door opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in

installation instructions.

D. Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly

prohibited.

E. Site tolerances: Maintain plumb and level tolerance specified in manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions

F. After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.

G. Optional: Contractor has option to have precast building manufacturer fabricate

building with door installed during wall fabrication provided that the FRP door and

frame meet the requirements stated in this specification. Door frame width shall be

coordinated with precast building wall thickness. Frame may be either butted, cast in

or wrapped.

3.2 PROTECTION

Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to

completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed.


March 2018 08255-7

3.3 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove

mastic smears and other unsightly marks.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 08255-8



March 2018 08710-1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM E 283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure

Differences Across the Specimen

ASTM F 883 Padlocks

BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC. (BHMA)

ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts and Hinges (BHMA 101)

ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches (BHMA

601)

ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices (BHMA 701)

ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers (BHMA 301)

ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products (BHMA 501)

ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim (BHMA 1001)

ANSI/BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions

ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders (BHMA 311)

ANSI/BHMA A156.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches (BHMA 611)

ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches (BHMA 621)

ANSI/BHMA A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices

ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware

ANSI/BHMA A156.17 Self Closing Hinges & Pivots


March 2018 08710-2

ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials and Finishes (BHMA 1301)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

UL BMD Building Materials Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Hardware items


Installation


Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1S

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01781, "Operation and

Maintenance Data."


1.3.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications

Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock, hinge, or closer

manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide features indicated or

specified.


Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary

appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Deliver keys to the Owner directly.


March 2018 08710-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE

Hardware to be applied to prefinished doors shall be made to template. Promptly furnish

template information or templates to door and frame manufacturers. Template hinges

shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7. Coordinate hardware items to prevent

interference with other hardware.

2.2 HARDWARE SETS

Provide hardware sets for each door in the following quantity, item, manufacturer and

product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.

3 Full Mortise Hinges Stanley # FBB191, 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 inch, US 32D

1 Lockset/Latch: Best 40H-Series with 14J lever design, US 32D,

N-Passage type (Cannot be locked).

1 Hasp Stainless Steel, US 32D

1 Overhead Holder-Stop Glynn-Johnson, 81 series, US 32D

1 Kick plate as specified, US 32D

1 Threshold NGP # 425 Saddle Type 1/2 x 5 inch

3 Silencers Glenn-Johnson #GJ64 (Grey)

1 Set Jamb and Head Seals Reese 797, Self Adhesive

36" Door Sweep Reese 967 DUR

2.3 HARDWARE ITEMS

Hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts, and closers shall be clearly and

permanently marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark where it will be visible

after the item is installed. For closers with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath

the cover.

2.3.1 Hinges

Five knuckle, full mortise, ANSI/BHMA A156.1, 4 1/2 by 4 1/2 inches unless otherwise

specified. Provide three hinges per door leaf to 90 inches high and one additional hinge

for each 30 inches of additional height. Full mortise hinges shall be stainless steel at

doors opening to exterior and interior, finish shall match lockset. Provide wide throw,

full mortise hinges for doors requiring 180 degree swing. Construct loose pin hinges for

exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so that pins will be nonremovable,

nonrising when door is closed. Other antifriction bearing hinges may be provided in lieu

of ball-bearing hinges. Tips shall be Flat button with matching plug, finished to match

leaves, except where hospital tips are indicated.


March 2018 08710-4

2.3.2 Thresholds

ANSI A 156.21, aluminum. One-piece units with bolt cutouts, not more than 1/2 inch

high.

2.3.3 Locks and Latches

ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Grade 1.

2.3.3.1 Mortise Locks and Latches

ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Provide heavy-duty, field reversible, all working parts forged or

machined, mortise locks. Cut escutcheons to suit cylinders and provide trim items with

straight, beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. Knobs and roses of

mortise locks shall have screwless shanks and no exposed screws. Provide 3/4 inch

minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Lock shall have a 2 3/4 inch backset.

2.3.4 Lock Trim

Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design with curved lip

extended to protect frame. Finish to match hardware set.

2.3.4.1 Lever Handles

Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs. Lever handles for exit devices shall meet the test

requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks. Lever handle locks shall have

a breakaway feature (such as a weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable

damage to the lock when a force in excess of that specified in ANSI/BHMA A156.13 is

applied to the lever handle. Lever handles shall return to within 1/2 inch of the door face.

2.3.5 Closers

ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting devices,

fasteners, and other features necessary for the particular application. Size closers in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide manufacturer's 10 year

warranty. Provide with integral back checks and cold weather fluid.

2.3.6 Overhead Holders

ANSI/BHMA A156.8. Adjustable, surface mounted, including hold-open feature for

exterior and interior installations.

2.3.7 Closer Holder-Release Devices

ANSI/BHMA A156.15.


March 2018 08710-5

2.3.8 Door Protection Plates

ANSI/BHMA A156.6. Stainless steel, 0.050 inch thickness. Apply to push side of doors

equipped with closers. Width for single doors shall be 2 inches less than door width;

width for pairs of doors shall be one inch less than door width. Height of kick plates

shall be 12 inches.

2.3.9 Door Stops and Silencers

ANSI/BHMA A156.16. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair.

2.3.10 Weather Stripping

A set shall include head and jamb seals, drop seals and sweep strips. Sweeps shall be

extruded aluminum retainer with a flexible sweep of flexible vinyl or neoprene wiper or a

sweep seal strip. Aluminum shall be anodized.

2.3.11 Special Tools

Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to

service and adjust hardware items.

2.4 FASTENERS

Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with hardware.

Fasteners exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal or stainless steel. Provide

fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation.

2.5 FINISHES

US32D for stainless steel. Aluminum finishes shall be clear anodized.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. Provide machine

screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry

surfaces. Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core construction.

Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory installation.

3.1.1 Weather Stripping Installation

Handle and install weather stripping so as to prevent damage. Provide full contact,

weather-tight seals. Doors shall operate without binding.


March 2018 08710-6

3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

ANSI/SDI 100 or door manufacturer's recommended locations and as follows, unless

indicated or specified otherwise:

A. Door Knobs/Levers: 3 feet – 2 inches above finished floor to center of knob/lever

unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

B. Kick and Armor Plates: Push side of single-acting doors. Both sides of double-

acting doors.

C. Locking Hasp: 4 feet – 0 inches above finished floor to center of hasp on exterior of

door unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.


After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and other damage until

acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days before scheduled, so that testing

can be witnessed by the Engineer and the locality. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts,

holders, closers, and other items to operate properly. Correct, repair, and finish, as

directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage to adjoining work.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 09900-1

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH TLV-BKLT Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical

Substances and Physical Agents and Biological

Exposure Indices (BEIs)

ACGIH TLV-DOC Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and

Biological Exposure Indices


ASTM D 6386 Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron

and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)

CID A-A-378 Putty, Linseed Oil Type (For Wood Sash Glazing)

CID A-A-1558 Paint, Stencil

CID A-A-2904 Thinner, Paint, Mineral Spirits, Regular and Odorless

CID A-A-50557 Primer, Water-Borne, Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, For

Metal Surfaces

FEDERAL STANDARDS (FED-STD)

FED-STD-313 Material Safety Data, Transportation Data and Disposal

Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government

Activities


March 2018 09900-2

STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)

SSPC PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting

SSPC PA 3 Safety in Paint Application

SSPC SP 1 Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Coating

Sealant

For each type of coating, sealant, or other product furnished, submit data from the

manufacturer's paint laboratory indicating that the product conforms to requirements

of the referenced specification.

SD-04 Samples

Color

Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference color samples to

color scheme as indicated.


Application instructions

Manufacturer's material safety data sheets

Submit Manufacturer's material safety data sheets for coatings, solvents, and other

potentially hazardous materials, as defined in FED-STD-313.


March 2018 09900-3

SD-07 Certificates

Wet Well Coating

Provide written certification from a certified manufacturer's representative that the

surfaces of the wet well were prepared in the proper manner for installation of the

coating product and the product was prepared and installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. This certification shall be performed on-site at

the Contractor's expense. Manufacturer's certification shall consist of evaluating the

surface preparation, the coating product during the preparation stage and upon

completion of its application in accordance with manufacturer's testing standards.


Wet Well Coatings Warranty

The Contractor shall warrant the wet well coatings to be free of defects in

workmanship and/or materials for a period of five (5) years from the date of final

acceptance. Final acceptance will be based on field inspection by the Locality and

the Engineer. The Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written

notice thereof, repair defects in materials and/or workmanship which may develop

during the aforementioned time period, and any damage to other work caused by

such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the

Owner.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of nonvolatile

content.

1.3.2 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

1.3.3 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos.

1.3.4 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.


March 2018 09900-4

1.3.5 Silica Sand

The use of silica sand is prohibited.

1.3.6 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH TLV-BKLT and ACGIH TLV-DOC confirmed

human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.4 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the designation name, formula or

specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's

formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special

precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished

in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance

with the manufacturer's written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground,

under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and

at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F. Protect from freezing or damage.

1.5 SAFETY METHODS

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the

following:

1.5.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA 3.

1.5.2 Toxic Materials

To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent

guidance of:

A. The chemical manufacturer when using mineral spirits, or other chemicals. Use

impermeable gloves, chemical goggles or face shield, and other recommended

protective clothing and equipment to avoid exposure of skin, eyes, and respiratory

system. Conduct work in a manner to minimize exposure of building occupants and

the general public.

B. 29 CFR 1910.1000.

C. ACGIH TLV-BKLT, threshold limit values.

D. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets (MSDS).


March 2018 09900-5

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The contractor shall be responsible for taking wet bulb, dry bulb, surface temperature,

humidity and dew point readings to ensure that conditions are within the manufacturer's

specifications prior to any painting. A daily weather conditions log shall be maintained

during all paint applications of the above parameters and shall be submitted to the

Engineer for review upon request.

1.6.1 Exterior Coatings

Not applicable.

1.6.2 Interior Coatings

Apply coatings when surfaces to be painted are dry and the following surface

temperatures can be maintained:

A. Between 50 and 95 degrees F during application of enamels and varnishes;

B. Between 50 and 95 degrees F during application of other coatings.

1.7 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not indicated or specified,

colors shall be selected by the Owner. Manufacturers' names and color identification are

used for the purpose of color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use

only if they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers are

acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to

specified requirements.

1.8 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1.8.1 Painting Included

Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless

indicated otherwise.

A. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by

removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.

B. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory

finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.

C. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.


March 2018 09900-6

D. All exterior wood, ferrous and galvanized metal surfaces, and all interior surfaces

unless indicated not to be painted. Surfaces included to be painted, but not

necessarily limited to, are:

1. Interior concrete wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Interior CMU wall surfaces.

3. Plywood and gypsum board ceilings.

4. Equipment supports.

5. Steel beams and framing.

6. Metal fabrications, bollards, hoist beams, and lintels.

7. Plain, insulated, or wrapped interior building piping, valves, fittings and

appurtenances.

8. Plain, insulated or wrapped exterior building piping, valves, fittings,

hydrants, appurtenances above ground and inside tankage (including within

the wet well).

9. Plain, insulated or wrapped interior ductwork and appurtenances only when

located in areas indicated to be painted.

10. Plain, insulated or wrapped exterior ductwork and appurtenances where

indicated to be painted.

11. Interior pipe, conduit and appurtenances when located in areas indicated to

be painted.

12. Exterior pipe, conduit and appurtenances above ground.

13. Ferrous and galvanized metal conduits.

14. Exposed woodwork.

15. Machinery and equipment, including factory finished, electrical panels,

switchboards, switch gear, safety switches, motor starter equipment,

busways, raceways, high-voltage conduits, and any ferrous metal enclosure

not provided with an approved, weather and corrosion resistant finish

(excluding electrical bus conductors) or surfaces which have rusted.


March 2018 09900-7

1.8.2 Painting Excluded

Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.

A. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed ductwork,

machinery, and equipment fixed in place.

B. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces

above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, and chases.

C. Steel to be embedded in concrete.

D. Copper, stainless steel, brass, and lead except existing coated surfaces.

E. Exposed to view aluminum surfaces including immersed surfaces except those

specified previously.

F. Fiberglass surfaces, unless indicated otherwise.

G. Interior of pipe, ductwork and conduits.

H. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units.

I. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates.

J. Factory furnished motor control centers, control panels, engines, engine generators,

outdoor electrical panels, and electrical switchgear.

K. Exterior surfaces of all louvers and fans.

1.8.3 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces, existing uncoated surfaces, and existing coated surfaces of the

building and appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by

cleaning operations. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the

following items, unless indicated otherwise.

A. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and

B. Other contiguous surfaces.

1.8.4 Mechanical and Electrical Painting

Includes field coating of interior and exterior new and existing surfaces. Where a space

or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items unless indicated

otherwise.


March 2018 09900-8

A. Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;

B. Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;

C. Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced or as specified herein.

2.2 EXTERIOR BELOW-GRADE WALLS

Exterior below-grade walls shall be coated with Cooper Black No 733 rubberized

protective coating as manufactured by Cooper’s Creek Chemical Corporation or

approved equal. Coating shall be inspected by Engineer and Locality personnel prior to

placing backfill.

2.3 INTERIOR WET WELL

None.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PLAQUE

Station identification plaque shall be mounted on station interior wall. Plaque shall be

black with minimum ¼” white engraved letters. Plaque shall include the following:

A. Station Name

B. Station Serial Number (from pump manufacturer)

C. Voltage

D. Horsepower

E. Design Flow (in gpm)

F. Design Total Dynamic Head (in feet)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect,

hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting

fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in

contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in

the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by

coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.


March 2018 09900-9

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other

substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate.

3.2.1 Existing Coated Surfaces with No Defects

Before application of coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-

adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife:

A. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings, except stucco

and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry cloth saturated with mineral

spirits, CID A-A-2904. Allow surface to dry. Wiping shall immediately precede

the application of the first coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.

B. Sand existing enamel and other glossy surfaces to remove gloss. Brush and wipe

clean with a dry cloth.

C. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the application

instructions of the paint manufacturer.

3.2.2 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. Minor defects are defined

as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls, alligatoring, chalking, and irregularities due to

partial peeling of previous coatings.

3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

3.3.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces

Shop-coated Surfaces and Areas That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign

Substances: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease.

Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6, or

SSPC SP 10 as applicable for the surface use.

3.3.2 Galvanized Surfaces

A. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces with Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products:

Clean with solvent, steam, or non-alkaline detergent solution in accordance with

SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized, the coating

shall be completely removed by brush-off abrasive blast or other treatment, or the

surface shall be primed with a primer which is specifically recommended by the

paint manufacturer for use on passivated or stabilized galvanized steel. For new

galvanized steel to be coated, if absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not

documented, test as described in ASTM D 6386, and remove by one of the methods

described therein.


March 2018 09900-10

B. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting: Water

jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20

percent coating deterioration and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor

as recommended by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.

C. Galvanized with Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Spot abrasive blast

rusted areas as described for steel in SSPC SP 6, and abrasive blast as described for

steel in SSPC SP 7, to remove existing coating.

3.3.3 Aluminum, Other Non-Galvanized, and Non-Ferrous Surfaces

Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild non-

alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminates.

3.3.4 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces

Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, CID A-A-2904. Wipe dry with clean, dry

cloths.

3.3.5 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous Coating

Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution of 1/2 cup

trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5 percent sodium

hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.

3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry

A. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.

(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new and existing uncoated surfaces

with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household

detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly with fresh

water. Wash existing coated surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse

thoroughly. For large areas, water blasting may be used.

(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new, existing coated, and existing uncoated surfaces

with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household

detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of

warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.


March 2018 09900-11

(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed by washing

with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of hydrochloric (muriatic)

acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the surface for more than five minutes

before rinsing with fresh water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of

surface, per workman, at one time.

B. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects,

including but not limited to spalls, in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and prior to coating application.

C. Allowable Moisture Content: Verify moisture content is less than 8 percent. Allow

surfaces to cure a minimum of 7 days before painting.

3.5 PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES

3.5.1 New, Existing Uncoated, and Existing Coated Surfaces

New, Existing Uncoated, and Existing Coated Plywood and Wood Surfaces, Except

Floors, to Receive Natural Finish:

A. Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other deleterious substances

and in a condition approved by the Owner prior to receiving paint or other finish.

Do not use water to clean uncoated wood. Scrape to remove loose coatings.

Lightly sand to roughen the entire area of previously enamel-coated wood surfaces.

B. Removal of Fungus and Mold: Wash existing coated surfaces with a solution

composed of 3 ounces (2/3 cup) trisodium phosphate, 1 ounce (1/3 cup) household

detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm

water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

C. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:

(1) Knots and Resinous Wood: Prior to application of coating, cover knots and

stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut shellac varnish, plasticized with

5 ounces of castor oil per gallon. Scrape away existing coatings from knotty

areas, and sand before treating. Prime before applying any putty over

shellacked area.

(2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty, CID A-A-378.

Sand smooth after putty has dried.

(3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the surface, wipe and

apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow to dry before paint is applied.

D. Prime Coat for New Exterior Surfaces: Prime coat wood trim before wood becomes

dirty, warped, or weathered.


March 2018 09900-12

E. Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty cracks after the prime

coat has dried.

3.6 APPLICATION

3.6.1 Coating Application

Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are

applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein. Thoroughly work coating

materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before

applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and

during the application of coating material. Apply coating materials under adequate

illumination.

A. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating

manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion

problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat.

B. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry

more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying

subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation

if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by

manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding

coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in

shades of successive coats. Apply zinc-rich primers under continuous agitation.

C. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves,

laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.

D. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes)

should be applied while the intermediate coat is still tacky, within a few days.

E. Floors: Concrete floor coatings shall be applied by qualified contractor and shall be

applied only by air spray.

F. Provide "Wet Paint" signs in areas being painted.

3.6.2 Equipment

Apply coatings with clean approved brushes, clean approved rollers, or clean approved

spray equipment, unless specified otherwise. Spray areas made inaccessible to brushing

by items such as ducts and other equipment.


March 2018 09900-13

3.6.2.1 Spray Equipment

Spraying operation shall conform to the following procedures

A. Spray equipment shall be available for inspection.

B. Operative moisture trap shall be between air supply source and application

equipment.

C. Air source shall provide continuous volume of 20 cfm air at each gun nozzle at 80

psi for applying coatings by conventional spray technique. When coatings are

applied by airless spray technique, input pressure to pump shall be such as to

produce uniform spray patterns.

D. Provide regulators and gauges in good working order on both air and material lines.

User operation pressure compatible for particular paint.

E. Spray nozzle shall be a minimum of 8 inches to a maximum of 18 inches from

substrate during application.

F. Keep dry overspray to a minimum.

3.6.3 Thinning of Paints

Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is

mandatory for the type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the Engineer

to use thinners. The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to

use.

3.6.4 Coating Systems

A. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications

listed in Table 1. The materials specified herein are named for the purpose of

establishing type and quality. Products of other manufacturers may be approved

provided their equality is established by data submittals. Complete lists of paint

systems proposed for use in the work, together with the names of the manufacturers,

shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner prior to

commencing work.

B. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels,

undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat

unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers

to the minimum dry film thickness.

C. Unless primer coats are removed by sandblasting or as required in this specification,

primer coats specified in coating systems are in lieu of shop-applied primers.


March 2018 09900-14

D. Ensure prime coatings are compatible with finish coatings. If prime coating is not

compatible, apply a universal barrier coat of 2 mils thickness prior to finish coats or

remove primer coat and reprime.

E. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces, which have not been

specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.

F. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including New

Patches in Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:

(1) One coat of primer.

(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.

(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.

3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

A. Primer: Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is

cleaned. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the surface prior to application of primer.

Prime ferrous metals bedded in concrete to minimum of 1 inch below exposed

surfaces.

(1) Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use two coats of specified primer on

metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.

(2) Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to

protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.

(3) Pipes and Tubing: Semitransparent film applied to pipes and tubing at the

mill is not to be considered a shop coat. Remove shop coat and apply

specified ferrous metal primer prior to application of subsequent coats.

(4) Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces. On

surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime exposed nails

and other ferrous metal with latex primer, CID A-A-50557.

B. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use. "DFT" means dry film thickness in

mils.


March 2018 09900-15

3.8 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

A. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use or as specified herein.

B. Backroll concrete and masonry surfaces with a roller if primer has been spray

applied, except for floor surfaces.

3.9 COATING SYSTEMS FOR WOOD AND PLYWOOD AND GYPSUM BOARD

A. Apply coatings of Table 1 by location of use.

B. Prior to erection, apply two coats of specified primer to treat and prime wood

surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection.

C. Back prime wood trim before installation.

3.10 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Coat exposed piping to

Owner approved color code scheme. In addition to color coding, provide stenciling on all

pipe, including surfaces in concealed spaces. Place stenciling in clearly visible locations.

Stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping

and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on piping to

indicate direction of flow. Use black stencil paint, CID A-A-1558.

3.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of

moving components, including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows

with operable sash, for inspection by the Engineer. Perform this demonstration after

appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing

for final payment.

B. Measure paint dry film thickness with mikrotest gauge calibrated against National

Bureau of Standards certified coating thickness calibration standards in presence of

the Engineer.

C. Measure wet paint with wet film thickness gauges.

D. Measure surface temperature of items to be blasted or painted with temperature

gauge

E. Monitor humidity with humidity gauge.

F. The Engineer will observe prepared surfaces before primer and successive coats are

applied.


March 2018 09900-16

3.12 RESTORATION

A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.

B. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding and debris. Leave areas broom clean.

C. All private and public property disturbed in the process of construction shall be

restored to the condition existing prior to construction. Proper notice shall be given

to the Owner and to homeowners of any expected inconvenience or hazardous

conditions. Special care must be taken to prevent damage to trees and shrubs.

D. The contractor will be responsible for any damages resulting from sandblasting or

painting activities, including overspray.


March 2018 09900-17

TABLE 1

Surface Preparation Generic Type Coats

Tnemec Products

Name

DFT

(mils) Color Interior Wood

and Plywood

Clean and

Dry

Undercoater

Alkyd/Oil

Alkyd/Oil

Prime

Intermed.

Finish

Tnemec Undercoat

36-603

Hi-Build Tneme-

Gloss 2H

Hi-Build Tneme-

Gloss 2H

2.0-3.0

1.5-3.5

1.5-3.5

White

Off-

White

White

Interior Masonry Clean and

Dry

Acrylic Filler

Acrylic Epoxy

Acrylic Epoxy

Masonry

Filler

Intermed.

Finish

Envirofill 130

Hi-Build Tneme-

Tufcoat 113/114

Hi-Build Tneme-

Tufcoat 113/114

60-80

sf/gal.

4.0-6.0

4.0-6.0

White

Lt.Gray

White

Interior Building

Metal Piping

Valves, Fittings,

Etc.

SSPC-SP-6 Epoxy Mastic

Acrylic

Urethane

Prime

Finish

Hi-Build

Epoxoline 66

Endura-shield

73/74

3.0-5.0

2.0-5.0

Red

Battle-

ship

Gray

Electrical Metal

Conduit, Wall or

Ceiling Mounted

(Rigid conduit

only. Flexible

conduit to remain

unpainted.)

SSPC-SP-3 Epoxy Mastic

Acrylic

Urethane

Prime

Finish

Hi-Build

Epoxoline 66

Endura-shield

73/74

3.0-5.0

2.0-3.0

Red or

Factory

Prime

Safety

Red

Concrete Floor Brush-Off

Blast

Epoxy

Polyamide

(non-skid)

Primer

Finish

Epoxoprime 201

Tneme-Glaze

10.0-

12.0

6.0-8.0

White

Battle-

ship

Gray

END OF SECTION


March 2018 09900-18



March 2018 10201-1

SECTION 10201 – METAL WALL LOUVERS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INCORPORATED (AA)

AA 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION, INC. (AMCA)

ANSI/AMCA 500 D Testing Dampers for Rating

ANSI/AMCA 500 L Testing Louvers for Rating

AMCA 511 Certified Ratings Program – Product Rating Manual for

Air Control Devices


ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Wall louvers

Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of louvers. Indicate

materials, sizes, thickness, fastenings, and profiles.


March 2018 10201-2

SD-04 Samples

Wall louvers

Colors of finishes shall closely approximate colors indicated. Where color is not

indicated, submit the manufacturer's standard colors to the Owner for selection.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store materials off the

ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and protection against dampness.

Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. Replace defective or

damaged materials with new.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Aluminum Sheet

ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming.

2.1.2 Extruded Aluminum

ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or -T52.

2.2 METAL WALL LOUVERS

Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load of not less

than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings

program seal for air performance and water penetration in accordance with AMCA 500

L, AMCA 500 D, and AMCA 511. The rating shall show a water penetration of 0.20 or

less ounce per square foot of free area at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute.

2.2.1 Extruded Aluminum Louvers

Fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 or -T52 aluminum with a wall thickness of not less than

0.081 inch.

2.2.2 Formed Metal Louvers

Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or aluminum sheet not

less than 0.08 inch thick.


March 2018 10201-3

2.2.3 Shutters

Provide anodized aluminum gravity shutter at each louver location. Gravity shutter shall

open in the direction of flow as indicated.

2.2.4 Screens and Frames

For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum or 1/4

inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. Mount screens in removable,

rewireable frames of same material and finish as the louvers between louver and shutter.

2.3 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers. Provide other

accessories as required for complete and proper installation.

2.4 FINISHES

2.4.1 Aluminum

Provide factory-applied anodic coating. Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and apply an

anodized finish conforming to AA 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes,

integral color anodized, Architectural Class II.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Fixed Wall Louvers

Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners as appropriate

for the wall construction and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.2.1 Aluminum

Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer

and two coats of aluminum paint.

3.2.2 Cement-based Substrates

Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-

resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 10201-4



March 2018 11330-1

SECTION 11330 — NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS AND DRIVES

1. GENERAL

1.1 Summary

1.1.1 This section addresses the work related to furnishing and installing all supervision, labor,

materials and equipment in the work for non-clog, submersible centrifugal pumps and

drives.

1.1.2 Related Sections

01330 Submittal Procedures

15060 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

16010 Electrical Basic Requirements

16410 Pump Control Panel

16482 Motor Starters

16690 Variable Frequency Drive

16920 Programmable Logic Controller

1.2 Submittals

Submit shop drawings and manufacturers data in accordance with the provisions of

Division I, General Provisions, and Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures, and

• Certified performance curves in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards

signed and sealed by the manufacturer’s licensed professional engineer.

• Certified copies of results of hydrostatic test.

• Setting plans which shall include

o Anchor bolt layout

o Anchor bolt dimensions

o Outline dimension and weights of pumps, guiderail system and control

enclosures

• Pumps: Submittal data and drawings shall include:

o Manufacturer, type, and model number

o Assembly drawing, nomenclature and material list, O&M manual, and parts list

o Type, manufacturer, model number

o Impeller type, diameter, sphere size passing, number of vanes and identification

number

o Complete motor performance data including: rating: voltage/phase/frequency


March 2018 11330-2

o Complete performance curve(s) showing full range (shutoff to run-out) head vs.

capacity, NPSHR, hydraulic efficiency, motor active (KW) input power, and

shaft power (BHP)

o A copy of the system head curves and recommend pump performance curves are

included in Division IX, Supplemental Specifications. These curves included

high and low HRSD head conditions, if appropriate, and a friction factor of

C=100 and C=120. When the CONTRACTOR is submitting a proposed pump

curve for shop drawing review, the proposed pump curve shall be plotted on top

of the system curves included in Division IX Supplemental Specifications and

submitted for review.

• Location and description of Service Centers and spare parts stock.

• The manufacturer shall indicate, by arrows to points on the flow versus head in feet

of water curves, the limits recommended for stable operation, between which the

pumps are to be operated to prevent surging, cavitation and vibration. The stable

operating range shall meet the hydraulic performance requirements of the proposed

system.

• Bearing life projection and warranty at the specified operating condition

1.3 References

1.3.1 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The referenced


• HI B Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary, and Reciprocating Pumps.

• ASTM B American Society for Testing and Materials.

• ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

• AISI B American Iron and Steel Institute

• ANSI B American National Standards Institute

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Products

Pumps shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, or an approved equal.


March 2018 11330-3

2.2 Pump Performance

2.2.1 The pumps shall be suitable for pumping raw sewage and shall be designed and fully

guaranteed for this use. The fluid temperature range shall be from 40 degrees to 104 degrees F.

2.2.2 Sewage pumps shall be submersible centrifugal sewage pumps as shown on drawings with

operating parameters as follows:

Primary Condition Secondary Condition

Capacity (gpm) 378 650

Total Dynamic Head (Feet) 24.5

50.8

Maximum Horsepower at Design Condition (bhp)

11.00

12.10

2.2.3 Manufacturer shall confirm that NPSHR will be less than NPSHA at any point on the

pump curve.

2.2.4 Secondary conditions will vary, based on manufacturers standard performance curves.

2.2.5 Pump seals shall be cooled without an external coolant source.

2.3 Pump Construction

2.3.1 Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30, with smooth

surfaces devoid of blow holes or other casting irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall

be AISI type 316 stainless steel. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumped

media, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of

epoxy primer with an epoxy paint finish. The exterior coating of the pump per

manufacturers recommendations.

2.3.2 Volute discharge shall be a minimum of 6" diameter.


March 2018 11330-4

2.3.3 Sealing design shall incorporate metal to metal contact between machined surfaces.

Pump/Motor unit mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined

and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Joint sealing will be the result of controlled

compression of rubber O-rings in two planes, and O-ring contact of four sides without the

requirement of a specific bolt torque limit.

2.4 Cooling System

Motors shall be externally cooled by submergence in the pumped media.

2.5 Cables

2.5.1 The cable entry seal design shall insure a watertight and submersible seal. Each motor shall

be fitted with sufficient cable so that no splices are required between the pump and the

pump starters. The CONTRACTOR shall supply two separate cables for each pump and

coordinate the required cable length IOT the installation as shown on the drawing. Control

wiring or sensor cables shall be run in separate conduit than power cable or wiring. Cable

restraints and supports shall be suitable to support cable without damage to the cable and

be 316 stainless steel.

2.5.2 The power cable shall be Type ATC@, ASOW-A@, or AW@ and sized according to the

NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the control panel

without the need of any splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant rubber.

2.6 Motors

2.6.1 Motor shall be furnished with nameplate indicating voltage, phase, current, design type;

service factor; insulation class; rotation; speed; current, power factor, and start (max.

Inrush) current; locked rotor current; NEC code letter; and motor torque as a continuous

function through the motor start cycle from no rotation to synchronous speed.

2.6.2 The pump motor shall be induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design,

housed in an air or oil filled, watertight chamber, NEMA B type. Motor shall be UL listed

for use in Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations. The stator windings and

stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F installation rated for 311

degrees F. The stator shall be dipped and baked three times in Class F varnish, and shall be

heat-shrink fitted into the stator housing. The use of bolts, pins, or other fastening devices

requiring penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable.

2.6.3 The motor shall be specifically designed for submersible pump usage and designed for

continuous duty pumping media of up to 104 degrees F and capable of up to 10 evenly

spaced starts per hour. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence

underwater to a depth of 65 feet without loss of watertight integrity.


March 2018 11330-5

2.6.4 Thermal switches shall be imbedded in the stator lead coils to monitor the temperature of

each phase winding. These thermal switches shall be set to open at 125 degrees C, and

shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection;

and shall be connected to the control panel.

2.6.5 Dual moisture detection probes shall detect the entrance of moisture and provide an alarm.

The moisture detection probes shall detect the entrance of moisture in the stator and lower

seal cavity and send an alarm to the control panel. Single probe or float switch sensors

shall not be allowed.

2.6.6 Motors shall be suitable for operation with controllers as indicated on the plans. Motors for

Variable Frequency Drive applications shall be rated for induction inverter duty.

2.6.7 The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity)

shall be a minimum of 1.15 at an operating temperature of 104 degrees F ambient and with

a temperature rise not to exceed 190 degrees F. A performance chart shall be provided

showing curves for torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. This

chart shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics.

2.6.8 The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading throughout

the entire pump performance curve.

2.7 Bearings

The pump shaft shall rotate on bearings with a minimum L10 bearing life of 50,000 hours at any point along the usable portion of the pump curve.

2.8 Mechanical Seal

2.8.1 Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of

two totally independent seal assemblies. The lower seal shall be independent of the

impeller hub. The seals shall operate in an oil reservoir that hydro-dynamically lubricates

the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the

pump and the oil chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating

tungsten carbide or silicon carbide ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between

the oil chamber and the motor housing, shall contain one stationary tungsten carbide seal

ring and one positively driven rotating silicon carbide seal ring. Each seal interface shall be

held in contact by its own spring system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor

adjustment and shall be capable of operating in either clockwise or counter clockwise

direction rotation without damage or loss of seal. For special applications, other seal face

materials shall be available.

2.8.2 Each pump shall be provided with an oil chamber for the shaft sealing system. The oil

chamber shall be design to prevent overfilling and to provide oil expansion capacity. The

drain and inspection plug, with position anti-leak seal shall be easily accessible from the

outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication.


March 2018 11330-6

2.9 Pump Shaft

Pump and motor shaft shall be a solid continuous shaft. The pump shaft is an extension of

the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft shall be of AISI Type

416 stainless steel, and shall be completely isolated from the pumped liquid.

2.10 Impeller

Impellers shall be non-clog type, manufactured of close-grained cast iron conforming to

ASTM A48, Class 30. Impellers shall be of one piece, single suction, enclosed radial flow

design with well-rounded leading vane edges and a thick hydrofoil shape with large

openings to prevent the accumulation of solids and stringy material. The clearance between

the impeller outside diameter and cutwater shall be capable of passing a 3-inch sphere.

Impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced and secured to a straight or tapered

fit on the pump shaft by means of a bolt, washer and key. The arrangement shall be such

that the impeller cannot be loosened by operating torque in either forward or reverse

rotation.

2.11 Volute

Volutes shall be made of close-grained cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30 and

of one piece design with smooth fluid passages large enough to pass any size solid that can

pass through the impeller. Volutes shall be flanged with discharge as shown on the

Drawings. Diffusion vanes are not permitted. Volutes shall be furnished with large

cleanout openings located at the impeller centerline, to allow access to the impeller.

Flanges shall be 125 lbs. raised or flat faced flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.1

drilling. Casing shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the design head or 1.25 times

the shutoff head, whichever is greater.

2.12 Wear Rings

Pumps shall be equipped with replaceable stationary and mobile wear rings.

2.12.1 The stationary wear ring shall be stainless steel with a Brinell hardness of 425-475.

2.12.2 The mobile wear ring shall be stainless steel with a Brinell hardness of 325-350.

2.13 Protection

2.13.1 All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature of each

phase winding. Should high temperature occur, the thermal switches shall open, stop the

motor and activate an alarm.

2.13.2 A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect water in the stator chamber. When

activated, the leakage sensor will stop the motor and activate an alarm.


March 2018 11330-7

2.13.3 Each pump shall be provided with its own self contained control and status module, which

will be mounted within the pump control panel. This module shall provide a single point

within the control system for pump sensor output processing. The module shall have a

manual reset.

2.13.4 All alarms connected to the control and status module shall be integrated with the RTU/PLC panel.

2.14 Guide Rail Bracket and Discharge Base

2.14.1 The sliding bracket assembly shall be a part of the pumping unit and constructed such that,

when the pumping unit is lowered onto the discharge base elbow, the knifing action of the vertical metal to metal seal will provide a self-cleaning, non-clogging, non-sparking assembly.

2.14.2 Two 316 stainless steel rails shall be provided to guide the pump when it is being raised or

lowered in the wet well. They shall mount on the discharge base/elbow provided by the pump manufacturer. The rails shall guide the pump into position on the discharge elbow as it is lowered into place. The rail guide system shall be mounted to the wall with intermediate 316 stainless steel brackets at no more than 8- foot intervals using 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors.

2.14.3 The discharge base shall be rigid, set and secured to the concrete floor of the wetwell and

shall be capable of supporting the total weight of the pumping unit. The base shall be

bolted directly to the wetwell bottom slab using 316 SS adhesive anchors or cast in place

SS anchor bolts. The discharge base shall include a 90 degree elbow with a 125 pound

ANSI flange discharging vertically, be suitable for the pump and be of manufactured of

either cast or ductile iron.

2.14.4 A 316 stainless steel cable shall be provided for each pump with a suitable stainless steel

bracket at the top for holding the cable within easy reach through the hatch.

2.15 Spare Parts

2.15.1 One spare full diameter impeller and one spare set of mechanical seals.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

3.1.1 Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the

manufacturer, and the details shown on the contract drawings. A copy of the installation

instructions shall be made available to the ENGINEER and the CITY’S Construction

Inspector prior to equipment installation.

3.1.2 In the event any equipment fails to meet the specifications, it shall be modified and retested

in accordance with these specifications.


March 2018 11330-8

3.2 Pump Testing

3.2.1 After installation, the pumping system shall be field tested using potable water. Water will

be furnished by the CITY at no cost to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for conveying the water to the site and providing required meter and back-flow prevention check valve assembly. Each pump shall be cycled through the sequence of operation “pump on” as the level rises in the wet well and then “pump off’ during draw down.

3.2.2 Each pump shall operate over its intended operating range without undue noise, vibration,

or cavitation. The CONTRACTOR shall monitor and record vibration at three

symmetrically located points on each pump at maximum and minimum speed and supply

data to the CITY. Each pump shall operate within the tolerances established in the

Hydraulics Institute (HI) standards and within an acceptable range on the certified pump

curve provided by the manufacturer.

3.2.3 Upon completion of the installation, on-site testing, and before acceptance by the CITY,

the Pump Manufacturer or the authorized Pump Manufacturer’s Representative shall

submit a written statement that the pump installation has been completed in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 Manufacturer’s Representative

3.3.1 Provide manufacturer’s representative for startup.

3.3.2 Prior to Operational Testing, the CONTRACTOR shall have the manufacturer do the

following:

• Megger test the stator and power cables.

• Check proper rotation.

• Check power supply voltage.

• Measure motor operating load and no load current.

• Check level control operation and sequence.

3.3.3 During Final Acceptance Testing, the manufacturer's service representative shall review

recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the CITY’S personnel. Prior to

Final Acceptance testing the pump manufacturer shall submit a written report that the

pump(s) are satisfactorily installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

3.4 Operating Manuals

3.4.1 The pumps shall be supplied with four (4) copies of an Operating Manual with detailed

pump assembly drawings, warranty, and component lists.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15050-1

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The referenced



ASTM B 117 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project

specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.


1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly

engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design, and

workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial

use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of

equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product

shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified

record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6,000 hours, exclusive of the

manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.3.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list

of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes

their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably

convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the

equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


March 2018 15050-2

1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address,

model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate

of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.5 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it

appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction,”

or words of similar meaning, to mean the Owner.

1.3.5.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents,

advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted

as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Owner." For

leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor."

References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during

installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by

the Owner. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of

equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have

electrical connections provided in accordance with requirements of DIVISION 16

"Electrical." Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an

integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted.

Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall

have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment

furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and

related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment.

Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and

conform to the requirements of DIVISION 16 "Electrical."


March 2018 15050-3

1.6 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full

instruction to the Owner's designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and

maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or

system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall

be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or

system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The

number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the

individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use

approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction

with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under

the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating

personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and

repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls,

dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access

doors.

2. PRODUCTS

Not used.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as

specified herein, and provided under each individual section.


March 2018 15050-4

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification

that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test,

except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.

Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the

acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint

shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the

specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the

scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be

less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory

painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120

degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pre-treat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be

painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt,

rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint,

except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned

to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding

coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the

succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal

surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of

pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of

primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel

applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees

F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures

greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting

paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15060-1

SECTION 15060 - INTERIOR PROCESS PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM A53/A53M Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless

ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Compounds.

ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D 2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in

Automotive Applications


Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)


Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D 3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes

Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM F 1866 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Schedule 40 Drainage and DWV Fabricated

Fittings


March 2018 15060-2

ASTM F 1970 Standard Specification for Special Engineered Fittings,

Appurtenances or Valves for use in Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) or Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Systems


ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings

ASME B16.3/ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings


AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings

for Water

AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in.

(75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings

AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron

Threaded Flanges

AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other

Liquids

AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 24 in. (76 mm

through 610 mm) and 54 in. through 64 in. (1,400 mm

through 1,600 mm), for Water Service

AWWA C507 Ball Valves 6 in. through 48 in. (150 mm through 1200

mm)

AWWA C508 Swing-Check Valves For Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50

mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm)

AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service


Appurtenances


March 2018 15060-3

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Pipe and fittings

Valves

Pipe hangers, supports, guides, and anchors

Pipe wall sleeves and seals

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, pipe wall

sleeves and seals, pipe coupling and adapters, valves, joints, joint gaskets and lubricants

meet or exceed specification requirements.


Installation


Valves, Data Package 2S

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01781, "Operation and Maintenance

Data."

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.3.1 Pipe

During loading, transporting, unloading, and storage on-site, exercise care to prevent damage

to piping materials. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Store materials on site in enclosures or

under protective coverings. Assure that materials are kept clean and dry. Do not store

materials directly on the ground.


March 2018 15060-4

1.3.2 Valves and appurtenances

Deliver valves and accessories to the job site in the manufacturer's boxes or crates. Mark

each valve as to size, type, and installation location. Seal valve ends to prevent entry of

foreign matter into valve body. Store valves and accessories in areas protected from weather,

moisture, and possible damage. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Handle valves

and accessories to prevent damage to interior and exterior surfaces.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

Investigate conditions affecting this work and coordinate with other contractors to prevent

interference between architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical features. The

Contract Drawings for small diameter pipe are generally diagrammatic and it is not possible

to indicate all fittings, valves, and other items required for a complete operating system.

Provide all such valves, fittings, and specialties to complete the systems as intended.

1.4.1 Loose Parts

Provide necessary valve wheels, keys, wrenches, levers and stem extensions. Locate to

assure accessibility and operability throughout the operating range without interference.

Install valve stem supports, guides and operators. For buried valves, provide valve boxes and

stem extensions to grade. Provide valve accessories of the same manufacturer as the valve,

unless specified otherwise.


Install piping to meet the requirements of state and local building codes. Materials

contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuels, aromatic compounds,

paint solvent, paint thinner or acid solder will be rejected. Products shall be new, the latest

standard product of reputable manufacturers, and shall have replacement parts available.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS

2.1.1 3-inch and Larger Pressure Piping

Flanged Ductile Iron, AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, Thickness Class 52. Cement mortar

lining, AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 double thickness. Ductile iron force main shall be

flanged inside the station and mechanical joint with retainer glands outside of the station.

Mechanical joint pipe and retainer glands are specified in Section 02610, “Underground

Utility Pipe."


March 2018 15060-5

2.1.1.1 Fittings

Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53.

Cement mortar lining, AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 double thickness.

2.1.1.2 Gaskets

Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 80 Durameter hardness, conforming to ASTM D2000, Class AA

or BA, smooth finish.

2.1.2 Metal Pressure Piping Smaller than 3-inches

ASTM A53/A53M, Seamless, hot-dip galvanized. Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated

on the Contract Drawings. ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class flanges as applicable.

2.1.2.1 Fittings

2.1.2.1.1 Threaded

Malleable Iron, ASME B16.3/ANSI B16.3, 150 Class

2.1.2.1.2 Flanged

Cast Iron, ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class

2.1.2.1.3 Unions

Threaded Malleable Iron, FS WW-U-531, Class 1

2.1.3 Plastic Pressure Piping Smaller than 3-inches

ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC piping. Solvent welded joints per ASTM D 2564. Fittings

shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM F 1970.

2.1.4 Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping

ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC piping. Solvent welded joints per ASTM D 2564. Fittings

shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM F 1866.


March 2018 15060-6

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES

2.2.1 Wall and Floor Sleeves and Pipes

Cast Iron per ASTM A126, Class B or Ductile Iron per ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18.

2.2.2 Wall and Floor Seals

2.2.2.1 Perpendicular Penetration Seals

Seals constructed of an assembly of synthetic rubber links connected with corrosion resistant

stainless steel bolts shall be used to seal the space between wall sleeve and carrier pipe for

pipes entering perpendicular to the concrete surface. When the bolts are tightened, Delrin

plastic pressure plates compress the rubber links to fill the annular space between the pipe

and the wall sleeve to form a watertight seal. Seals shall be manufactured by Link Seal or

approved equal.

2.2.2.2 Non-Perpendicular and Below Grade Penetration Seals

Rubber boot connectors with stainless steel bands meeting ASTM C 923, ASTM C 1478,

and ASTM F 2510, as applicable for the application, by Kor-N-Seal, PSX, or approved equal

shall be used for conduits and pipes passing through non-perpendicular penetrations or where

entering structures below grade. Place non-shrink grout in annular space (inside and outside,

as applicable) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

2.2.3 Flange Adapters

For joining plain-end pipe to flanged valves, fittings, and pumps. Flanged per ASME

B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class.

2.2.4 Transition Couplings

To connect pipes of different outside diameters. High-grade cast-iron sleeves with ductile-

iron follower flanges. Flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class or Mechanical Joint

per AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.

2.2.5 Pipe Hangers

Figure 260 as manufactured by Grinnell Corp. or equal.

2.2.6 Pipe Supports

Figure 199 as manufactured by Grinnell Corp. or equal.


March 2018 15060-7

2.3 GATE VALVES

AWWA C509, resilient seated, non-rising stem, 200 psi working pressure, open left

(counterclockwise), flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class, unless otherwise

noted. One valve wrench shall be provided for every three valves installed in the project.

Provide extension stems (nut operated) where shown on the drawings, otherwise valves shall

be hand wheel operated. Gate valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller, Kennedy, Clow

or approved equal.

2.4 CHECK VALVES

AWWA C508, cast-iron body, outside lever and weight, stainless steel hinge pin, non-shock

working pressure 200 psi, flanged per ASME B16.1/ANSI B16.1, 125 Class, unless

otherwise noted. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller, Kennedy, Clow or

approved equal.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES (LIQUID SERVICE)

Compound pressure and vacuum gauge shall be carbon steel body, carbon steel flanges,

neoprene sleeve, ethylene glycol and water filled, minimum 4 inch dial size, stainless steel

dial, black lines and numbers. Pressure range shall be 0-200 feet water column positive

pressure and 0 to 30 inches mercury for vacuum, graduations and figure intervals

proportioned to range, accuracy to 1% of full scale range. Gauge nipple size shall be 1/2 inch

minimum. Provide for each pump discharge.

2.6 VACUUM GAUGES

Carbon steel body, carbon steel flanges, neoprene sleeve, glycerin filled, minimum 4 inch

dial size, stainless steel dial, black lines and numbers. Pressure range shall be 0-30 inches

mercury vacuum, 1 inch graduations and 5 inch figure intervals, accuracy to 1% of full scale

range. Gauge nipple size shall be 1/2 inch minimum. Provide on suction side of pumps for

suction lift pump installations.

2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS

Piping within the wet well (conduits, exhaust ducts, vent pipe, etc.) shall be supported with

aluminum or stainless steel supports securely anchored to the wall with stainless steel

fasteners. Galvanized components will not be accepted.


March 2018 15060-8

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Pipe Layout in Buildings

Coordinate work to prevent interference between architectural, structural, electrical and

mechanical features; the Contract Drawings are generally diagrammatic due to their small

scale. Provide such offsets, fittings and other items as may be required to suit conditions.

Do not place joints or fittings over switchboards, panels, motors or other electrical

equipment. The completed installation shall present a neat, orderly appearance; do not block

openings or passageways; run piping parallel to the walls of buildings or structures. Provide

clearance between piping, walls, floors, machinery and equipment to prevent the

transmission of noise and vibration. Orient handwheels, levers, valve operators and other

valve actuators for convenience of operation; set gate valves with the stem above the

horizontal. Cut pipe to measurements established at the site and install without springing or

forcing; make changes in direction with fittings. Connect ferrous piping to non-ferrous

piping with dielectric couplings.

3.1.2 Equipment Connections

Make connections to pumps and other equipment in a manner to eliminate strains on piping

and equipment. Install unions or flanges adjacent to equipment and wherever their use will

facilitate removal of equipment.

3.1.3 Wall Sleeves and Wall Pipes

Provide pipes passing through concrete construction with wall sleeves or wall pipes, as

indicated on the Contract Drawings. Set wall sleeves and wall pipes of the required size

during construction of the wall, foundation, or slab.

3.1.4 Wall Seals

Provide watertight wall seals between pipe and wall sleeve where pipes penetrate building

walls, foundations, or slabs. Install seal in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. After installation of carrier pipe and pipe seal, place non-shrink grout in

annular space (both faces) and finish flush with surface of concrete.

3.1.5 Flanged Joints

Tighten flange bolts so that the gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed; do not distort

flanges; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum torque. Leave flange bolts

with ends projecting 1/8" to 1/4" beyond the face of the nut after tightening.


March 2018 15060-9

3.1.6 Threaded Joints

Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies; ream ends of pipe after threading and before

assembly to remove burrs; leave not more than three pipe threads exposed at each

connection; use joint compound or thread tape on the male thread only.

3.1.7 Solvent Welded Joints

Make joints in pipe and fittings in accordance with the procedures and techniques in ASTM

D2855.

3.1.8 Drain Pipe

Floor and hatch drains shall discharge into the wet well through check valves. Slope at

minimum 1/8 inch per foot as indicated on the drawings.

3.2 PIPE SUPPORTS

Support piping from structural construction using pipe hangers, pipe riser clamps and pipe

clamp hangers in conjunction with beam clamps, brackets or other equipment as dictated by

structure construction. Trapeze hangers approved by the Engineer may be used where

several horizontal pipes run closely parallel; secure pipes on trapeze hangers to prevent

sideway motion. Install supports for piping as specified herein.

3.2.1 Vertical Piping

Secure at sufficiently close intervals to keep pipe in alignment and to support weight of pipe

and its contents. Support vertical iron and steel pipe on maximum 5'-0" centers with

stainless steel pipe riser clamps. Support vertical copper tubing at no more than 10'-0"

spacing, using stainless steel pipe riser clamps or pipe clamp hangers at end of runs and at

intermediate points as installation dictates. Support vertical plastic pipe at 4'-0" centers,

using pipe riser clamps or pipe clamp hangers at end of runs and at intermediate points as

installation dictates.

3.2.2 Horizontal Piping

Support at sufficiently close intervals to prevent sagging, thrust restraint, and vibration.

Install hangers or supports at ends of runs or branches and at each change of direction or

alignment. Install stainless steel clevis-type pipe hangers for horizontal iron and steel pipe

on maximum 10'-0" centers. Install stainless steel clevis-type pipe hangers for copper tubing

on 6'-0" centers for 1-1/4" size and smaller, and on 10'-0" centers for copper tubing larger

than 1-1/4" size. Install ring-type pipe hangers for horizontal plastic pipe on maximum 4'-0"

centers, close to every joint, at ends of each branch, and at each change in direction of

elevation; hangers shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade plastic piping and shall permit

free movement of the pipe.


March 2018 15060-10

3.3 VALVES

Install valves and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Inspect

joint surfaces for structural soundness and thoroughly clean before installation. Check and

adjust valves and accessories for smooth operation.

3.4 GAUGES

Install gauges in accordance with the details on the drawings and manufacturer’s

recommendations.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15190-1

SECTION 15190 – HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their

Appurtenances

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures"

SD-06 Test Reports

Test procedures

List of test equipment

Testing sequence schedule

Hydrostatic Test Results

SD-07 Certificates

Certification of test pressure gauge calibration and accuracy


A. Test Acceptance:

1. No test will be accepted until leakage rate is below specified maximum limits.

2. The contractor shall determine and correct the cause of test failures and retest

until successful test results are achieved.


March 2018 15190-2

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST EQUIPMENT

Contractor shall supply all equipment necessary for pipeline testing including:

A. Hydro pump

B. Pressure hoses

C. Test connections

D. Pressure relief valve(s)

E. Pressure gauge(s) calibrated to 0.1 lb./sq. inch

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Install pipe supports in accordance with the plans and specifications. Flush pipeline to

remove debris. Collect and dispose of flushing water and debris in a manner conforming to

regulatory agency requirements.

3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Comply with Section 5 of AWWA C600. Fill entire systems with water and vent air from

the system at least 24 hours before the actual test pressure is applied. Apply the required test

pressure when the water and average ambient temperatures are approximately equal and

constant. Test piping at 1 1/2 times the working pressure (pump discharge pressure) or as

directed by Engineer; avoid excessive pressure on safety devices and mechanical seals.

Maintain test pressure as directed or minimum of 2 hours after the force pump has been

disconnected. Supply makeup water as directed. Visually inspect joints, fittings, and valves

while pipe is under test pressure. Correct all visible leaks and retest as often as necessary

until satisfactory results are achieved.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15200-1

SECTION 15200 - HEATING AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT

1. GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: Fans, electric heaters,

ductwork, louvers, dampers, dehumidifier, and accessories for heating and

ventilating the well facility.

B. Related Work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 16 - Electrical


A. Design and Performance Criteria:

1. Control room exhaust fan (EF-1)

a. CFM: 225 (min.)

b. HP: 1/10

c. Static pressure: 0.25

d. RPM: 1725

e. Thermostatically controlled

f. 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz

g. Model: Greenheck SEI-8-440-VG

h. Gravity type back-draft damper w/ bird screen

i. Factory furnished starter/disconnect, Greenheck MS-1P

2. Wet Well exhaust fan (EF-2)

a. CFM: 550 (min.)

b. HP: 1/6

c. Static pressure: 0.375”

d. RPM: 1303

e. Corrosion resistant construction, stainless steel fasteners

f. Switch controlled

g. 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz

h. Model: Greenheck GB-081-6

i. Fan construction and motor shall be explosion proof

j. Gravity type back-draft damper w/ bird screen

k. Factory furnished starter/disconnect, NEMA 4X/3R, SS,

Greenheck MS-1P


March 2018 15200-2

3. Control room unit heater (UH-1)

a. 5 KW

b. 17,061 BTU/HR

c. 240 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz

d. Model: Reznor EGHB

4. One manufacturer shall provide all damper, louvers, and actuators to

assure system compatibility.

5. All electrical equipment shall be UL approved and be labeled as such.

6. Manufacturer: Ventilating and heating equipment shall be as

manufactured by Greenheck, Reznor, or equal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit (5) five copies of detailed certified

dimensional shop drawings and manufacturer's product data for materials and

equipment, 30-days after date of notice to proceed; show complete information

concerning materials of construction, fabrication, protective coatings, installation

and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. Submit electrical wiring

diagrams for all electrical equipment.

B. Submit copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with

Section 01781.

C. Maintenance Material: (Spare Parts)

1. Provide one complete set of the manufacturer's recommended spare

parts.

2. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof

containers or wrappings, clearly labeled with part name and

manufacturer's part/stock number; submit, in writing, storage

procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate protection after

delivery.

3. Provide any special tools required for equipment maintenance;

provide a list of all equipment and tools needed to maintain and

calibrate equipment.


March 2018 15200-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 DIRECT DRIVE EXHAUST FANS

A. Panel Assembly:

1. One-piece aluminum construction.

2. Motor/Bearing plate support structure of aluminum.

3. Complete panel assembly of all welded construction.

4. Pre-punched mounting holes.

5. Adjustable slide base.

B. Propeller:

1. Aluminum.

2. Blades bolted to hub plate.

3. Statically and dynamically tested for balance.

C. Drives:

1. Direct drive.

D. Bearings:

1. Bearings designed for minimum 200,000-hour life.

2. Self-aligning pillow block ball bearings.

3. Bearings are double sealed, pre-lubricated with relube fittings.

E. Motors:

1. Permanently lubricated sealed ball bearing type.

2. Open drip-proof construction is standard.

3. Explosion proof for wet well application.

F. Automatic (Gravity) Shutter:

1. Open in direction of airflow only, close by gravity when fan is not in

operation.

G. Guards:

1. Provide OSHA approved guards where indicated on the Drawings.


March 2018 15200-4

H. Mounting Collar:

1. Provide wall collar to allow fan to be mounted flush with the exterior wall

with the housing extending into the interior of the building.

2.2 DUCTWORK

A. Metal Ductwork:

1. All aspects of metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and

components, shall comply with SMACNA-06 HVAC Duct Construction

Standards and the latest publication of the ASHRAE Equipment Handbook

unless otherwise specified. Elbows shall be radius type with a centerline

radius of 1-1/2 times the width or diameter of the duct where space permits.

Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of

the duct or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes may be used.

Static pressure Class 1/2, 1, and 2 inch w.g. ductwork shall meet the

requirements of Seal Class C. Class 3 through 10 inch shall meet the

requirements of Seal Class A. Sealant shall conform to fire hazard

classifications. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a sealant.

B. All ductwork in the Wet Well shall be schedule 80 PVC.

C. Plenums and Casings for Field-fabricated Units:

1. Plenums and casings shall be fabricated and erected as shown in

SMACNA-06, as applicable. Unless otherwise indicated, system casing

shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel.

D. Frames shall be removable type of stainless or extruded aluminum.

E. All back draft dampers shall be gravity type.

2.3 UNIT HEATERS

A. Horizontal fan forced electric unit heaters with adjustable discharge louvers,

finned electric heating coil. Single speed, resilient mounted, totally enclosed

motor with automatic reset thermal overload switch, and aluminum propeller fan.

Provide with wall mounted thermostat. 240 Volt, 3-Ph, 60 Hz, UL listed.


March 2018 15200-5

2.4 THERMOSTATS

A. Electrical heater thermostats shall be bimetal operated mercury switch on/off type

with an adjustable universal anticipation. Thermostats shall be suitable for use on

a 24-volt control circuit.

B. Ventilation thermostats shall be bimetal actuated open contact or bellows actuated

enclosed snap switch on/off type with an adjustable universal anticipation.

Thermostats shall be suitable for use on a 120 volt, single phase control circuit.

C. All thermostats shall have a rugged corrosion resistant cover.

2.5 LOUVERS

A. Stationary drainable type fabricated from aluminum extrusion of .081” nominal

thickness with integral caulking slot. Blades shall be positioned 37 and 45 degree

angles approximately 6” on centers. Each louver shall be equipped with a framed,

removable, rear mounted screen of 3/4” x 0.51” expanded, flattened aluminum

bird screen having 80% free area with concealed vertical mullions and blade

braces. Weather-stripped frame. Anodized and lacquered finish. Sizes as

indicated on Drawings.

B. Louver finish shall be anodized aluminum, color to match exterior door finish.

C. Provide gravity type back draft dampers.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the equipment as indicated on the Contract Drawings and in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide and connect accessories and power as required to ensure a complete

operable unit.

C. Install backer rod and caulk around exterior perimeter of louver between louver

frame and wall opening. Seal watertight. Caulking material and sealant color shall

match louver color.

3.02 MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Place the equipment into initial operation to demonstrate correct alignment,

smooth operation, freedom from noise, vibration, overheating, and all controls and

mechanical functions.


March 2018 15200-6

3.03 EQUIPMENT ACCEPTANCE

A. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace any components, which fail to perform as

specified and rerun the tests; make final adjustments to the equipment under the

direction of the manufacturer's representative and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15210-1

SECTION 15210 - DOMESTIC WATER AND WASTE PIPING

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube


ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings


AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Pipe and fittings

Valves

Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ) Backflow Preventer

Yard Hydrant

SD-07 Certificates

Submit each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings, pipe

coupling and adapters, hose bibbs, vacuum breakers and valves meet or exceed

specification requirements.


March 2018 15210-2

1.3 WATER CONNECTION

Contractor shall install water service connections as indicated on the drawings up to the

meter box.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and of the best quality of their

respective kinds, and shall conform to the requirements and ordinances of local and

insurance authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 EXTERIOR PIPE, FITTINGS, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES

Comply with local building code requirements. ASTM B88. Type "K" soft copper.

2.3 PIPE

ASTM B88. Hard temper Type "K". Provide dielectric fittings between steel and copper.

2.3.1 Fittings

ASME B16.18. Solder type wrought copper - 95 -5 solder.

2.3.2 Drain Waste and Vent Piping

ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 with fittings conforming to ASTM D2466.

2.4 GATE VALVES

Bronze solder end, solid wedge, rising stem, 300 lb. w.o.g. non-shock. However, use brass

valves only on all copper pipe.

2.5 UNIONS

Unions in copper pipe shall be seat fittings with bronze seats designed for a working pressure

of 125 psig.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

Threaded and solder joint check valves for use with copper water piping. Horizontal swing

check type. Bronze body, renewable bronze disc. 200 psi working pressure.


March 2018 15210-3

2.7 PIPE HANGERS

All hangers for metallic piping shall be adjustable, wrought clevis type, or adjustable

malleable split ring swivel type, having rods with machine threads. Hangers shall be

Grinnell Company's Figure 260 for pipe 3/4" and larger, and Figure 107R for pipe 1/2" and

smaller, or approved equal. Hangers for copper piping shall be copper clad. Hanger spacing

and rod sizes for steel and copper pipe shall not be less than the following:

Nominal Pipe Maximum Minimum Rod

Size in. Ft. Diameter in.

3/4 & 1 7 3/8

1-1/2 9 3/8

2 10 3/8

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

Provide chromium plated escutcheons properly fitted and secured with spring clamp on all

exposed piping which passes through walls, floors, or ceiling of finished spaces.

2.9 SLEEVES

Sleeves shall be provided around all pipes through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, structure

members or other building parts. Sleeves shall be PVC or standard weight galvanized iron

pipe two sizes larger than the pipe or insulation so that pipe or insulation shall pass through

masonry or concrete walls or floors, unless otherwise noted on the plans. Provide Schedule

80 PVC or 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet or galvanized pipe sleeves for all piping passing

through frame walls. Space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a waterproof

epoxy caulking compound. Escutcheon plates shall be constructed to conceal the ends of

sleeves. Sleeves through floors shall extend 3 inches above the floor. Each trade shall be

responsible for drilling existing floors and walls for necessary sleeve holes. Copper piping

passing through galvanized sleeves shall be insulated through sleeve length and 3 inches each

side.

2.10 REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE (RPZ) BACKFLOW PREVENTER

Model No 909QT as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company or approved equal. Provide

a Watts Air Gap Model No 909AG beneath the backflow preventer and drain to the building

floor drain plumbing or the exterior above grade. Drainage across the floor to floor drain

will not be accepted. Insulate RPZ as detailed on the drawings.

2.11 YARD HYDRANT

Provide yard hydrant assembly for review and approval by City.


March 2018 15210-4

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING

All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building, and shall be

worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all doors and other

openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping

installation will not be permitted. All pipes shall be so installed as to permit free expansion

and contraction without causing damage. All horizontal mains shall pitch down in the

direction of flow with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet. All open ends of pipe lines,

equipment, etc., shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or other

foreign material out of the system. All pipes shall be run parallel with the lines of the

building and as close to walls, columns, and ceilings as may be practical, with proper pitch.

All piping shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment on

devices not to block access to doors, windows, or other access openings. Flanges or unions,

as applicable for the type of piping specified, shall be provided in the piping at connections

to all items of equipment, coils, etc., and installed so that there will be no interference with

the installation of the equipment, ducts, etc. All valves and specialties shall be placed to

permit easy operation and access in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All

valves shall be regulated, packed and glands adjusted at the completion of the work before

final acceptance. All piping shall be installed so at to avoid air or liquid pockets throughout

the work.

3.1.1 Solder Joints

Ream or file pipe to remove burrs. Clean and polish contact surfaces of joints. Apply flux to

both male and female end; insert end of tube into fittings full depth of socket. Bring joint to

soldering temperature, in as short a time as possible, forming continuous solder bead around

entire circumference of joint.

3.1.2 Solvent Cemented Joints (PVC)

Make joints in pipe and fittings in accordance with the procedures and techniques in

ASTM D2855.

3.1.3 Flanged Joints

Tighten flange bolts so that the gasket is uniformly compressed and sealed; do not distort

flanges; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum torque. Leave flange bolts

with ends projecting 1/8" to 1/4" beyond the face of the nut after tightening.


March 2018 15210-5

3.1.4 Threaded Joints

ANSI B2.1, NPT. Cut threads full and clean with sharp dies; ream ends of pipe after

threading and before assembly to remove burrs; leave not more than three pipe threads

exposed at each connection; use joint compound or thread tape on the male thread only.

3.2 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, GUIDES

General: All hangers shall be of an approved type arranged to maintain the required grading

and pitching of lines to prevent vibration and to provide for expansion and contraction.

Provide saddles between hangers and insulation on insulated pipe. Provide approved spacers

between saddles and pipe where flexible insulation is specified. Regardless of spacing,

hangers shall be provided at or near all changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal, for

all piping.

3.2.1 Vertical Lines

Shall be supported at their bases, using either a suitable hanger placed in a horizontal line

near the riser, or a base type fitting set on a pedestal, foundation, or support.

3.2.2 Racks and Brackets

All horizontal piping on vertical walls shall be properly supported by suitable racks securely

anchored into the wall construction. Where not practical to obtain ceiling anchorage, all

piping near walls shall be supported by approved brackets securely anchored into the wall

construction.

3.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

Install backflow preventer where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Provide minimum 1 inch air gap between RPZ and drain piping.

Piping to drain to exterior above grade.

3.4 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND TESTING

All domestic water and waste piping shall be flushed clean with fresh water, disinfected and

tested in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 15210-6



March 2018 16010-1

SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical work covered by this Section is specified in all other

sections of Division 16, the drawings, schedules and by requirements of this Section.

B. Refer to the Contract and Division 16 sections for additional electrical requirements

including:

1. Summary of the work.

2. Project Coordination.

3. Definitions and Standards.

4. Submittals.

5. Schedules and Reports.

6. Temporary Facilities.

7. Products.

8. Testing and Final Acceptance.

9. Project Closeout.

C. The word provide, as used hereinafter, shall be defined to mean the furnishing of all

labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the work described.


A. Labels and Listings: Materials, appliances and equipment provided shall meet the

requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Electrical Testing

Laboratories (ETL) and other standards organizations.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): All work provided under this Contract

shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code", latest edition.

C. Current Models:

1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the

manufacturer. No more than 12 months old.

2. Replacement parts shall be available.

D. There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the

manufacturer to provide satisfactory service.

E. Experience: Manufactured items shall have been installed and used without

modifications, renovation, or repair, on other projects for not less than three (3) years


March 2018 16010-2

prior to the date of bid opening for this project.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA

A. Submit (5) five copies of complete shop drawings and engineering data on all

equipment and materials to be used in the work of this project shall be submitted for

the Owner's approval in accordance with the General Provisions. Shop drawings shall

be submitted 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

B. The submittals shall be properly identified and referenced as to the applicable

specification paragraph heading or drawing number which applies, and shall establish

that each item meets the requirements of the specifications with regard to dimension,

arrangement and other pertinent characteristics. Individual items within each

submittal shall be marked accordingly.

C. Submittal data shall be in the form of shop drawings for major and specially

constructed equipment and catalog or other engineering data on items normally

considered as stock items.

D. Submittals shall include complete wiring diagrams, performance curves, installation

instructions and all other applicable information necessary to the proper installation

of the equipment.

E. The shop drawings and submittal data will be reviewed only for conformance with

the project design concept and compliance with information in the Contract

Documents. The checking of dimensions and quantity of materials shall remain the

responsibility of the Contractor.

F. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any deviations from the requirements of the

contract or intent of the contract documents in accordance with the General

Provisions.

G. If variations and/or deviations are not marked on submittal, the Contractor will not be

relieved of responsibility for furnishing equipment and executing work in strict

accordance with Contract Documents, even though shop drawings have been

approved.

H. In checking shop drawings, the Owner will make every effort to detect and correct

errors, omissions and inaccuracies; the reviewer’s failure to detect errors, omissions

and inaccuracies shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper and

complete installation in accordance with intent Contract Documents.


March 2018 16010-3

I. As a minimum the following shall be submitted for approval:

1. Panelboards and Circuit Breakers,

2. Light Fixtures, Lenses, and Mounting Equipment,

3. Wiring Devices and Plates,

4. Safety Switches,

5. Pump Control Panel

6. Control and Monitoring Equipment

7. Manual Transfer Switches

8. RTU

9. Variable Frequency Drives

10. Programmable Logic Controller

11. Name Plates

12. Others as required by the respective specification section

J. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage: Materials stored at the project site, which become soiled with construction

dirt, concrete, paint, etc. shall be washed, cleaned and dried or removed from the

project site and replaced with new. Do not install soiled material.

B. Cleaning: Clean and wipe the interior of conduit, pullboxes, and panelboard

backboxes, soiled by masonry trades, before proceeding with wiring.

C. Do not install damaged, broken or marred material or products, replace with new,

unless otherwise approved by the Owner in writing.

1.5 LABELS AND NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum

or type 304 stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG, secured to the manufactured

item, with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non-erasable record of

equipment data.

B. Field Installation: Field-installed nameplates shall be as per Section 16195,

"Electrical Identification".

1.6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. The Contractor is responsible for all temporary facilities as required during

construction as set forth in Section 107 of the General Provisions.


March 2018 16010-4

1.7 SIZING

A. Capacity: Provide equipment and material of sizes, capacities, horsepowers, power

ratings and dimensions indicated on the drawings, in the schedules and as specified.

B. Fit and Clearance: Equipment and material of greater or larger power dimensions,

capacity and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved

in writing and feeders, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases and equipment spaces

are increased by the Contractor at no additional cost, to the contract cost.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate electrical work with that of other trades so that:

1. Interference between general construction, mechanical, electrical, structural

and other specialty trades is avoided.

2. Maintain clearances and advise other trades of clearance requirements for

operation, repair, removal, and testing of electrical equipment.

3. All electrical materials and equipment shall be kept as close as possible to

ceiling, walls, and columns to occupy the minimum amount of space.

4. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings, and similar items necessary to

accomplish the requirements of coordination, without additional expense.

5. Coordinate electrical requirements for equipment provided by Mechanical

Contractors to assure proper compatibility with equipment provided.

B. Other divisions of these specifications and drawings shall be carefully examined to

determine the requirements of the project as a whole and to determine

interconnecting points between the various trades. All such interconnections shall be

properly made and with due regard for correct arrangements suited to the equipment

or material concerned.

C. Provide power wiring and final power connections to equipment installed by other

trades, which requires electrical power. Other trades will supply power

characteristics and roughing-in data to ensure the proper power wiring of their

equipment.

D. Provide disconnect switches for equipment of other trades when required, and

specifically for motors, which are out of sight of their controllers, unless switches are

provided integrally mounted on the equipment.


March 2018 16010-5

E. All control wiring for other trades will be performed under another division of these

specifications unless otherwise noted. Control wiring shall be considered as that

wiring, low or high voltage, which is required for devices such as pushbuttons,

thermostats, valves, control switches for starters, interlocking of starters, and any

other wiring required by similar control devices and is not included in this division,

except as noted.

1.9 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

All work performed and all material installed under this Division shall conform to the latest

editions of BOCA including the latest edition of NFPA No. 70 (NEC) and other applicable

standards of the NFPA and all laws, ordinances and all governing authorities. The

Contractor shall procure and pay for all licenses, permits, fees, etc., necessary to install and

complete the work.

1.10 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to

installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received.

Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish quality standards for all material

and equipment incorporated in the work of this division. All materials and

equipment installed hereunder shall be new and shall be the best of each respective

kind and type. Proper care shall be exercised in handling all materials and equipment

herein specified so as not to injure or mar finished surfaces and to insure that the

work is acceptable in every respect upon completion.

B. The installation shall be as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner. The installation shall be

accomplished by workmen skilled in their respective trades.

C. No products shall contain asbestos or other hazardous substances.

D. As far as practicable, use a common manufacturer for similar products. These

products are to be selected to maximize component interchange ability.

E. Provide all necessary accessories and appurtenances required for a complete

installation even if not called out specifically on the drawings or indicated herein.


March 2018 16010-6

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INTENT OF DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic, intending to show general runs and locations of

equipment and specialties, and not necessarily showing all required offsets, etc.

Carefully study the various runs of conduit and make such adjustments in exact

routing as may be necessary to fit conduits into space available and to avoid conflict

with other trades.

B. Arrange equipment substantially as shown on the Drawings. Make deviations only

where necessary to avoid interference. Check equipment size against available space

prior to shipment to avoid interference.

3.2 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Damage and Touch-Up: Repair all marred or damaged factory painted finishes with

materials and procedures to match original factory finish and as specified in Section 09910.

3.3 WIRING FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENT

Provide all wiring, outlets, and connections for connecting all equipment. All outlets and

connections shall be verified and coordinated with equipment manufacturer's roughing-in

drawings before installation and all adjustments shall be made to satisfy the manufacturer's

requirements. All equipment shall be connected and ready for use.

3.4 MOTOR, EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS CONNECTIONS

A. Provide all necessary electric power connections and disconnect switches as required

for all equipment requiring such connections. This Contractor shall coordinate his

work with roughing-in drawings provided by manufacturer or Party furnishing

equipment.

B. All motors shall conform to the latest applicable NEMA standards for type, size, and

duty, as specifically applied. All motors shall be suitable for operation on 60 cycle

a.c. and with voltage and other characteristics as specified in other Divisions of these

Specifications.

C. Motor controller furnished shall conform to the latest applicable NEMA standards for

type, size, and duty as specifically applied. Magnetic controllers shall provide

thermal overload protection in each line not to exceed 125 percent of the motor full

load current rating and shall be provided with a manual reset type pushbutton on

outside of housing. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with 115 volt holding coils,

control transformers having 115 volt fused secondaries and necessary number of

auxiliary contacts.


March 2018 16010-7

D. Magnetic controllers shall provide under voltage protection when used with

momentary contact control devices and under voltage released when used with

maintained-contact control devices. Manual type controllers shall provide thermal

overload protection not to exceed values listed above, plus the actual current drawn

by auxiliary controls and shall be approved for group fusing when more than one

motor is served by the same branch circuit.

E. Provide disconnect switches as required conforming to the latest applicable NEMA

standards for Type HD safety switches enclosed in NEMA Type 1 or 3R enclosures

or as indicated and as required. Where fusible switches are required, they shall be

equipped with dual element fuses. Any motor out of sight of its controller and any

controller out of sight of its branch circuit breaker shall be provided with

disconnecting switch in accordance with Article 430 of NEC.

F. Install control and alarm wiring for all equipment, mechanical and electrical, in

accordance with Division 16 Specification Sections. Before installing control

circuits, ensure that controls and wiring diagrams are in accordance with those

furnished with the equipment. Make any changes required due to different

equipment, more up-to-date controls or safety devices, so that the equipment operates

as required. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 volts unless indicated otherwise on

the Drawings.

G. When equipment is supplied with electrical requirements other than those specified

or shown on the Drawings, associated electrical devices and circuitry of the correct

sizes and ratings shall be provided.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting: Provide cutting, channeling, chasing, and drilling of floors, walls, partitions,

ceilings and other surfaces necessary for installation of electrical work. All cutting

shall be performed by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

B. Patching: Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.6 CLOSING OF OPENINGS

A. Firestopping: Unused slots, sleeves and other penetrations in floors, walls or other

general construction shall be closed and sealed with an approved firestopping

material per UL 1479.

B. Conduit: The annulus between exposed conduit and walls or floors in finished

spaces shall be filled, sealed, and painted to match adjacent surfaces.

C. Future Slots: Identify unused sleeves and slots for future use by permanently

anchored brass nameplates identifying size and purpose of the covered slot.


March 2018 16010-8

3.7 SYSTEM TEST

A. Prior to final site visitation, field testing and acceptance testing, the Contractor shall

conduct an operating test of the complete electrical system. System shall test free

from grounds, shorts and other faults. All connections as possible shall be

thoroughly checked for positive mechanical and electrical connection and continuity.

All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements

set forth in these specifications and shown on the drawings.

B. Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner or his duly authorized representative.

The Contractor shall furnish all personnel and test instruments for use in the test.

3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of the operation and

maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment 30 days prior to project closeout for

approval. After approval from the Owner, the Contractor shall deliver five corrected

copies bound in a loose leaf binder to the owner in accordance with Section 01781.

In addition to the requirements of Section 01781, the binder shall be labeled and

indexed as follows:

B. The material included in the operation and maintenance manual tabs shall have

included:

1. Approved shop drawings with model numbers including:

a. Light fixtures

b. Receptacles

c. Switches

d. Panelboards

e. Variable Frequency Drives

f. Programmable Logic Controller

g. Disconnect Switches

h. Motor Starters

i. Wires and cables

j. Conduit, raceways, and pathways

k. All Test Reports

l. All warranty information

C. Separate operation and maintenance manuals including shop drawings and diagrams

to be included shall be as follows:

1. Pump Control Panel


March 2018 16010-9

3.9 RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILTS)

A. The Contractor shall maintain and deliver Record Drawings in accordance with the

requirements of the General Provisions.

B. The Contractor shall maintain at the job site one set of blue line or black line prints of

the drawings approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall record thereon all changes

in the location, sizing, and arrangement that may be made for any reason in the work

during the course of construction including Addenda and Change Orders work so as

to reflect the installation “as-built”. Upon completion of the project, “as-built”

drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner in accordance with the

requirements of the General Provisions.

3.10 FINAL SITE VISITATION

When the work on the entire project has been completed and is ready for final review, a visit

will be made by the Owner or his duly authorized representative, at which time the

Contractor shall demonstrate that the requirements of the Contract have been carried out and

that the system has been adjusted and operates in accordance therewith.

3.11 GUARANTEE

Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work in accordance with the General Provisions

and as may be further specified herein.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16010-10



March 2018 16020-1

SECTION 16020 - UTILITY SERVICE AND SERVICE ENTRANCE

1. GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work required under this heading covers the equipment necessary to provide

power for all loads for a complete working installation.

1.2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Electrical service shall be as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. All service work shall be coordinated with the local Power Company and National

Electrical Code.

C. Electrical service shall be 120/240V, hi-leg delta, three phase, 4-wire.

D. Verify complete electrical service installation with Power Company before start

up.

E. If required, the Contractor shall coordinate with Dominion Energy regarding the

location of the pad mounted transformer and prefabricated bases. The Contractor

shall provide finish grade for power company work.

F. Make application with electrical utility company for electric service in a manner

to permit utility company to provide service prior to completion of work under

this contract.

G. Complete and file all forms required by the electric utility company in connection

with application for electric service. Pay for all required licenses, permits, fees,

etc. necessary to obtain electric service. Power Company charges required to

perform work to provide service to the facility will be paid directly by the Owner

and will not be part of this contract.

H. Provide underground raceways and conductors from utility company transformer

to main service equipment.

I. Install sealable meter compartment furnished by Dominion Energy.

J. Furnish and install interconnecting raceway between metering transformers and

revenue meter. Install all equipment in conformity with utility company’s

requirements.


March 2018 16020-2

2. PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

3. EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16035-1

SECTION 16035 - ELECTRICAL TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall perform electrical testing in the presence of the Owner prior to

Initial Field Testing and Final Acceptance Testing.

B. Provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to perform and

complete the electrical acceptance test in accordance with the requirements of this

Section for equipment furnished by the Contractor. Notify Owner at least seven days

in advance of tests.

C. Perform tests on the following equipment:

1. Grounding.

2. Power cables, 600 volts and lower.

3. Rotating equipment.

4. Panelboards

5. Motor Control Center

6. As required by other specification sections

D. Perform electrical testing as required by other Divisions 16 specifications for

specific equipment including:

1. Section 11330 – Non-Clog Submersible Centrifugal Pumps and Drives

2. Section 16120 – Wire and Cables

3. Section 16135 – Wiring Devices

4. Section 16410 – Pump Control Panel

5. Section 16450 – Grounding

6. Section 16470 – Panelboards

7. Section 16842 – Motor Starters

8. Section 16690 – Variable Frequency Drives

9. Section 16900 – Remote Terminal Unit

10. Section 16920 – Programmable Logic Controller


March 2018 16035-2


A. Final acceptance will depend upon successful completion of specified testing.

B. Perform all tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Should

manufacturer's recommendations conflict with these specifications, notify Owner. Do

not proceed with tests until directed by the Owner.

C. Material or equipment failing tests shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's

expense.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all test and test records. Testing shall be

performed by or under the immediate supervision of the Contractor, and in the

presence of the Owner or Owner’s representative.

E. Inspect the equipment prior to energizing.

F. The Contractor shall coordinate with certified manufacturer’s representatives for

those items specified as requiring representation during start up and testing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following:

A. Electrical Testing Reports

Results of testing shall be fully documented including dates of testing, equipment

utilized, person performing tests, tests made, comparative acceptable test results and

reference standards, actual test results, corrections made and results of retesting for

each piece of equipment or component tested. Submit test results neatly bound and

organized in three ring binders with divider pages separating each set of tests, a

complete table of contents, and listing of testing equipment including calibration

certifications.

B. Certificates

The contractor shall provide a written certification that the electrical testing was

completed successfully, all deficiencies corrected, and initially deficient equipment

and or components were retested successfully.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with one copy of the building regulation

certificate of inspections, including any failing inspections.


March 2018 16035-3

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 TESTING DEVICES

The Contractor shall employ all testing devices and personnel trained in their use, required

for testing as specified herein.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Measure and record voltages, at all service equipment, manual transfer switch,

panelboards motor control panel.

B. Each power and convenience outlet shall be subjected to tests for polarity, open

wiring, and continuous ground.

3.2 GROUND SYSTEM TESTING

Upon completion of installation of the electrical grounding and bonding systems, test the

existing ground resistance with a ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-

ground is over 10 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce the resistance to 10 ohms, or less,

by driving additional ground rods. Then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.3 CABLE CONTINUITY AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION

Check cable continuity and phase identification.

3.4 FEEDER INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

A. All current carrying phase conductors and neutrals shall be tested as installed, and

before connections are made, for insulation resistance and accidental grounds. This

shall be done with a 500 volt megger. The procedures listed below shall be followed:

B. Minimum readings shall be one million (1,000,000) or more ohms between

conductors and between conductor and the grounding conductor.

C. After all fixtures, devices and equipment are installed and all connections are

installed and all connections completed to each panel, the contractor shall disconnect

the neutral feeder conductor from the neutral bar and take a megger reading between

the neutral bar and the grounded enclosure. If this reading is less than 250,000 ohms,

the Contractor shall disconnect the branch circuit neutral wires from this neutral bar.

The Contractor shall then test each one separately to the panel until the low readings

are found. The Contractor shall correct troubles, reconnect, and retest until at least


March 2018 16035-4

250,000 ohms from the neutral bar the grounded panel can be achieved with only the

neutral feeder disconnected.

D. The Contractor shall send a letter to the Owner certifying that the above has been

done and tabulating the megger readings for each panel. This shall be submitted at

least four (4) days prior to final inspection.

E. At final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish a megger and show the Owner that

the panels comply with the above requirements. He shall also furnish a hook-on type

ammeter and voltage readings as directed by the representatives.

3.5 DOCUMENTATION

A. All tests specified shall be completely documented indicating time of day, date,

temperature and all pertinent test information.

B. All required documentation of readings indicated above shall be submitted to the

Owner prior to, and as one of the pre-requisites for, Initial Field Testing and Final

Acceptance Testing.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16110-1

SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of raceway work is indicated on the drawings, by the requirements of

this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of raceways in this Section include the following:

1. Flexible steel conduit.

2. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit

3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

4. Rigid metal conduit.

5. Wireway.

6. Plastic / PVC


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for application, size, location, and installation of each type of

raceway used.

B. Provide products specified in conformance with the indicated standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each type of raceway. Submit shop drawings 30-

days after date of notice to proceed.

1.4 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

Raceway in designated hazardous or explosion proof locations shall conform to NFPA 70

requirements for installation.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Each length of conduit shall bear the manufacturer’s stamp and UL label.


March 2018 16110-2

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid conduit shall be mild steel piping, hot-dipped, zinc-coated or sherardized, and

of sufficient weight and toughness to withstand cracking and peeling during bending.

Each piece of rigid conduit to be straight, free from blisters and defects, cut square

and taper reamed, finished in 10’ lengths and threaded at each end. Couplings shall

be supplied at one end and a protective sleeve for the other end. All threads to be

clearly cut. Each length to bear UL label.

B. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall have a permanent plastic coating factory applied

to a minimum thickness of 40 mils and a urethane internal coating. PVC coated shall

be Plasti-Bond Red as manufactured by Robroy Industries or approved equal.

C. Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized, continuous spiral, single strip type and

shall be used in accordance with NEC Article 350. In areas subject to moisture, or

where indicated, liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in accordance with NEC

Article 351. Fittings shall be standard UL approved with ground connector.

Watertight connectors shall be used with liquid tight flexible conduit.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND RACEWAYS

A. Electrical plastic conduit, PVC Type, shall conform to NEMA TC 2, “Conduit (EPC-

40 and EPC-80)”.

B. Provide in conformance with ANSI 870, “Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and

Associated Fittings”.

2.4 METAL AND PLASTIC CONDUIT AND RACEWAY FITTINGS

A. Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes shall conform to UL 514B, “Fittings for Conduit

and Outlet Boxes”.

B. PVC fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit and tubing shall conform to NEMA TC

3, “PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing”.

C. Nonmetallic conduits and raceways.

D. Raceway seals.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 MINIMUM SIZE

Size conduit and raceway in accordance with NFPA 70 unless otherwise specified or shown

on the drawings. Minimum size 3/4-inch for interior work and 1-inch for exterior work.


March 2018 16110-3

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR

Raceways sizes shall be adequate to include the circuit conductors, an equipment ground

conductor, and a neutral conductor in accordance with percentage of fill requirements by

NFPA 70. Size all conduits supplying motors and associated control equipment to include

grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70 whether or not shown on the drawings or specified.

3.3 CONDUIT

A. All exterior conduit shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.

B. All exterior conduit installed below grade shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

C. All conduit installed in the wet well shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

D. All conduit in slab, transitions, through slab, and penetrations through walls and

floors shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

E. All interior conduit shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

F. Conduit for power and control circuits shall be color coded. Conduit for power

circuits shall be red; conduits for control circuits shall be orange

3.4 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Sizes 1-1/4-inch and smaller, provide with continuous copper bonding conductor

wound spirally between convolutions.

B. Sizes 1-1/2-inch and larger, provide with an internal grounding conductor and

grounding bushings.

C. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduits for connections to motors and other

electrical equipment when it is subject to movement, vibration, misalignment,

cramped quarters, or where noise transmission is to be eliminated or reduced.

3.5 WIREWAYS, AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. May be used to facilitate installation and future changes in wiring between

panelboards, safety switches in close proximity to each other on same or adjacent

walls or in same electrical equipment room or area.

B. Provide weatherproof enclosure where outdoors or subject to moisture and similar

elements.


March 2018 16110-4

C. Use where shown on drawings or specified.

D. Shall be completely accessible.

3.6 RACEWAY FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS

A. Use fittings listed and approved for specific conduit or raceway system used.

B. For threaded rigid steel conduit do not use threadless or compression type fittings.

C. Bushing and connector shall be insulated type, which maintain continuity of conduit

grounding system. Insulating material shall be molded or locked into metallic body of

the fitting. Bushing made entirely of nonmetallic material will not be allowed.

Where concentric, eccentric or over- sized knockouts are encountered, a grounding-

type insulated bushing shall be provided.

D. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a

steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Fitting shall

be steel or malleable iron with insulated throat, with male thread and locknut or male

bushing with or without "O" ring seal.

E. Provide expansion fittings for all rigidly fastened conduits spanning a building

expansion joint and if not otherwise provided, for all runs 1-1/2-inch or larger,

exceeding 150 feet in length. Fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron

with a packing ring to prevent entrance of water, a pressure ring, a grounding ring,

and a separate external copper bonding jumper.

F. Inferior material such as "pot metal" shall not be used for any type of fitting.

G. All locknuts shall be the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal

wall of an enclosure.

H. The use of "LB's" shall be limited where possible. Where necessary to use "LB's"

sized above 2-inch, mogul units shall be installed.


March 2018 16110-5

3.7 GENERAL

A. Run conduits exposed. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of not more than 8'.

Run exposed conduit parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or

intersections of vertical planes and ceiling. Changes in direction of runs shall be

made with symmetrical bends or fittings to match conduit type. Avoid field made

bends and offsets where possible, but where necessary they shall be made with an

approved hickey or conduit bending machine. No bend shall have less than 3-1/2"

radius. No bend shall be more than 90 degrees. There shall not be more than four

right angle bends or the equivalent in one run. Conduit shall have clean, sharp

threads carefully reamed ends and tight joints. Crushed or deformed conduits shall

not be installed. Avoid trapped conduits where possible. Take care to prevent the

lodgment of dirt or trash in conduit, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course

of construction. Clogged conduits shall be entirely cleared of obstructions or shall be

replaced. Fasten conduit to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts

where required by NEC, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings

cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise a single locknut and

bushing are acceptable.

B. Support conduits by pipe straps, wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze,

fastened by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and bolts and expansion shields on

concrete or brick. Unless otherwise indicated, nail type nylon anchors provided with

lock washers and nuts or threaded steel studs driven in by powder charge and

provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields or

machine screws. Wires twisted around structural members as a support for conduits

will not be acceptable. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete on masonry are not

acceptable as a base for conduit fastening, nor shall conduit or pipe straps be welded

to steel structures.

C. All floor penetrations through floor slabs for the transition from one floor to the

next shall be provided with PVC sleeves.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways at all

outlet, junction, and pull boxes, remove burrs and obstructions.

B. Run a swab or mandrel to remove dirt and blockages. Raceways, which are

deformed and prevent the passage of a mandrel, shall be replaced.

C. Remove dirt and construction debris from outlet, junction, and pull boxes.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16110-6



March 2018 16120-1

SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLES

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated on the drawings and

schedules, by the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic

Requirements" and Section 16035, “Electrical Testing and Placing in Service”.

B. Types: Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this Section

include the following:

1. Copper conductors.

2. Tap type connectors.

3. Split-bolt connectors.

4. Wire nut connectors.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Comply with requirements of

the following:

1. B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

2. B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,

Hard, MediumHard, or Soft

B. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL): Provide wiring, cabling, and connector

products, which are ETL, listed and labeled.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Comply with the following

standards, which apply to wiring systems:

1. 82 Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors

2. 241 Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings

D. NFPA: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for construction, installation, and color

coding of electrical wire, cable, and connections.

E. UL: Provide material conforming to the following standards:

1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors

4. 854 Service-Entrance Cables


March 2018 16120-2

F. UL Labels: Provide wiring, cabling, and connector products, which are UL, listed

and labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wire, cables, conductors, connectors, and

connector crimping tools. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.


A. Delivery: Deliver wire and cable packaged in factory-sealed containers, or wound on

NEMA wire and cable reels.

B. Storage: Store wire and cable in a clean dry space in original containers. Protect

products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handling: Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing

wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that resistance integrity of

wires/cables is maintained.




2. PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER WIRE

A. Conductors:

1. Provide wire rated 600 V minimum of the single conductor annealed copper,

900 C, type THHN/THWN.

2. Conductors shall be Class B stranded.

3. Control wiring shall have stranded conductors.

4. The minimum conductor size for all power and lighting circuits shall be #12

AWG.

5. The maximum conductor size allowed shall be #500 kcmil.

6. Control wiring shall be #16 AWG minimum, type MTW.

B. Insulation:

1. The insulation for the wiring from the VFD to the motor shall be type XLP-E.


March 2018 16120-3

2.2 CABLE

Provide UL listed cables of sizes, ampacity, temperature ratings, and insulating materials

indicated on the drawings or in other sections of this specification.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. General: Provide UL listed metal connectors of sizes, ampacity, temperature ratings,

materials, and classes required by NFPA 70 and NEMA standards for applications

and services indicated.

B. Branch Circuits: For wires No. 10 AWG and smaller, provide solderless, insulated

pressure cable type connectors, 600 V, of the compression or indent type or wire nut

connectors. Temperature rating of connectors shall be at least equal to that of the

wire on which they are used.

C. Copper Conductors: For No. 8 AWG and larger wire, provide socket head cap, hex

screw, or bolt clamp type connectors, manufactured of high conductivity copper alloy

or bronze castings. Select proper connector for each wire size. Cable sizes 250

kcmil and larger shall be retained in the connector by twin clamping elements.

2.4 INSULATING TAPE, PUTTY, RESIN AND SUPPORTS

A. Tape:

Provide plastic electrical insulating tape, which is flame retardant, cold, and weather

resistant. Tape for use in areas subject to temperatures 30 degrees C. to 105 degrees

C., or where the tape will be subjected to an oil splash, shall have a minimum

thickness of 8.5 mils, and shall consist of an oil-resistant vinyl backing with an oil-

resistant acrylic adhesive.

B. Materials:

1. Provide all insulating materials for splices and connections such as glass and

synthetic tapes, putties, resins, splice cases, or compositions of the type

approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature, and apply

and install in an approved manner, all in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

2. Supports: Provide cable supports of the wedge type, which firmly clamp each

individual cable and tighten due to the cable weight.

2.5 PROHIBITED PRODUCTS

The use of non-metallic sheathed cable Types NM to NMC, Metal Clad Cable (MC),

armored bushed cable (BX) and armor-clad cable (AC) is prohibited.


March 2018 16120-4

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical wires, cables and wiring connectors in compliance with

applicable requirements of NFPA 70, NEMA, UL, and National Electrical

Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation".

B. Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, install all wiring in rigid metal conduit, flexible

metal conduit, and non-metallic conduit as indicated on the drawings or in the

specifications, in conformance with NFPA 70.

C. Complete System: Provide wire, cables, and connectors necessary for a complete

installation from point of service connection to all receptacles, lighting fixtures,

devices, utilization equipment, and outlets for future extensions as indicated on the

drawings, in schedules, and in the specification. Provide ample slack wire for

connections.

D. Voltage Rating: Wire and cables for general wiring shall be rated for 600 volts

minimum.

E. Minimum Size: Minimum branch circuit conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG.

Where the length of a branch circuit homerun exceeds 50 feet for a 120 V circuit, or

125 feet for 277 V, the conductor size shall be No. 10 AWG.

F. Shelf Life: Wire and Cable manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of

delivery to the site shall not be used.

G. Bundling: Neatly train all conductors located in branch circuit panelboards, signal

cabinets, signal control boards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

H. Feeder Identification: Securely fasten nonferrous identifying tags or pressure

sensitive labels to all cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes,

manholes, switchboard rooms and at termination of cables.

I. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on drawings

or marked so that feeder or cable may be readily identified.

J. If suspended type tags are provided, they shall be attached by approximately 55

pound test monofilament line or slip free plastic cable lacing units.


March 2018 16120-5

3.2 WIRE PULLING AND CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Raceways: Refer to Section 16110, "Raceways", for the preparation of raceways for

wire and cables.

B. Equipment: Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting and abrasion

of conduits during the pulling of wires and cables.

C. Ropes used for pulling of conductors shall be made of polyethylene or other suitable

nonmetallic material.

D. Metallic ropes shall not be used.

E. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same

raceway.

F. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound shall not deteriorate

conductor or insulation. Where polyethylene insulation is used and a pulling

lubricant is required, the lubricant shall be certified by the manufacturer to be non-

injurious to such insulation.

G. Lubricants shall conform to UL requirements applicable.

H. Pulling lines shall be attached to conductor cables by means of either woven basket

grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. Rope hitches shall not be

used.

I. Supports: Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the

applicable sections of the NFPA 70.

J. Splices: Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splice wires and cables only in

outlet boxes, junction boxes, pullboxes, manholes, and handholes.

K. In the making of a splice, connectors shall be brought up securely upon the

conductors such that all conductors are equally engaged, the insulation is not

ruptured, no bare wires are exposed or have "backed off" due to the application of

pressure, and the connection will not loosen due to cycling or vibration, in order to

insure an efficient splice.

L. The number, size, and combinations of conductors permitted as listed on

manufacturer's packaging of connector shall be strictly followed.

M. Connectors shall be fully insulated by a skirt, or taped to provide an insulation value

at least equal to rating of wires being connected.

N. Connectors: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,

in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or comply with

tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B.


March 2018 16120-6

O. Color Coding: Color code all secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit

conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:

120/240 Volts Phase

Black A

Red B

Blue C

White Neutral

Green Ground

P. The colors shall be factory-applied entire length of the conductors by one of the

following methods except as noted and limited below:

1. Solid color compound.

2. Solid color coating.

3. Surface printing every 12 inches, maximum spacing of 18 inches.

Q. All branch circuit conductors Nos. 12 AWG and 10 AWG shall be solid color

compound or solid color coating.

R. All sizes of conductors used for neutrals and equipment grounds shall be solid

compound or solid color coating white, gray, or green, respectively.

S. All phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger color coded with pressure sensitive tape

shall have a background color other than white or green.

T. Color pressure-sensitive plastic tape shall be applied in half overlapping turns for a

distance of six inches on all terminal points and in all boxes in which splices or taps

are made. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent

possible unwinding.

U. Tape shall be 3/4-inch wide and colors shall be as specified.

V. Cable identification markings shall not be obliterated by taping and tape locations

may be adjusted slightly to prevent obliteration of cable marking.

W. Power and control wiring shall be run in separate conduits. AC and DC control

circuits shall be run in separate conduits.


March 2018 16120-7


A. Tests: Feeders and branch circuit insulation shall be tested after installation, and

before connection to fixtures and appliances.

1. Tests shall be performed with a 600-volt megger, and conductors shall test

free from short-circuits and grounds.

2. Conductors shall be tested phase-to-phase and phase-to ground.

3. Furnish the instruments, materials, and labor required. Perform the tests in

the presence of the Owner.

4. Test readings shall be recorded and delivered to the Owner.

B. Demonstration: Subsequent to wire and cable hookups, energize circuit and

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct

malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16120-8



March 2018 16130-1

SECTION 16130 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: This section covers electrical box and electrical fitting work for power,

lighting, signal, communication, protection, and auxiliary systems.

B. Types: Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this Section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes.

2. Junction boxes.

3. Pull boxes.

4. Splice Boxes.

5. Conduit bodies.

6. Bushings.

7. Locknuts.

8. Knockout closures.


A. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA): Conform to NEMA OS 1

"Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports", for sheet-steel

outlet boxes, device boxes cover, and box supports. Conform to NEMA FB 1,

"Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies";

for fittings, cast metal boxes and conduit bodies.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and

fittings.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are

UL-listed and labeled, and conform to UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes", UL 514A,

"Metallic Outlet Boxes", UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes", and UL

514C, "Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings. Submit shop

drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.


March 2018 16130-2




2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Product Selection: Select boxes of types appropriate for each use and location.

1. Select covers for boxes of types appropriate for each use and location.

2. All switch plates and receptacle covers shall match the box that the plate

or cover are to be installed on.

3. Provide gaskets for covers of boxes in damp locations or where immersion

may occur.

2.2 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide PVC/Fiberglass enclosures, NEMA 12, outlet boxes.

1. Masonry Walls: 4-inch tall x 2 1/8 – inch wide x 2 ½ - inch deep

2. General use: 4 – inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep

3. Hung devices: 4 – inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep rated for the load

supported.

4. Two or More Ganged devices: 4 – inch tall x 2 ½ - inch deep by width as

required.

5. Exposed: 4 inch square by 2 1/8 – inch deep square.

B. Provide boxes of increased depth where required by the project. Coordinate spacing

of outlet boxes in fire rated walls.

C. Construction with stamped knockouts in the back and sides.

D. Provide threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers

and wiring devices. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories

as required for each installation, including covers, mounting brackets, hangers,

extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet

boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements

of individual wiring situations. Interior accessories may be galvanized.


March 2018 16130-3

E. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant PVC/Fiberglass

weatherproof outlet boxes, of types, shapes, and sizes, including depth of boxes, with

threaded conduit ends.

F. Interior Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide PVC/Fiberglass junction and pull boxes,

NEMA 12, with screw-on covers and of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit each

respective location and installation.

1. Conform to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and to UL 50 for boxes

over 100 cubic inches volume, except as modified below.

2. Where necessary for boxes to provide a rigid assembly, provide integral

structural bracing.

G. Junction and Pull Boxes, Below Grade: Provide junction and pull boxes, NEMA

6/3R, with screw-on covers and of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit each respective

location and installation.

H. Conduit Bodies: Interior conduit bodies shall be PVC/Fiberglass construction.

Exterior conduit bodies shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.

I. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide knockout closures, conduit

locknuts, conduit bushings, and offset connectors of types and sizes to suit respective

uses and installation.

J. All hardware to be corrosion-resistant. Interior hardware may be galvanized. All

exterior hardware shall be stainless steel.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS, GENERAL

A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with

wire/cable and raceway installation work, and with the work of other trades.

B. Knockout Caps: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where

blanks have been removed.

C. Anchoring: Support and fasten boxes securely.

D. Sizes: Provide boxes of sizes adequate to meet NFPA 70 volume requirements, but

in no case smaller than sizes indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES

A. Coordination: Verify location of outlet boxes with other equipment.


March 2018 16130-4

B. Grounding: Provide each box to which a device is to be attached with a grounding

terminal, consisting of either a green-colored washer-in-head machine screw, not

smaller than No. 10-32, screwed into a tapped hole or a grounding bushing attached

to one of the conduits.

C. Mounting Height: The "mounting height" of a wall-mounted outlet box is defined as

the height from the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the cover plate for

receptacles and top of the outlet box for switches.

D. Where mounting heights are not indicated or where heights and locations interfere

with mechanical, architectural or structural features, install outlet boxes in an

approved location, without additional cost.

E. Where mounting heights for switches mounted in masonry walls shall be 46 inches or

top of coursing not to exceed 48 inches. Do not mount outlet box in the mortar joint.

F. Vertical Axis: Except as otherwise indicated, mount outlet boxes for switches with

the long axis vertical.

1. Mount boxes for receptacles vertically.

2. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal.

I. Prohibited Work:

1. Do not use sectional (gangable) boxes.

2. Do not use device plates as covers for boxes in exposed locations.

3. Do not use round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box,

which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with

locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

K. Protection: Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of debris. Thoroughly clean

foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.

L. Threaded Hubs: At the following locations use threaded hub type boxes with

gasketed weatherproof covers:

1. Exterior locations.

2. Where installed on unfinished walls. Cover gaskets may be omitted in dry

locations.

3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.

3.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Installation: For installation of junction and pull boxes, conform to NFPA 70 and the

following:


March 2018 16130-5

1. For boxes exposed to rain or installed in wet locations use weatherproof type.

2. Do not exceed 6 conductors entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box.

B. Number of conductors in any pull or junction box including equipment grounding

conductors shall not exceed the maximum allowed by NEC 314.

C. Supports: Provide in each box, sufficient clamps, grids, or devices to which cables

are secured in neat and orderly fashion permitting ready identification.

D. Adjacent Boxes: Locate adjacent boxes a minimum of 2 feet from any other pull or

junction box.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16130-6



March 2018 16135-1

SECTION 16135 - WIRING DEVICES

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of wiring device work is indicated on drawings and schedules, by

requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of electrical wiring devices specified in this Section include the

following:

1. Receptacles.

2. Ground-fault circuit interrupters.

3. Switches.

4. Wallplates.

5. Plugs and connectors.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other sections of Division 16 for the following:

1. Wire and Cables.

2 Boxes.


Codes: Provide wiring devices conforming to the following:

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Provide plugs and receptacle devices

constructed in accordance with ANSI C73, "Attachment Plugs and Receptacles,

Dimensions of".

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Construct and install wiring

devices in accordance with requirements of IEEE 241, "Recommended Practice for

Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings".

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide wiring devices

constructed and configured in accordance with the requirements of:

1. WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

2. WD 2 Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps.

3. WD 6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring

devices.


March 2018 16135-2

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide wiring devices, which are UL

listed, and comply with the requirements of:

1. 20 General- Use Snap Switches.

2. 49 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.

3. 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes.

4. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.

5. 514C Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

6. 943 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. Submit shop drawings 30-days

after date of notice to proceed.


A. Delivery and Handling: Handle wiring devices carefully to prevent damage. Do not

install damaged wiring devices, replace with new.

B. Storage: Store wiring devices in a clean and dry place. Protect from dirt,

construction debris, and physical damage.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING DEVICES

Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for

applications indicated and which comply with NEMA WD 1.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide specification grade duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire a

grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and

poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20 A, 125 V, with metal plaster ears,

design for side wiring with four captively held binding screws and provisions for

back wiring from eight separate metal wiring clamps, with spring loaded, screw

activated pressure plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

Self-grounding or automatic type grounding receptacles are not acceptable in lieu of

receptacles with separate grounding screw lugs and a direct, green insulated

conductor connection to the equipment grounding system.


March 2018 16135-3

B. Single Receptacles: Provide specification grade single receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire,

grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20 A, 125 V, with metal

plaster ears, design for side and back wiring with spring loaded, screw activated

pressure plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ground Fault Interrupter: Provide termination type ground fault circuit interrupters,

with duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected receptacles on single circuit,

and installed in an outlet box without adaptor. Provide grounding type UL rated

Class A, Group 1, rated 20 A, 125 V, 60 Hz; solid-state ground fault sensing and

signaling with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level, equip with NEMA

configuration 5-20R.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof

PVC cover plate and shall be listed as "raintight while in use".

2.3 SWITCHES

A. General: Provide specification grade switches with green hexagonal equipment

ground screw, as indicated on the drawings conforming to NEMA WD 1 and to the

following:

B. Snap Switches: Provide specification grade, general duty flush single pole toggle AC

quiet switches, 20 A, 120-277 V, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism,

equip with plaster ears, switch handle and back or side-wired screw terminals.

Provide captive or terminal type terminal screws not smaller than No. 8. Provide

back-wired devices with separate access holes for wiring.

2.4 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wallplates: Provide wall plate for each switch, receptacle, and special purpose

outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi-gang outlet plates for multi-

gang boxes. Wall plates shall be in accordance with UL 514A, UL 514B, UL 514C,

and as follows unless otherwise noted.

B. Cover plates for flush mounted wiring devices shall be stainless steel, standard size,

single or ganged as shown on the drawings. Cover plate mounting screws shall be

slotted head oval screws and shall match the finish and material of the plate, and shall

be furnished with the plate by the plate manufacturer.

C. Switch and receptacle cover plates on exposed work shall be galvanized cast ferrous

metal or Feraloy, standard size, and shall be single or ganged as indicated on the

drawings.


March 2018 16135-4

D. Exterior mounted switch and receptacle plates, and those noted to be weatherproof,

shall be gasketed weatherproof PVC cover plates, standard size, single or ganged as

indicated on the drawings, and shall be listed as "raintight while in use".

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and NEMA "Standard of

Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project

requirements. Where not indicated, mount switch adjacent to latch jamb of door.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and

wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.

C. Boxes: Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean; free from

excess building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with centerline located 18-inches above the finished

floor, unless otherwise noted or specified.

E. Work Sequence: Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

F. Switches: Install switches with centerline located 48 inches above finished floor

unless otherwise noted or specified.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES

Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Owner's representative regarding

proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of substantial completion, replace

those items, which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.

3.3 GROUNDING

Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 TESTING

Test wiring devices for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits prior to energizing

circuitry. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization,

test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16190-1

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Provide support for all electrical items using supports, anchors, sleeves, seals,

fastenings, and other components. The extent of supporting devices is covered by

this Section, the drawings and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, seals and fastenings specified in this

Section include the following:

1. Clevis hangers.

2. Riser clamps.

3. C-clamps.

4. I-beam clamps.

5. One-hole conduit straps.

6. Two-hole conduit straps.

7. Round steel rods.

8. Lead expansion anchors.

9. Toggle bolts.

10. Wall and floor seals.

C. Equipment: Supports, sleeves, seals and fasteners furnished as part of factory-

fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other sections.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70 as applicable

to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Conform to UL listings and labeling.


March 2018 16190-2

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide supporting devices with manufacturer's standard materials,

designed and constructed in accordance with published product information, for a

complete installation and as herein specified.

B. Corrosion Resistance: Provide all supports, support hardware, and fasteners hot-

dipped galvanized or cadmium plated.

C. For Raceway Supports: Provide manufacturer's standard supports including clevis

hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling

trapeze, wall brackets and spring steel clamps.

D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types, sizes, and materials indicated with the

following construction features:

1. 1/2-inch lead expansion anchors approximately 38 pounds weight per 100

units.

2. 3/16-inch by 4-inch springhead toggle bolts approximately 5 pounds weight

per 100 units.

E. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials

indicated with the following features:

1. Smoke and fire stop seals shall have a UL fire rating of where installed in fire

rated construction or as indicated.

2. Seal between sleeve and pipe where a fire rated seal is not required or

specified. Weatherproof seals required for penetrations thru exterior walls.

Seals capable of withstanding a corrosive environment and sulfide gases are

required for penetrations into the wet well.

3. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for mounting and

supporting electrical equipment. Fabricate strut from 16-gauge hot-dip

galvanized steel sheet, 9/16-inch diameter holes, and 8-inches on center on

top surface. Fittings shall mate with the U-channel.


March 2018 16190-3

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Compliance: Install hangers, sleeves, seals, U-channel supports and fasteners as

indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply

with requirements of NFPA 70 and American National Standards Institute

(ANSI)/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) for installation of

supporting devices.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring

work.

C. Raceway Supports:

1. Provide raceway support meeting the requirements of these specifications and

NFPA 70. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations. For each support

provide strength equal to the maximum weight of the present load and all

future raceways for which the support provides space, times a safety factor.

Except as otherwise indicated, use a safety factor greater than four where

necessary to provide a minimum safety allowance of 200 pounds. Provide

additional support strength where required to prevent distortion of raceway

during wire pulling.

2. Provide individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers, and riser clamps

as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and

other hardware necessary for hanger assembly, and for securing hanger rods

and conduits.

3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal raceways to be supported

together on trapeze type hangers where possible.

D. Exposed conduits installed on the interior surface of exterior building walls shall

be spaced off the wall surface a minimum of 1/4-inch using "clamp-backs" or

strut.

E. Support individual horizontal conduits and EMT 1-1/2-inch size and smaller by

either one-hole pipe straps or separate pipe hangers, use separate pipe hangers for

larger sizes. Use steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single

conduits or EMT. Unless otherwise indicated, do not use wire as a means of support.

F. Except as otherwise indicated, space supports for metallic and non-metallic raceways

in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the requirements of the

NFPA 70.


March 2018 16190-4

G. Provide support for exposed or concealed raceway as close as practical to and not

exceeding one foot from an unsupported box or access fitting. In horizontal runs, a

support at a box or access fitting may be omitted when the box or access fitting is

independently supported and the raceway termination is not made with a close nipple

or threadless box connector.

H. In vertical runs, provide such support that the load produced by the weight of the

raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with

no weight load on raceway terminations or conductor terminals.

I. Miscellaneous Supports:

1. Provide supports for all miscellaneous electrical components as required to

produce the same safety allowances as specified for raceway supports above.

Provide metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects,

control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc.

2. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be

separately supported except where used for fixture support and to the extent

necessary to prevent movement during wire installation; support sheet metal

boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar

hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and

support the raceway with an approved type fastener not more than 24-inches

from the box. When penetrating reinforced-concrete members, avoid cutting

any reinforcing steel.

J. Cable Supports:

1. Install in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Spacing not to exceed NFPA 70 tabulation for spacing of conductor supports.

3. Allow adequate slack in conductors to prevent any stress on terminations.

Take into consideration conductor thermal contraction.

K. Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated securely fasten all electrical items and their

supporting hardware including, but not limited to, conduits, raceways, cables,

cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, wall-mounted transformers,

boxes, disconnect switches and control components to the building structure.


March 2018 16190-5

2. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; by toggle bolts

on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete

or brick; by machine screws; welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps

on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided

with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts or

machine or wood screws in special circumstances. Do not weld conduits or

pipe straps to steel structures.

3. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1-1/2-inches in reinforced concrete beams

or to a depth of more than 3/4-inch in concrete joints shall not cut the main

reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

4. Loads applied to any fastener shall not exceed one-fifth of the proof test load.

Use vibration and shock-resistant fasteners.

L. Sleeve Seals:

1. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form

watertight and smoketight seal.

2. Sleeves: Where installed in slabs or partitions completely fill the void

between the sleeve and masonry with expanding cement grout.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16190-6



March 2018 16195-1

SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of electrical identification work required by this Section is indicated

in this section, on the drawings or where specified in other sections of Division 16.

B. Types: Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the

following:

1. Identification of electrical power, control and communication raceways,

cables, and conductors.

2. Equipment labels and signs.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other sections for the following:

1. Electrical Basic Requirements.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code" requirements for identification and for provision of warning and

caution signs for wiring and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and

products.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of

categories and types required for each application.

B. Furnish and install engraved laminated phenolic nameplates for all safety switches,

panelboards, starters, and other electrical equipment supplied for the project for identification

of equipment, controlled, served, phase, voltage, etc. Nameplates shall be securely attached

to equipment with self-tapping stainless steel screws, riveted or bolted and shall identify

equipment controlled, attached, etc. Letters shall be approximately 1/2-inch high minimum

for identification and 1/4-inch high minimum for other descriptions. Embossed, self-adhesive

plastic tape is not acceptable for marking equipment. Nameplate material colors shall be:

1. Blue surface with white core for 120/240 volt equipment.


March 2018 16195-2

C. All empty conduit runs and conduit with conductors for future use shall be

identified for use and shall indicate where they terminate. Identification shall be

by tags with wire attached to conduit or outlet.

D. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Provide vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive

wrap-around cable/conductor markers with pre-printed numbers and letters for

designation purposes.

E. Cable Ties: Provide fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self locking nylon

cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50 pounds minimum tensile strength and

suitable for a temperature range from -50 degrees F. to +350 degrees F. Provide ties

in specified colors when used for color coding.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical

identification work, with corresponding designations, specified or indicated

on drawings. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as approved in

submittals, as required by code, or as recommended by manufacturers.

2. Install products covered by this section where indicated on drawings or

specified. Install products covered by this section where required by NFPA

70, whether or not otherwise indicated. Install products in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NFPA 70.

3. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require finish, install

identification after completion of finish work.

B. Panel Identification

1. All electrical and instrumentation panels shall have legend plates that denote the

following information:

a. EQUIPMENT NAME (ex. WATER PUMP CONTROL #1)

b. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (ex. FP-50-10-1)

c. SOURCE BREAKER IDENTIFICATION (ex. FED FROM MCC-4)

2. All devices that have more than one source of voltage will have a similar plastic

laminate label, red w/white lettering that clearly states the presence of additional

voltage sources. It also shall be secured to the panel in a similar fashion as the

previously mentioned legend plates.


March 2018 16195-3

3. All terminal devices such as solenoids, limit switches, level probes, thermostats,

etc. shall have labels made of material identical to that previously mentioned.

They also shall be black w/white lettering and secured with 30# stainless steel

beaded chain or attached with an appropriate adhesive.

4. All lettering shall be engraved block font, 3/8 Inch high.

C. Panel Items

1. Lens colors shall be “green” for run, open, or on; “red” for stopped, off or

alarms for vfd’s, pumps, motors; “amber” for high and low liquid level alarms.

2. Pilot lights shall be full voltage LED cluster style.

3. The local stop pushbutton will be a red head maintained type device and local

start button will be black head momentary type devices.

4. Terminal strips shall be provided for all panels and shall be of the flanged fork

or ring lug type suitable for No.12 AWG stranded wire minimum. Provide 25

percent spare terminals in each panel

D. Tagging or Labeling Conductors: Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards, shop

drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established

identification schemes for the facility electrical work.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16195-4



March 2018 16410-1

SECTION 16410 - PUMP CONTROL PANEL

1. GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope

1. Furnish and install a complete Pump Control Panel (PCP) and related

auxiliary control components for the sewage pump station to provide for

control of the two (2) raw sewage pumps and other equipment. The PCP

shall be complete and include all components and wiring as shown on the

Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Sections:

1. 16010 – Electrical Basic Requirements

2. 16120 – Wires and Cables

3. 16450 – Grounding

4. 16470 – Panelboards

5. 16475 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

6. 16690 – Variable Frequency Drives

7. 16920 – Programmabel Logic Controller

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The most current edition in effect for the publications listed below form a part of

this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the

text by the basic designation only. The referenced publications shall be the current

effective edition.

1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

a. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code

b. ANSI C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering

c. ANSI C12.4 - Mechanical Demand Registers

d. ANSI C12.10 - Electromechanical Watthour Meters

e. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating

Instruments


March 2018 16410-2

2. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM B 8 - Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft

b. ASTM D 709 - Laminated Thermosetting Materials

3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

a. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Industrial, Scientific,

and Medical Equipment

4. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS,

INC. (IEEE)

a. IEEE 100 - Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms

b. IEEE ANSI/IEEE C57.13 - Instrument Transformers

5. INSTRUMENTATION, SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATION SOCIETY

(ISA)

a. ANSI/ISA 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification

6. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION

(NEMA)

a. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case

Switches

b. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

c. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems: General

Requirements

d. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers,

Contactors, Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2,000 Volts

AC or 750 DC

e. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Control and Systems Factory Built

Assemblies

f. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks

g. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

h. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators


March 2018 16410-3

i. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)

7. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

8. UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES (UL)

a. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

b. UL 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables

c. UL 198B - Class H Fuses

d. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment

e. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors

f. UL 486E - Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or

Copper Conductors

g. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches,

and Circuit Breaker Enclosures

h. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment

i. UL 510 - Insulating Tape

j. UL 512 - Fuseholders

k. UL 854 - Service Entrance Cables

l. UL 1004 - Electric Motors


A. All PCP components shall be of the most current and proven design.

Specifications and Drawings call attention to certain features but do not purport to

cover all details entering into the design of the PCP. The components provided

by the Panel Supplier shall be compatible with the functions required and shall

form a complete working system. The PCP shall be UL listed as a complete

assembly in accordance with UL-508.

B. Workmanship

1. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70,

recommendations of the manufacturer, and as shown.


March 2018 16410-4

1.4 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, unless more

stringent requirements are indicated herein or shown.

B. Coordination:

1. The drawings indicate the extent and the general location and arrangement

of equipment. The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the

work and verify all dimensions in the field so that the equipment shall be

properly located and readily accessible. Equipment and materials shall be

located to avoid interference with mechanical or structural features. If any

conflicts occur necessitating departures from the drawings, details of and

reasons for departures shall be submitted to the Owner and approved prior

to implementing any change.

C. Standard Products

1. Material and equipment shall be new and of the minimum quality

specified and shall be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of the product and shall essentially duplicate

items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 5 years prior to bid

opening. Used, recycled or rehabilitated material or equipment will not be

acceptable.

D. Identification Nameplates

1. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be

permanently marked with an identification name to identify the equipment

by type or function and specific unit number as indicated. Unless

otherwise specified, identification nameplates shall be made of laminated

phenolic in accordance with ASTM D 709 with black outer layers and a

white core. Edges shall be chamfered. Plates shall be fastened with black

finished round head drive screws or approved nonadhesive metal

fasteners. When the nameplate is to be installed on an irregular shaped

object, the Contractor shall devise an approved support suitable for the

application and ensure the proper installation of the supports and

nameplates. In all instances, the nameplate shall be installed in a

conspicuous location. At the option of the Contractor, the equipment

manufacturer's standard embossed nameplate material with black paint

filled letters may be furnished in lieu of laminated phenolic. The

following equipment, as a minimum, shall be provided with identification

nameplates:

Minimum 1/4 inch Minimum 1/8 inch

High Letters High Letters

Starters Control Power Transformers

Equipment Enclosures Control and Pilot Devices


March 2018 16410-5

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "Submittals”. Submit

shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog data, shop drawings,

certifications and installation instructions for the following:

a. Pump Control Panel and its Associated Components

b. Circuit Breakers

c. Switches

d. Relays

e. Fuses

f. Instruments

g. Enclosures

h. Starters, Automatic Control Devices

i. Programmable Logic Controller

j. Meters

k. Variable Frequency Drives

l. Float Switches

m. Gauges

n. Wet Well Level Sensing System

o. 24v backup power supplies

p. Discharge Pressure Transducer

q. Flow Meter

r. Proximity Switches


March 2018 16410-6

2. Shop Drawings

a. Contractor to submit full drawings containing complete wiring and

schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate

that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as

a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of

equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other

parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and

operation.

b. Submit detail drawings consisting of equipment drawings,

illustrations, schedules, instructions, diagrams, and other

information necessary to define the installation. Detail drawings

shall show the rating of items and systems and how the

components of an item and system are assembled, function

together, and how they will be installed on the project. Data and

drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be

coordinated and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be

coordinated and included in a single submission. Multiple

submissions for the same equipment or system are not acceptable

except where prior approval has been obtained from the Owner. In

such cases, a list of data to be submitted later shall be included

with the first submission. Detail drawings shall show physical

arrangement, construction details, connections, finishes, materials

used in fabrication, provisions for conduit entrance, access

requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size,

electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, and

equipment weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or

dimensioned. Optional items shall be clearly identified as included

or excluded. Detail drawings shall as a minimum include:

i. Pump control panel layout.

ii. Single line electrical diagrams including primary, metering,

sensing, and relaying, control wiring, and control logic.


March 2018 16410-7

iii. Electrical drawings including single line diagrams, and

schematics or elementary diagrams of each electrical

system; internal wiring and field connection diagrams of

each electrical device when published by the manufacturer;

wiring diagrams of cabinets, panels, units, or separate

mountings; interconnection diagrams that show the wiring

between separate components of assemblies; field

connection diagrams that show the termination of wiring

routed between separate items of equipment; internal

wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually

provided for this project. Field wiring connections shall be

clearly identified.

c. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by

the Contractor, complete details of such departures, including

changes in related portions of the project and the reasons why,

shall be submitted with the detail drawings. Approved departures

shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Test Reports

a. Factory Test Reports.

i. Contractor to provide six copies of the information

described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch binders having a

minimum of 5 rings from which material may readily be

removed and replaced, including a separate section for each

test. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers

with tabs.

(1) A list of equipment used, with calibration

certifications.

(2) A copy of measurements taken.

(3) The dates of testing.

(4) The equipment and values to be verified.

(5) The conditions specified for the test.

(6) The test results, signed and dated.

(7) A description of adjustments made.


March 2018 16410-8

b. Operational Testing Plan

i. Detailed testing protocol at least 30 days prior to scheduled

operational tests to demonstrate pumping system

operational tests. The protocol shall describe all tests to be

conducted and the inter-relationships thereof. Operational

testing will not be scheduled or performed until the

contractors test plan is approved.

c. Operational Testing Report

i. A detailed operational testing and equipment adjustment

report within 30 days of completion of successful

operational tests and prior to final acceptance testing.

Performance test reports in booklet form showing all

operational tests performed to adjust each component and

all operational tests performed to prove compliance with

the specified performance criteria, upon completion and

testing of the installed systems. Each test report shall

indicate the final position of all control functions.

ii. Submit the information described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch

binders, including a separate section for each test. Sections

shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs.

(1) Contractor’s certification that the operational tests

were satisfactorily completed, all deficiencies were

corrected and successfully retested, and that the

pump station is ready for Final Acceptance Testing.


certifications.



(5) The equipment and values to be verified including

acceptable reference values.




(9) Final position of controls and device settings.


March 2018 16410-9

d. Final Acceptance Test Plan

i. Detailed testing protocol at least 14 days prior to scheduled

final acceptance testing to demonstrate pumping system

operations and compliance with the project requirements.

The protocol shall describe all tests to be conducted and the

inter-relationships thereof. The final acceptance testing

will not be scheduled or performed until the contractors test

plan is approved.

e. Final Acceptance Testing Report

i. A detailed final acceptance testing and equipment

adjustment report within 30 days of completion of

successful final acceptance tests and prior to final

acceptance. Performance test reports in booklet form

showing all field tests performed to adjust each component

and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the

specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing

of the installed systems. Each test report shall indicate the

final position of all control functions.

ii. Submit the information described below in 8 1/2 x 11 inch

binders, including a separate section for each test. Sections

shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs.

(1) Contractor’s certification that the Final Acceptance

Testing was satisfactorily completed, all

deficiencies were corrected and successfully

retested, and that the pump station is ready for

conveyance to the Owner and operation.


certifications.



(5) The equipment and values to be verified including

acceptable reference values.





March 2018 16410-10

(9) Final position of controls and device settings.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data

a. Data Package

i. Submit five (5) copies of an Operation and Maintenance

(O&M) Manual for the PCP in accordance with Section

01300. The O&M manual shall be complete in all respects

and shall include all information provided in the shop

drawings plus O&M literature, Warranty, As-built wiring

diagrams, and copies of the final PLC program.

5. Closeout Submittals

a. As Built Drawings.

i. The as built drawings shall be a record of the construction

as installed. The drawings shall include all the information

shown on the contract drawings, deviations, modifications,

and changes from the contract drawings and corrected

wiring diagrams of the control panel submitted under the

shop drawing phase; however minor. The as built drawings

shall be kept at the job site and updated daily. The as built

drawings shall be a full sized set of prints marked to reflect

all deviations, changes, and modifications. The as built

drawings shall be complete and show the location, size,

dimensions, part identification, and other information.

Additional sheets may be added. The as built drawings

shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by

the Contractor and the Owner prior to the submission of

each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work,

the Contractor shall submit three full sized sets of the

marked prints to the City of Hampton for approval. If upon

review, the as built drawings are found to contain errors

and/or omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor

for correction. The Contractor shall correct and return the

as built drawings to the Owner for approval within ten

calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to

the Contractor. Submit the following items with the “As-

Built”:

ii. Electronic copy of PLC program and programming

software on compact disk.

iii. Three hard copies of PLC program.


March 2018 16410-11

1.6 WARRANTY AND FULL SERVICE CONTRACT

A. The controls manufacturer shall warrant the control system being provided to the

Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for five (5) years beginning

with final acceptance of the equipment under normal use, operation, and service.

The warranty shall be in printed form and shall apply to all units, and shall

complement the 5 year full service contract. The 5-year full service contract with

warranty shall include preventative maintenance, all parts and labor, and training

(minimum 12 hours: 4 hours at installation, 4 hours at start-up, and 4 hours after

start-up to check operation) of City field operations personnel on proper usage of

equipment.

B. The warranty shall be in printed form and submitted with the O&M Manuals.

C. All standard manufacturer warranties of control panel components shall be

provided in writing with a summary of each component’s warranty information.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL: (SPARE PARTS)

A. Provide to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts:

1. Two spare sets of control power fuses.

2. One spare of each type of indicating light lamps.

3. One spare of each type of relays.

4. One spare cooling fan.

5. One spare of each type of float.

6. One spare level transducer.

7. One spare proximity switch.

8. One spare pressure transducer.

B. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof containers or

wrappings, clearly labeled with part name and manufacturer's part/stock number;

submit, in writing, storage procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate

protection after delivery.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLES AND WIRES

A. Conductors for control, alarm, and signal circuits, shall be stranded. All

conductors shall be copper. Power and control wiring shall be run in separate

conduits.


March 2018 16410-12

1. Insulation

a. Unless indicated otherwise, or required by NFPA 70, power wires

shall be 600 volt, Type THWN, THHN, or THW conforming to

UL 83 control and signal circuits shall be Type MTW STR,

conforming to UL 83.

2. Bonding Conductors

a. ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire.

2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded case circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. Circuit

breakers may be installed in control centers.

B. Construction

1. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any

position. Lug shall be listed for copper conductors only in accordance

with UL 486E. Multi pole circuit breakers shall be of the common trip

type having a single operating handle such that an overload or short circuit

on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. All circuit

breakers shall have a quick make, quick break overcenter toggle type

mechanism, and the handle mechanism shall be trip free to prevent

holding the contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload.

All circuit breaker handles shall assume a position between "ON" and

"OFF" when tripped automatically. All ratings shall be clearly visible.

Circuit breakers shall be bolted type.

C. Ratings

1. Voltage ratings shall be not less than the applicable circuit voltage. The

interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the

available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker

and correspond to the UL listed integrated short circuit current rating

specified for the control center. Molded case circuit breakers shall have

nominal voltage ratings, maximum continuous current ratings, and

maximum short circuit interrupting ratings in accordance with NEMA AB

1.

D. Thermal Magnetic Trip Elements

1. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall be provided as shown. Automatic

operation shall be obtained by means of thermal magnetic tripping devices

located in each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit


March 2018 16410-13

protection. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and

accessible from the front of all circuit breakers.

2.3 CONNECTORS, WIRE PRESSURE

A. UL 486A, for use with copper conductors.

2.4 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

A. UL 467.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 12 gasketed unless otherwise specified. Cabinet shall be formed 12 gauge

steel with smooth, continuously welded seams without knockouts, cutouts or

holes. Doors shall supported with heavy gauge continuous hinges, secured with a

quarter turn latches. Finish shall be smooth ANSI 61 gray powder coating on the

outside, with white powder coating on the inside. Maximum enclosure dimension

shall be 30”H x 24”W x 10”D. Enclosure shall be a manufactured by Saginaw

Control & Engineering, P/N SCE-30EL2410LP or approved equal

2.6 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES AND FUSEHOLDERS

A. Fuses, Low Voltage Cartridge Type

1. NEMA FU 1.

B. Fuses, Class H

1. UL 198B.

C. Fuseholders

1. UL 512.

2.7 INSTRUMENTS, ELECTRICAL INDICATING

A. ANSI C39.1.

2.8 AUXILIARY CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Level Sensing System, Solid State (4-20mA)

1. The liquid level sensing system shall consist of one (1) cage-protected

industrial submersible pressure transducer, No-shok Inc. series 613.

Device shall utilize a 4-20mA DC process signal to communicate with the

programmable logic controller (PLC) and RTU. Device shall be approved

and listed for use in Class 1, Division 1 hazardous locations. Device shall

be capable of supporting a minimum of seven (7) setpoint levels as shown


March 2018 16410-14

on the contract drawings. Device shall be provided complete with

waterproof shielded cabling from mounting location back to PLC location

without splices and vapor filtering system. Device shall be provided with

one (1) conduit fitting adapter for installation in conduit within the wet

well. Coordinate with specified unit.

2. A 4-20ma signal shall be sent to the SCADA system for remote

monitoring of the wet well level at the master SCADA system location at

550 North Backriver Road.

3. Wet well level shall be displayed on the operator interface terminal.

B. Float Switches

1. Float type liquid level sensors shall be provided as shown on the drawings.

The float switches shall be Connery 2902-B3-S2-C1or approved equal.

2. Furnish and install three (3) non-mercury float switch in the wet well to

detect a high wet well level and low wet well level condition. The high

water alarm float switch shall serve as the back-up pumps start signal in

the event the level transducer fails. The third float switch shall serve as the

back-up pumps stop signal.

C. Discharge Pressure Sensor

1. Provide discharge pressure sensor, gauge, and transducer mounted on the

discharge force main to continuously monitor discharge pressure

conditions. The force main pressure sensing system shall consist of a

Dwyer or KPSI Series 28, (0-125 psi range) industrial pressure transducer,

and a 0-125 psi range liquid filled pressure gauge measuring in increments

of 5 psi, set on a Red Valve.

2. A 4-20ma signal shall be sent to the SCADA system for remote

monitoring of the discharge line pressure at the master SCADA system

location at North Backriver Road.

3. Force main pressure shall be displayed on the operator interface terminal.

D. Proximity Switches: Furnish and install a proximity switch on each pump check

valve to indicate whether the check valve has lifted off its seat. The check valve

proximity switches shall be wired to the programmable controller and used for

flow fail monitoring. Flow fail shall be displayed on the operator interface

terminal. The check valve proximity switches shall be the inductive type, stainless

steel, cylinder shielded, vibration and shock resistant, 12-24 VDC. Provide

stainless steel mounting brackets, jam nuts and washers. The check valve

proximity switches shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. The check


March 2018 16410-15

valve proximity switches shall be Omron #E2BS08KS02WPB12, or approved

equal.

E. Lock-Out Stop Push Button Stations:

1, Furnish and install a lock-out stop push button station at each pump. The

lock-out stop push button stations shall consist of a stop push button with

padlocking attachment mounted in a corrosion resistant NEMA 4X non-metallic

enclosure. The lock-out stop push buttons shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800H-

1HA4RLW, or approved equal.

2. Each stop push button shall be furnished with two contacts. One contact

shall be wired to the VFD control panel and the other contact shall be a logic level

contact wired to the programmable controller. Pressing the stop push button for

the lead pump will index the lag pump to become the lead pump and start if called

for.

F. Magnetic Door Switch: Furnish and install a magnetic door switch at the station

entry door to detect that someone has entered the pumping station. The magnetic

door switch shall be hermetically sealed and shall be Sentrol, or approved equal.

G. Flow Meter

1. Magnetic Type Flow Meter:

a. Provide magnetic type flow meter on the discharge force main to

continuously monitor discharge flow rate. Meter shall be capable

of processing signals from fluids that are traveling between 0.04

and 40.0 ft/s. Full scale continuously adjustable between -30 to 30

ft/s. Output shall include two 4-20 mA signal for instantaneous

flow (gallons per minute) and a frequency output for totalized

flow.

b. Provide flow meter signal converter to operate on 120-volt single

phase AC power source. Provide digital output card for

connection of station flow to the SCADA system. Meter shall be

Tidalflux by Krohne or approved equal. Provide signal to the

SCADA system for totalized flow and instantaneous flow (gpm).

c. The flow meter sensor in the valve shall be furnished with

corrosion resistant coating and rated for IP68 submersible use.

Submersible type cable shall be factory furnished with the flow

meter, continuous from the valve vault to the flow meter signal

converter.

2. Influent and station flow measurements shall be displayed on the operator

interface terminal.


March 2018 16410-16

3. Connect to an analog output to the SCADA system.

H. Timer: Furnish and install a timer to switch pumps in the case the flow is such

that one pump can keep up with the flow. The timer shall cycle the second pump

“on” and the working pump “off” when the maximum run time of the working

pump is reached.

2.9 PUMP CONTROLS PANEL COMPONENTS

A. General

1. NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 3 and NEMA ICS 6, and UL

508 and UL 845.

B. Automatic Control Devices

1. Direct Control

a. Automatic control devices (such as float or pressure switches)

which control the starting and stopping of motors directly shall be

designed for that purpose.

2. Pilot Relay Control

a. Where the automatic control device (such as float or pressure

switches) does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be

used, with the automatic control device actuating the pilot control

circuit.

3. Manual/Automatic Selection

a. Where combination manual and automatic control is specified and

the automatic control device actuates the pilot control circuit of a

starter, the starter shall be provided with a three position selector

switch marked HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC.

C. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the normal automatic

regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the HAND

position; all safety control devices, such as low or high pressure cutouts, loss of

prime, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor

control circuit in both the HAND and the Automatic positions of the selector

switch. Control circuit connections to any HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or


March 2018 16410-17

to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance

with wiring diagram approved by the Owner unless as shown on the drawings.

All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise indicated.

D. Variable frequency drive system for motors shall be as specified in Section

16690.

E. Programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be as specified in Section 16920.

1. The PLC shall perform automatic control and monitoring functions for the

pump station. The PLC shall be Allen Bradley Micrologix 1400 or

approved equal, with input and output modules as required to perform all

specified process control and monitoring functions with at least four of

each type of I/O available as spares.

2. Liquid level control of the station’s pumps and pump motors shall be

normally controlled via the station’s solid-state, liquid level sensing

transducer (4-20mA). Should this transducer fail and the liquid level rises

to the high level float switch, a high water alarm shall be transmitted by

the float switch to the RTU.

a. The PLC shall be programmed to utilize the high level and

intermediate wet well float switches to start and stop the pumps in

the event the level transducer fails.

3. The PLC shall be programmed to calculate the influent flow and displayed

on the operator interface terminal.

F. Provide a 10” minimum VGA color touch screen operator interface terminal. The

operator interface terminal shall be powered from 24vdc. Connection to PLC shall

be Ethernet based. Memory shall be large enough to contain at least 10 pages of

pump control modes with operator entered set points. The VGA color screen shall

display individual pump flow, combined flow, wet well level, discharge line

pressure, and all alarms and supervisory points. The operator interface terminal

shall be Delta DOP-B or approved equal. Provide licensed copy of the program

and programming software on CD to the City’s Public Works, Wastewater

Operations Department.

2.10 LAPTOP COMPUTER

A. Provide a laptop computer with interface connections allowing connection

connections to be compatible with the pump control panel PLC, VFD, RTU, in-

house computer, data terminal, or modem.

1. The laptop shall be furnished with the following:

a. 8GB RAM.


March 2018 16410-18

b. 1TB SATA hard drive.

c. 15.6” FHD (1920 x 1080) anti-glare LED-backlit display.

d. Tray load DVD/CD drive.

e. Wireless 802.11ac + Bluetooth 4.2, Dual Band 2.4&5 GHz.

f. 7th Generation Intel® Core™ i7-7500U Processor (4M Cache, up

to 3.50 GHz).

g. Windows 10 Pro operating system to include Office Pro and Visio.

2. The laptop shall be provided with all cables, connections and adapters.

3. The PLC ladder logic program and programming software shall be

downloaded to the laptop prior to turning over to the Owner.

4. The laptop shall be Inspiron 15 5000 as manufactured by Dell.

5. Provide 4-hours of training to the Owner’s designated staff on the

operation of the pump control panel program and programming software

and all components of the pump control panel.

2.11 TAPES

A. Plastic Tape

1. UL 510, Scotch brand or approved equal.

B. Rubber Tape

1. UL 510, Scotch brand or approved equal.

2.12 PUMP CONTROL PANEL ARRANGEMENT

A. Enclosure

1. The enclosure shall be constructed as one piece or in sections, shall be

NEMA 12 in design, free standing style suitable for pad mounting with a

housekeeping pad (6” clearance on front and sides of panel). It shall be

provided with an epoxy powder coat finish, grey on the outside, and white

on the inside. Each enclosure door shall be provided with a 3 point

latching mechanism operated by a single handle on the door.

B. Panel Components

1. Wires shall be identified at both ends by adhesive wire labels and all wire

numbers shall appear on drawings. No two wires shall have the same

number. All motor wiring and line wiring in the pump control panel shall

be copper type THHN or THWN. All controls and control voltage shall be

120 volts. All wiring shall be completely connected, requiring only

connection for service.


March 2018 16410-19

2. All equipment in the pump control panel shall be identified by black

laminated phenolic nameplates with engraved white lettering. The size of

the plates shall be such that the lettering for major designations such as

pump numbers shall be a minimum height of 1/2 inch. Secondary

descriptions shall have lettering, selector switches, etc., may be provided

with standard nameplates.

3. Control relays shall be 10 ampere multi pole "machine tool" type. Each

contact shall be housed in a clear plastic enclosure to permit visual contact

inspection. Contact shall be easily convertible from normally open to

normally closed and vice versa. The relays shall hold up to eight

convertible contacts and four fixed contacts for a total of 12 pole

capability. Relay magnet shall have a double wound molded epoxy

magnet coil. Relays shall have a concealed but accessible operator for

manual operation with provisions for holding the relay in the energized

position for circuitry testing. Provide relays as required for system

operation.

C. Panel Arrangement

1. The pump control panel shall be provided as shown on contract drawings.

All components shall be wired and tubed to terminal strips for wiring and

quick disconnect bulkhead. The pump control panel shall house the

following:

2. Current transformers, voltmeter and ammeter with selector switch.

3. A programmable logic controller (PLC) for receiving level signals from

the wet well level sensing system and transmitting those signals in the

proper sequence to the variable frequency drives for start, stop and speed

control of the sewage pumps; sequencing of the VFDs and pumps;

generation of alarm signals; and, other system operation and data

management functions.

4. A solid-state (4-20 mA) wet well sensing system to sense wet well liquid

level and transmit it to the PLC.

5. A solid-state (4-20 mA) discharge line pressure sensing system to sense

discharge line pressure and transmit it to the PLC.

6. A solid-state (4-20 mA) liquid flow measuring system to measure station

flow and transmit it to the PLC.

7. A voltage monitor shall continuously monitor incoming voltage to the

control center. The voltage monitor shall provide protection for single

phase under voltage, voltage spike, power loss, voltage unbalance, and

phase reversal. The monitor shall have separately adjustable pickup and

dropout ranges from 0 to 6 second time delay on drop out. Activation of


March 2018 16410-20

the voltage monitor shall disconnect power to the pumps. The voltage

monitor shall automatically reset upon restoration of voltage. The monitor

shall have one set of normally open contacts with a minimum 3 ampere

continuous current rating for remote alarm function. Plug in style monitor

will not be acceptable.

8. Provide a pump motor overtemperature alarm system embedded in the

pump motor winding for each pump motor. The overtemperature sensor

and switch shall be supplied by the pump motor manufacturer. The system

shall detect an overtemperature condition in the pump motor windings.

Operation of the system on a pump motor shall cause an overtemperature

signal to be sent to the alarm transmitter and shall cause a pump motor

over temperature to be reported and displayed in the VGA color

touchscreen and remain until the system resets. Operation of a motor

overtemperature system shall lock out the respective pump motor until the

system resets itself. The function of this system shall be performed by the

PLC.

9. A failure-to-pump system for each pump which shall consist of a

proximity switch mounted on the discharge check valve at the pump and

necessary relays, timers, pilot light and control switches in the control

center. When a pump is called upon to run, a 0-30 second adjustable time

delay shall be energized to allow enough time for the pump to establish

flow. If after this set time elapses, and the check valve proximity switch

has not detected flow, the pump shall stop, the respective failure-to-pump

light on the face of the control center shall be illuminated, and a failure-to-

pump signal shall be sent to the alarm transmitter. A failure-to-pump

condition shall not lock out the pump. The system failure-to-pump light

shall remain illuminated until the system is reset manually. The function

of these systems shall be performed by the PLC.

10. Interposing relays, as required, between PLC outputs and other system

components.

11. Alarm contacts and circuitry wired to a terminal strip for the following

station output signals to the RTU:

a. VFD 1 – fail

b. VFD 2 – fail

c. Wet well high level (float switch)

d. Wet well low level (float switch)

e. Valve vault high water (float switch)

f. Flow fail

g. Door open

h. Influent flow measurement

i. Station flow measurement

j. Discharge line pressure


March 2018 16410-21

k. Wet well level

l. Pump No. 1 motor over-temperature

m. Pump No. 2 motor over-temperature

n. Utility power fail

o. PLC fault

12. The annunciator and VFD section of the pump control panel shall contain

the following (pilot lights, control switches, pushbuttons and meters shall

be mounted in the door of the section):

a. Running time meter reading in hours and tenths, total of 6 digits,

nonsetting type, one for each motor.

b. Hand-Off-Auto switches. Handle shall be illuminated by long life

LED white lamp.

c. Pilot lights with long life LED lamp. All pilot lights shall have this

type lamp.

d. Green pilot light to indicate pump running condition.

e. Red pilot light to indicate a motor overload trip condition.

f. Pushbutton for motor overload reset.

g. Three position pump sequence selector (1, Alternate, 2).

h. Pump motor circuit breaker, properly sized for the load rated for

the available fault current.

i. White "control power normal" pilot light.

j. White "station power normal" pilot light.

k. 10” VGA color touch screen operator interface terminal.

l. Pushbutton for lead pump start.

m. Pushbutton for lamp test.

n. Provide with flange mounted operating mechanism interlocked

with the section door.

o. Isolation contactors, all rated for the horsepower of the motor load

served. VFD output and bypass contactors shall be both

mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent both from

being closed at the same time.

p. EMI/RFI filters and line reactors.


March 2018 16410-22

q. Variable frequency drive system touch pad.

r. VFD-bypass switch. Handle shall be illuminated by long life LED

white lamp.

s. All pilot lights, push buttons, and selector switches shall to be 1.25

inch NEMA type 12.

t. Manual speed setting potentiometers for VFD input reference, to

be housed in a 1.25 inch NEMA 12 operator body.

2.13 CONNECTION TO THE SCADA SYSTEM

A. The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be connected to the City’s

SCADA system as shown on the contract drawings.

B. The PLC shall send computed influent flow rate in GPM as a 4-20mA signal to

the RTU.

C. In addition to required alarm function, the RTU shall transmit discharge pressure,

influent flow, station flow, and wet well level data to the master SCADA at North

Backriver Road. Contractor shall coordinate all RTU programming requirements

with the City.

2.14 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. When the sewage level in the wet well rises to the level of the “Lead Pump Start”

elevation, the lead pump shall be started at a preset minimum speed. When the

lead pump is started, it will run with its speed being varied in response to wet well

level. If the lead pump is running and the wet well level increases, the lead pump

speed shall increase by 5-percent over a 15-second ramp-up time. If the level

continues to rise, the speed shall again be increased incrementally. The speed

shall never exceed the preset maximum speed programmed into the controls. As

the wet well level decreases, the speed shall decrease incrementally until the wet

well level reaches the “Pump Off” elevation, at which time the lead pump shall be

stopped.

B If the influent flow rate is greater than the maximum pumping rate of the lead

pump and the wet well level rises to the “Lag Pump Start” elevation, the lag pump

shall be started. The lag pump shall be started to match the equivalent speed of

the lead pump. If wet well level continues to rise and the pumps are not running at

maximum speed, the speeds shall increase up to the preset maximum speed

programmed into the controls. As wet well level drops, both pump speeds will be

decreased by 5-percent over a 15-second ramp-down time. If wet well level

begins to rise again, speeds shall be increased incrementally as before. The lead

and lag pumps shall run until the wet well level reaches the “Pump Off” elevation,

at which time both pumps shall be stopped.


March 2018 16410-23

C. Automatic alternating control circuitry shall switch the operating sequence of the

pumps on a preset time schedule selected by the pumping station operator.

2.15 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

A. Digital Inputs (24 VDC)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. ORIGINATION POINT

(1) Pump No. 1 H/O/A/ Switch on PCP

In “Hand” mode


In “Auto” mode


“By-pass” mode

(4) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 VFD in PCP

Run Status

(5) Pump No. 1 Overload Relay in PCP

Fault/Overload

(6) Pump No. 1 Proximity Sw. on Pump

Check Valve Limit Check Valve

(7) Pump No. 1 Temperature Switch

High Temperature In Motor Winding


VFD Fault

(9) Lead Pump No. 1/Alternate/No. 2

Selector Switch Selector Switch on PCP

“No. 1” Position


In “Hand” mode


In “Auto” mode


“By-pass” mode


March 2018 16410-24


Run Status

(14) Pump No. 2 Overload Relay in PCP

Fault/Overload

(15) Pump No. 2 Proximity Sw. on Pump

Check Valve Limit Check Valve

(16) Pump No. 2 Temperature Switch

High Temperature In Motor Winding


VFD Fault

(18) Lead Pump No. 1/Alternate/No. 2

Selector Switch Selector Switch on PCP

“No. 2” Position

(18A) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

High/Back-up Pump

Start (Float)

in PCP

(18B) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

High (Transducer) in PCP

(19A) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

Lo (Transducer) in PCP

(19B) Wet Well Level Intrinsically Safe Relay

Lo (Float) in PCP

(21) Lamp Test Lamp Test Pushbutton

in PCP

(22) Alarm Reset Reset Pushbutton

in PCP

(23) Station Door Open Pump Station Security

Door Switch

(24) 24VDC Power 24VDC Power Supply

Supply Failure in PCP/PLC

(25) DC Power Normal 24DC Power Supply

in PCP


March 2018 16410-25

(26) 3-Phase Power 3-Phase Monitor in

Available Transfer Switch

(27) Utility 3-Phase Monitor in

Power Fail Transfer Switch

(28) On Emergency Emergency Position

Power Contact in Transfer

Switch

(29) Lead Pump Start Push Button on Pump

Control Panel

(30) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 Run Time

Run-Event Meter

(31) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 Run Time

Run-Event Meter

(32) Back-up Pump Stop Intrinsically Safe Relay

(Float) in PCP

B. Analog Inputs (4-20mA)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. ORIGINATION POINT

(1) Wet Well Level Wet Well Level

Transducer

(2) Force Main Pressure Force Main Pressure

Transducer

(3) Station Flow Flow Meter

(4) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 VFD in

VFD Speed Feedback PCP

(5) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 VFD in

VFD Speed Feedback PCP

C. Digital Outputs (120 VAC)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. DESTINATION POINT


March 2018 16410-26

(1) Pump No. 1 Pump No. 1 Start Relay

Start / Stop in PCP

(2) Pump No. 1 Run Status Light on PCP

Running

(3) Pump No. 1 Operator Interface

Fault/Overload Terminal


Check Valve Fail Terminal

(5) Pump Motor No. 1 Operator Interface Term

High Temperature and SCADA System


VFD Fault Terminal

(7) Pump No. 2 Pump No. 2 Start Relay

Start / Stop in PCP

(8) Pump No. 2 Run Status Light on PCP

Running


Fault/Overload Terminal


Check Valve Fail Terminal

(11) Pump Motor No. 2 Operator Interface Term

High Temperature and SCADA System


VFD Fault Terminal

(13) Wet Well Level Operator Interface Term

High and SCADA System


Lo and SCADA System

(15) PLC Failure Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(16) Utility Power SCADA System


March 2018 16410-27

Failure

(17) Lead Pump Start Push Button on Pump

Control Panel

(18) Pump No. 1 SCADA System

Run-Event

(19) Pump No. 2 SCADA System

Run-Event

D. Analog Outputs (4-20mA)

DESCRIPTION TAG NO. DESTINATION POINT

(1) Station Flow Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System


and SCADA System

(3) Force Main Pressure Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(4) Computed Influent

Flow Rate

Operator Interface Term

and SCADA System

(5) Pump No. 1 VFD Pump No. 1 VFD in

Speed Reference PCP

(6) Pump No. 2 VFD Pump No. 2 VFD in

Speed Reference PCP

3. EXECUTION

3.1 GROUNDING

A. Grounding shall be in conformance with NFPA 70 and the contract drawings.

3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. Control and signal circuit conductor identification shall be provided within each

enclosure.


March 2018 16410-28

B. Control and signal circuit conductor identification shall be made by color coded

insulated conductors, plastic coated self sticking printed markers, permanently

attached stamped metal foil markers, or equivalent means as approved. Control

circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and

conductor identification shall match that shown on approved detail drawings.

Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable.

3.3 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall calibrate, adjust, set, and test each new adjustable circuit

protective device to ensure that they will function properly prior to the initial

energization of the new power system under actual operating conditions.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Field applied paint on exposed surfaces shall be as specified in Section 09900 -

Painting.

3.5 ELECTRICAL TESTING

A. Electrical testing shall be performed in the presence of the Owner in accordance

with these specifications. Contractor shall perform all coordination and

scheduling for electrical testing. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the

Owner five (5) working days prior to conducting tests. The Contractor shall

furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. The

Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection recommended by the

manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Owner. The Contractor shall

maintain a written record of all tests, which includes date, test performed,

personnel involved, devices tested, serial number, and name of test equipment,

and test results. All field test reports will be signed and dated by the Contractor.

B. Safety

1. The Contractor shall provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves,

protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the

test vicinity. The Contractor shall replace any equipment or devices,

which are damaged during testing or handling.

3.6 OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. After the installation is completed, electrical testing is successfully completed in

accordance with the specifications, and at such time as the Owner may direct, the

Contractor shall conduct operational testing for approval. Contractor shall

perform all coordination and scheduling for the operational tests. The equipment

shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the specified requirements.

Operational testing report shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01650.


March 2018 16410-29

3.7 FIELD SERVICE

A. Onsite Training

1. The Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as

designated by the Owner. Contractor shall perform all coordination and

scheduling for training. The training period shall consist of a total of 12

hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is

functionally completed but prior to acceptance. Training shall include two

sessions to train the City’s operating staff. The course instruction shall

cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting, stopping, servicing

the equipment, as well as all major elements of the operation and

maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course instructions shall

demonstrate all routine maintenance operations.

B. Installation Engineer

1. After delivery of the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one or more

field engineers, regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer to

supervise the installation of equipment, assist in the performance of the

onsite tests, oversee initial operations, and instruct personnel as to the

operational and maintenance features of the equipment.

C. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate visits from representatives for the

sewage pump and motors, VFD, Pump Controls and SCADA systems to ensure

that all the systems will work properly in concert. Visits from all these

representatives shall be coordinated twice; once at startup (operational testing),

and a second time to check operation after startup (final acceptance testing).

3.8 ACCEPTANCE

A. Final acceptance of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 01650.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16410-30



March 2018 16440-1

SECTION 16440 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of disconnect switch work is indicated on the drawings and schedules,

by the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic

Requirements".

B. Types: Types of disconnect switches covered by this Section include the following:

1. Enclosed, heavy duty non-fused switches.

2. Enclosed, heavy duty fusible switches.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide switches

conforming to NEMA KS 1, "Enclosed Switches".

B. NEMA: Construct enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, "Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)".

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Conform to NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", for installation and minimum fusing requirements.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Manufacture switches conforming to the

requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches".

1. Provide switches listed and labeled by UL.

2. Provide fuse holders conforming to UL 512, "Fuseholders".

3. Provide cabinets conforming to UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each switch provided on this project, furnish the manufacturer's

published technical data, drawings, dimensions, and capacities.

B. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal.


March 2018 16440-2

2.2 SWITCHES

A. General: Provide individually enclosed air-break switches as indicated and scheduled

on the drawings, with all current-carrying parts enclosed and manually operable by

means of external handles. Switches shall be heavy duty (HD) type, ampere and

horsepower rated.

Provide cartridge enclosed fuses and rejection fuse holders when fused switches are

indicated.

Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors, NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoors, or as

indicated on the drawings.

B. Ratings: Conform to NEMA KS 1 for voltage and horsepower ratings.

1. Voltages shall be 240 or 600 determined by the circuit voltage.

C. Switching Action: Provide quick-make, quick-break type switch action.

D. Construction: All current carrying parts shall be high conductivity copper, with

heating ratings conforming to UL 98.

1. Provide silver tungsten or silver-plated copper contacts.

2. Provide fuse holders of the rejection type, sized for fuses scheduled.

3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from

opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position.

4. Switches shall have handles whose positions are easily recognizable and are

padlockable in the "on" or "off" position.

2.3 FUSES

A. General: Provide fuses that conform to UL 198C, 198D, and 198E. Provide fuses of

the sizes noted on the drawings.

1. Current-limiting fuses shall be installed in lieu of regular fuses where the

fault current exceeds 10,000 RMS amperes.

2. Unless otherwise specified, fuses for use with switches rated 600 amperes

and less shall be UL Class RK-5. Class RK-5 fuses shall be dual element

type with minimum time-delay of ten seconds at 500 percent of rating.

3. Provide one complete set of fuses installed for all switches requiring fuses.

Provide ten percent spare fuses or three (whichever is greater) of each size

and type installed. The spare fuses shall be delivered in the original boxes.


March 2018 16440-3

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES

A. General: Provide NEMA 1 disconnect switches for interior use and NEMA 3R for

exterior use.

B. Installation: Install switches in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements

and NFPA 70, paragraph, "Switches". Provide grounding in accordance with

NFPA 70.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16440-4



March 2018 16450-1

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of the grounding work required is indicated on drawings, by the


B. Provide grounding in accordance with NEC as a minimum. Additional grounding

requirements shall be as specified or indicated on drawings.

C. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 16 Sections for grounding and testing.


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the requirements of:

1. C2 National Electric Safety Code.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Comply with the

requirements of:

1. B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

2. B 2 Standard Specification for Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

3. B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

4. B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

5. B 228 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper-Clad

Steel Conductors

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Comply with the

following standards which apply to the grounding of electrical systems:

1. Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial

Power Systems

2. Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with the requirements of

NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code" for the grounding of electrical systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide material and installation

conforming to the following standards:

1. Grounding and Bonding Equipment

2. Service Equipment


March 2018 16450-2

F. UL Labels: Provide grounding electrodes and connectors, which are UL, listed and

labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on conductors, grounding electrodes,

ground clamps, and exothermic welding devices.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUND RODS

A. Ground rods shall be copper clad steel, 10 feet in length and ¾-inch in diameter.

2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS

A. Grounding electrode conductors shall be bare copper sized in accordance with NEC

Table 250-66.

2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors in raceways shall be copper with green insulation,

sized in accordance with NEC 250-122. Bare copper grounding conductors will be

acceptable in underground outside raceways.

2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Ground connections shall be exothermic type cadweld or thermoweld, when direct

buried.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine all areas and conditions under which electrical grounding

connections are to be made. Do not proceed with the grounding work until such

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 GROUNDING BUILDING SERVICE

A. General: Supplement the grounded neutral of the distribution system with an

equipment grounding system to properly safeguard equipment and personnel. The

system shall, as a minimum, comply with NFPA 70. Where the drawings or


March 2018 16450-3

specifications exceed the requirements of NFPA 70, the drawings or specifications

take preference.

B. Building Steel: Ground the electrical service to the steel frame of the building.

C. Common Ground Bus: Connect the system neutral ground and the equipment ground

system to the common ground bus as indicated on the drawings. Where the

connection is not shown, provide connection as required by NFPA 70.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Install equipment grounding conductors in all raceways containing conductors having

100 volts or more to ground.

B. Ground all metallic enclosures.

C. The ground resistance of any "made" electrode shall be measured by an earth megger

device and it shall be 25 ohms or less as per NEC 250.

D. A copy of the service ground resistance test shall be sent to the Owner and Owner

representative.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16450-4



March 2018 16470-1

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of panelboard work is indicated on the drawings and schedules, by the


B. Types: Types of panelboards and enclosures covered under this Section include the

following:

1. Panelboards with automatic circuit breakers.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches

2. KS 1 Enclosed Switches

3. PB 1 Panelboards

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Conform to the requirements of

NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Construct panelboards in conformance with

the following UL publications:

1. UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes

2. UL 67 Panelboards

3. UL 310 Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals

4. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper

Conductors

5. UL 486B Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors

6. UL 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

7. UL 512 Fuseholders

8. UL 943 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters

9. UL 1053 Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment


March 2018 16470-2

1.3 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards including:

1. Manufacturer's materials specifications.

2. Certification for compliance with referenced standards.

3. Enclosed type.

4. Breaker types.

5. Bus ampacity.

6. Voltage rating.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal.

2.2 PANELBOARDS

A. Buses: Provide panelboards with buses constructed of solid copper, minimum

conductivity 98 percent and rectangular shape.

1. Mechanically mount and brace buses in conformance with UL 67.

2. Provide solderless lugs for copper or aluminum cable.

3. Provide ampacity as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Grounding Bus: Provide bare, uninsulated copper, factory installed grounding bus

with ampacity equal to the main bus.

1. Provide copper pressure connected terminations.

C. Bus sequencing: Provide bus bar connections to branch circuits of the sequenced

phased type.

1. Mount in accordance with UL 67.

2. Provide numbered terminals.

3. Provide pressure connectors, copper.

D. Service Equipment: Panelboards identified for use as service equipment shall be

labeled.


March 2018 16470-3

E. Spaces: Where words similar to "space", "space only", "future space" or similar

wording are used on the drawings and panel schedules, provide bus space for future

overcurrent devices.

1. Extend buses full size.

2. Brace and insulate bus in accordance with UL 67.

3. Provide bolted connections for future overcurrent devices.

F. Enclosures: Construct in accordance with UL 50 except modify as hereinafter

specified.

1. Construct of minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel.

2. Conform to UL 67 for additional enclosure requirements.

G. Knockouts: Provide multiple knockouts not fewer than 1.5 times the number of bus

circuits.

H. Painting: In addition to galvanizing or priming coat, all inside and outside surfaces

of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of gray paint. Recessed boxes

and surface boxes in transformer vaults, switchgear rooms and electrical closets may

be galvanized or painted as described above.

I. Directories: Provide waterproof, white cardboard stock, factory printed

directories with a clear plastic directory cover and metal frame attached to the

panel door. Directory information shall be typed.

J. Wiring Space: Conform to the requirements of UL 67. Feed-through gutters not

permitted.

K. Conform to NFPA 70 for maximum gutter fill.

L. Conform to UL 67 for minimum width of gutter and wire bending space.

M. Manufacturer: Panelboard, back-box and front plate shall be the product of one

manufacturer. Factory fit components before shipment.

N. Enclosure Type: Provide enclosure type in conformance with UL 50 and NEMA

PB 1.

O. Front Plates: Provide removable front plates of the dead-front type with

removable, adjustable cadmium plated trim clamps, and flush hinged enclosure

door.

2.3 LOAD CENTERS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.


March 2018 16470-4

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit Protective Devices: Provide molded case circuit breakers conforming to UL

489 and NEMA AB 1; voltage and poles as scheduled:

1. Provide interrupting ratings as schedules.

2. Provide common trip mechanisms for multi-pole breakers.

3. Provide instantaneous automatic trips conforming to NEMA AB 1.

4. Provide breakers with adjustable trip settings as scheduled.

5. Breakers shall be bolt-on type, factory assembled.

6. Stab-in circuit breaker types are not acceptable.

7. Provide branch circuit arrangement as scheduled.

8. Provide quick-make and quick-break mechanism.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in conformance with NEMA PB 1, and NFPA 70.

B. Lug Torquing: Torque lug screws in accordance with UL 486A for copper

conductors. Install connectors, lugs, neutral bus, and other field installed

components in accordance with manufacturer's published literature.

C. Wiring: Refer to drawings for feeder and branch circuit wiring.

1. Verify gutter size conforms to wire bending space requirements of NFPA 70

and UL 67.

2. Wire wrap branch circuit in gutters after installation. Use approved wire ties.

3. Verify maximum gutter fill to conform with NFPA 70 and UL 67.

4. Verify bolted circuit breaker connection lugs conforming to shop drawings.

5. Verify breaker size, trip setting, and breaker type in conformance with

schedules.

Complete typewritten panelboard circuit directory prior to project acceptance.

D. Only wires made of the conductor material for which the panelboard terminals have

been marked shall be used.


March 2018 16470-5

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated on drawings

or schedules.

1. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.

2. Install lugs and ground connectors in conformance with UL 486A and UL

486B.

3.3 ADJUSTABLE TRIP SETTINGS

A. Verify factory settings for adjustable trip breakers.

B. Field adjust in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, if necessary.

3.4 NAMEPLATES

A. Identification: Provide rigid engraved plastic nameplates conforming to the

requirements of Section 16195, "Electrical Identification", for each panelboard.

3.5 INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. Check circuit breakers and switches for proper mounting, conductor size, and feeder

designation.

B. Operate circuit breakers and switches to ensure smooth operation.

C. Inspect the cases of molded case circuit breakers for cracks or other defects.

D. Measure the insulation resistance of the panelboard bus system using a 500VDC

megohm-meter.

E. Measure both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance. The minimum

acceptable resistance shall be two megohms.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16470-6



March 2018 16475-1

SECTION 16475 - MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

1. GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

NEMA Publication AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

This section applies to all MCCB whether individually enclosed, group mounted, or part

of other equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Provide submittals in accordance 01300 – Submittals. Submit shop drawings 30-days

after date of notice to proceed.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. MCCB shall be bolt-on type with ratings and special features as scheduled.

B. Trips

1. Trips shall be thermal magnetic with inverse time delay and instantaneous

time-current characteristics.

2. Motor circuit protectors (MCP) having magnetic only trips shall be

provided where indicated. MCP's used with high efficiency motors shall

be capable of carrying the transient inrush current without having to be set

at more than 13 times full load current.

3. When indicated on the drawings, trips shall be solid state. They shall be

field adjustable with characteristics as scheduled.

4. MCCB used outdoors shall have ambient compensating trips.

C. MCCB used for switching lights shall be rated for switching duty.

2.2 MCCB SUBMITTAL

Industrial grade MCCB data

2.3 VOLTAGE

MCCBs of 240 volts or less may be commercial grade MCCB (quick-lag, "q-line").

2.4 MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturer shall be Square D, General Electric, or Cutler-Hammer.


March 2018 16475-2

3. EXECUTION

3.1 SPARE FUSES

For integrally fused MCCB, provide three spare fuses for each panelboard or individually

enclosed circuit breaker of each size and type used.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16482-1

SECTION 16482 - MOTOR STARTERS

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of motor starter work is indicated on the drawings and schedules, by

the requirements of this Section, and Section 16010, "Electrical Basic Requirements".

B. Types: Types of motor starters specified in this Section include the following:

1. Manual.

2. Magnetic full voltage.

C. Other Divisions: Refer to Division 15 sections for the following work:

1. Starters furnished as an integral part of mechanical equipment.

D. Related Sections: Refer to the sections of Division 16 for the following:

1. Switches and Disconnects.


A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide starters and

controllers conforming to the following NEMA standards:

1. ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

2. Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide fuses conforming to the

following:

4. 198D Class K Fuses.

5. 198E Class R Fuses.

6. 198G Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection.

7. Provide starters conforming to UL 508 "Industrial Control Equipment".

8. Provide motor starters and components UL listed and labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on all motor starters indicated or

scheduled. For each starter show the following:

1. Type.

2. NEMA size.

3. Enclosure.

4. Pilot lights.

5. Selector switches.

6. Disconnect switches.


March 2018 16482-2

7. Circuit breakers.

8. Instruments.

9. Control transformer.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 STARTERS: GENERAL

A. Starters: For each motor scheduled or indicated and not provided with integral

starter, install a motor starter, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. Types: Provide types indicated and coordinate each starter in motor characteristics

and control requirements.

C. Contacts: Equip each starter with contacts to break each ungrounded line to the

motor.

D. Overload Trips: Provide thermal overload devices, in each phase, to open all contacts

simultaneously. Equip starters with a manual thermal overload trip reset button. Size

overload trips to match motor nameplate amperes, in accordance with the

requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, "National Electrical

Code".

E. Enclosures: Unless otherwise specified or indicated, provide each starter in a NEMA

Type 1 general purpose enclosure.

F. Construction: Design and construct starters as follows:

1. For each starter provide doors arranged for padlocking and with a cardholder

for starter identification. Provide an external reset mechanism, "start-stop"

pushbuttons for manually controlled motors and hand-off-automatic ("H-O-

A") switch for automatically started motors. Provide green "stop", red "run"

pilot lights of the heavy duty oil-tight diode or resistor type.

2. Make connections to the selector switch such that only the manual

automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is

in the "hand" position. Control safeties cannot be bypassed.

3. All safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors, shall be connected in

the motor control circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic" positions.

4. Control circuit connections to any "hand-off-automatic" selector switch or

to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in

accordance with an indicated, or a manufacturer's approved, wiring

diagram.

5. Provide the selector switch with means for locking in any position.


March 2018 16482-3

6. The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the

"open" position. For each motor not in sight of the controller, provide a

manually operated, nonfused switch which will disconnect the motor from

the source and which is placed within sight of the motor location.

7. Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor

windings, be of the thermal inverse-time-limit type, and include a manual-

reset type pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller case.

8. Provide each magnetic starter with a control transformer located within the

starter enclosure and with wiring extended to associated accessories and to

terminal boards for remotely located accessories.

2.2 MAGNETIC FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING STARTERS

A. General: Conform to the requirements of paragraph, "Starters: General".

B. Type: Provide starters of the full voltage magnetic across-the-line type, with

undervoltage release and auxiliary contacts indicated or specified, and of sizes

indicated on the drawings.

C. Single Phase Protection: Provide single phase protection in each magnetic starter.

2.3 MANUAL STARTERS

A. General: Conform to the requirements of "Starters: General", article, of this Section.

B. Maximum Size: Use manual starters for motors less than 1/2 horsepower unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Type: Provide manual starters as follows:

1. Manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism.

2. One piece melting alloy thermal switch.

3. Double break silver alloy contacts.

4. Red run pilot light.

5. Arrange for padlocking "Off".

6. Horsepower rate per NEMA standards.

7. NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure unless otherwise indicated or

specified.


March 2018 16482-4

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF STARTERS

A. Standard: Install motor starter where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and in conformance with NFPA 70 and NEMA standards.

B. Coordination: Coordinate starter accessories such as pushbutton switches or H-O-

A switches and auxiliary contacts with automatic control sequencing

requirements.

C. Mounting: Bolt wall mounted panels to walls or mount on lightweight structural

steel bolted to the wall. Mount floor supported starters on structural steel welded

frames of 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1/4-inch welded steel, two vertical posts

with crossarm, and bolt to the floor. Construct feet of 6-inch by 6-inch by 3/8-

inch thick steel plate bolted to the floor.

D. Location: Locate starters within sight of their associated motors. Where starter is

not within sight of the motor, provide a heavy duty disconnect switch at the

motor.

E. Fuses: Install fuses in fused disconnect switches. Size fuses in conformance with

NFPA 70, and UL 198D, 198E, and 198G listed.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16510-1

SECTION 16510 – LED LIGHTING FIXTURES

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated on drawings and schedules, by



A. Manufacturers: Provide products of firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

lighting fixtures of types and ratings required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than two (5) years.

B. The lighting fixtures have been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer and

catalog number. This information shall set the required fixture performance and level

of quality. Fixture performance and quality specified elsewhere in this specification

shall rule, if there is an implied conflict between the specification and the catalog

number used. Fixtures of equal performance and quality as judged by the Owner will

be accepted.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, "National

Electrical Code", as applicable to construction and installation of interior building

lighting fixtures and emergency lighting.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, inc. (UL): Provide interior and exterior lighting fixtures

which have been UL, listed, and labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


A. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated

on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting

fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details, include information on housing and optics

system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.


March 2018 16510-2

g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting

Measurements testing and calculation guides.

h. US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.

i. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each

fixture, assembled in order of luminaire "Type" designation with proposed

fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

j. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Lighting Fixture Requirements: Provide fixtures, which meet the requirements of

these specifications and the project drawings.

B. General Requirements: Provide lighting fixtures of sizes, types, and ratings

indicated.

2.2 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General:

a. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on

the drawings, and as specified.

b. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-

compliant.

c. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

i. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

ii. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: Interior, -20˚ C. (-4˚

F.); Exterior, -40˚ C. (-40˚ F.)

iii. Input Voltage: 120V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

iv. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

v. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

vi. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

vii. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

d. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

i. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

ii. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 4000˚ K unless otherwise

specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

iii. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

iv. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE

SCHEDULE.


March 2018 16510-3

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Setting and Securing: Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in

alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers'

directions and approved shop drawings. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.

A. Mounting: Mounting heights specified are indicated to the bottom of the fixture for

suspended and ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted

fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job

before installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating with the

type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades as appropriate to properly interface

installation of lighting fixtures with other work.

C. Grounding: Ground non-current-carrying parts of electrical equipment. Where the

copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide

specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Clean: Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Protection: Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction

period.

C. Adjust: Adjust light fixtures as directed by the Owner.


A. Tests: Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits

have been energized, apply electric energy to demonstrate capacity and compliance

with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed

with retesting.

B. At completion of project, replace all defective components of the lighting fixtures

at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16510-4



March 2018 16690-1

SECTION 16690 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Scope of Work:

1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals

required to provide, install, test, and place in operation the Variable

Frequency Drives (VFD’s) shown on the drawings and specified.

2. The Systems House supplying the VFD’s and related equipment shall be

responsible for coordination of the VFD’s with the pump motors,

RTU/SCADA, and control system and as shown on the drawings and

specified in Division 16.

3. Overall system responsibility shall include programming, calibration, field

testing, startup training, and successful operation of the equipment.

4. The VFD shall be coordinated with the Pump System Manufacturer and MCC

provider to ensure compatibility and operation with the pump and pump

motor for sewage pumping application. The VFD shall be shipped to the

motor control center (mcc) manufacturer for installation in the mcc. The VFD

shall have a history of operating the pump motor and pumping system.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 11330, Submersible Sewage Pumps

2. Section 16010, Electrical Basic Requirements

3. Section 16410, Pump Control Panel

C. Submit shop drawings 30-days after date of notice to proceed.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The VFD’s shall start, stop, and vary the speed of the pumps in response to the

control system.

B. The VFD’s shall be capable of automatic and manual operation. Automatic speed

setting shall be from a proportional 4-20mA signal, manual control shall be accessible

via a speed potentiometer installed on the VFD control panel door.

C. The VFD’s shall be capable of remote operation of all functions via terminal input

points. All normal operating functions, e.g., starting, stopping, manual/automatic

selection, speed control, and fault reset, shall be accessible from the control panel

door mounted operator interface controls and shall not require physical access to the

VFD itself.


March 2018 16690-2

D. Each VFD system shall include surge suppressor, line reactor, input and output

isolation contactors, emi/rfi filters, forced air cooling, filtered air inlets, keypad,

indicating lights, HOA switch, run time meter, and fuse. Selection of bypass

operation shall be manual by-pass switch on the face of the VFD control panel.

E. The VFD’s shall be furnished with a self diagnostic software that can be monitored,

modified and parameters stored on a compact disc. Provide a copy of the

programming software and configuration settings on a compact disc. Provide cabling

between drive diagnostic port and a laptop computer.

H. All VFD’s shall be rated 15 HP, 240V, 3-Phase, compatible with the selected sewage

pump motor, and heavy duty rated.

I. All VFD’s shall have a remote keypad or Human Interface Module mounted on the

exterior of the panel and connected with factory provided cables.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Square D

2. Allen-Bradley

3. Yaskawa

4. Cerus Industrial

5. Toshiba

B. Acceptable Sources:

1. The VFD Distributor shall have been engaged in the business of sales and

service of the VFD Manufacturer’s products for a period of not less than 5

years.

2. The VFD Distributor shall have at least 2 factory trained engineers on staff

who are experienced in VFD selection, application, and start-up. Combined

experience of the engineering staff with the accepted manufacturer's product

line shall not be less than 10 years.

3. The VFD Distributor shall maintain a warranty and service facility that is

recognized and approved by the VFD Manufacturer. This facility shall be

staffed with factory trained service technicians competent in the start-up,

trouble-shooting, and repair of the approved VFD.

a. On site repair service shall be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per

year.

b. The repair facility shall be capable of providing a technician on the


March 2018 16690-3

owner’s site within two hours of a call for service.

c. The repair facility shall be located within a 100 miles radius of the job

site.

2.02 DRIVE CONSTRUCTION AND CAPACITIES

A. The VFD’s shall be Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulated AC Inverter type, shall feature

digital control of all functions and EEPROM storage of both factory default and user

selectable parameters.

B. The VFD’s shall contain a door mounted keypad/LED display that allows user access

to all stored parameters, and provides operator interface for control of all drive

functions. In addition, keypad control shall be deselectable, allowing control of all

operational functions of the VFD’s via terminal input points.

C. The VFD’s shall be applied at manufacturers nameplated and advertised rating. Re-

nameplating VFD’s to indicate any rating in excess of the original ratings will not be

allowed.

D. The VFD’s shall be suitable for operation of the pump motors provided.

E. The VFD converter section shall utilize a 3 phase, full wave, diode bridge rectifier to

minimize the generation of noise on the power line and provide near unity power

factor over the entire speed range.

F. VFD’s that do not contain a DC bus link reactor must be provided with a separate 3

phase line reactor connected to the input side of the VFD. Separate Line Reactors

shall be horsepower rated and provide 5.5% impedance.

G. The VFD inverter section shall incorporate Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors as the

power switching devices.

H. Overload Capability of the VFD’s shall not be less than 150% for 120 seconds, and

110% continuous.

I. The VFD’s shall be UL listed and labeled.

2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. The VFD enclosure shall meet NEMA 12 standards.

C. The VFD’s shall be capable of operation under any combination of the following

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage:

1. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 40 C (14 to 104F).

2. Relative Humidity: Less than 90% non condensing.


March 2018 16690-4

3. Vibration: Acceleration <0.5G @ 20-50 Hz

Amplitude <0.1 mm @ 50-100 Hz.

4. Altitude: To 3300 feet without derating.

2.04 VFD CONTROLS

A. Control System, shall be Voltage Source Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulated

Waveform.

B. Output Voltage, 3 phase, 240V, RMS maximum.

C. Volts/Hertz Ratio, second order nonlinearity mode. V/Hz automatically determined

and set by the VFD microprocessor for maximum energy savings with variable torque

load.

D. The VFD’s shall have a selectable “Soft Stall” feature. The microprocessor shall

monitor the load and in the event of an overload it shall, based on the

microprocessor’s calculation of a true inverse time overload characteristic, either

phase back the output voltage and frequency or trip as selected by an internal jumper.

E. PWM Carrier Frequency Switching, 1.5kHz to 10kHz, selectable.

F. The VFD’s shall be capable of PID setpoint control, and shall provide a means for

scaling output response to the process control signal using arbitrary values to set zero

and span points.

2.05 PROTECTION

A. Base drive signals to control firing of the power transistors shall be designed with

optically coupled isolators for maximum protection of the control circuits from high

voltage and noise.

B. The VFD’s shall contain the following protective functions:

1. Stall Prevention

2. Current Limit

3. Overcurrent

4. Overvoltage

5. Short Circuit at Load

6. Ground Fault

7. Undervoltage

8. Momentary Power Interrupt

9. Electronic Thermal Overload

10. Internal Overcurrent at Start-up

11. Load Overcurrent at Start-up

12. Regenerative Discharge Resistor Overcurrent


March 2018 16690-5

13. Internal Overtemperature

14. Emergency Stop.

C. Stall prevention and electronic thermal overload activation levels shall be adjustable

and set to match the characteristics of the drive motor.

2.06 DIGITAL INDICATION OF FAULT

A. Should a VFD shut down as the result of a fault condition, an alphanumeric LED

display on the VFD shall indicate the cause of the failure. Display of the failure shall

include and differentiate between the following:

1. Overcurrent: Also indicates inverter status at time of fault, and

further determines if the failure is internal or external

if occurring at start-up.

2. Overvoltage: Includes separate indication if the condition is detected

during deceleration.

3. Overload: Indication of Motor Overload.

4. Ground Fault: Detects Ground Fault Current in the VFD loadside

circuit.

5. Emergency Stop: Executed from VFD keypad, separate indications for

manual and automatic function at time of E Stop.

6. Command Error: Indicates frequency setting signal error.

7. Memory Failure: Includes separate indications for main CPU and

keypad CPU, and further indicates whether failure was

found in RAM or ROM.

8. EEPROM Error: Separate indications for data and set value

abnormalities.

9. Comm. Error: Abnormality in data transmission.

10. Undervoltage: Separate indications for input power and DC main

circuit undervoltage.

2.07 AUTO RESTART

A. The VFD’s shall have a selectable automatic restart upon fault feature that will

automatically cause the VFD to attempt to resume operation after the following faults.

1. Undervoltage: Restart will be attempted when voltage rises to an

acceptable level following detection of an

undervoltage condition.

2. Overvoltage: Restart will be attempted when voltage falls to an

acceptable level following detection of an overvoltage

condition.

3. Overcurrent: Five attempts to restart will be made within 30

seconds following detection of the fault. If the

condition remains after the fifth attempt. The fault will


March 2018 16690-6

latch in and the VFD will trip.

B. A restart will not be attempted for any other type of fault and upon detection of such,

the VFD shall immediately trip out and activate the fault relay and display the

appropriate fault indication.

2.08 RIDE THROUGH

An undervoltage condition of less than 30mS duration shall not effect drive operation. If

main power falls below 85% of rated voltage for longer than 30mS while control power is

retained, the drive will forcibly decelerate the load in an attempt to raise the DC bus voltage

through regeneration. This feature can possibly allow the drive to ride through the

undervoltage condition for 70mS, but is dependent on the connected inertia.

2.09 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS

A. Acceleration and Deceleration: Independently adjustable 0.1 to 6000 seconds.

B. Volts: Hertz Ratio: Selectable, either constant V:Hz or second

order non-linearity mode, both with base

frequency, torque boost, and start-up frequency

adjustments.

C. Signal Follower: 0-5 VDC

0-10 VDC

0-20 mADC

4-20 mADC

3 kOHM Potentiometer

D. Min. And Max. Speeds: Selectable 0.5 to 400 Hz

E. Min. And Max. Speed

Indication: Open collector outputs activated at speed set

points.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS

Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer

of the variable frequency drive units.

3.02 FIELD TEST

The equipment shall be tested in operation and in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate

compliance with specification requirements.


March 2018 16690-7

3.03 STARTUP ASSISTANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained representative of the

VFD manufacturer to assist in installation, startup, and testing of the VFD.

Provision shall be made for a minimum of three visits of not less than four (4)

hours each on site. The firs visit shall be to assist the Contractor in proper

installation. The second shall be to assist in startup of the VFD. The third shall be

to check the installation after startup.

B. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate visits from representatives for the

sewage pump and motors, VFD, Motor Control Center, RTU/SCADA, and

Generator/ATS systems to ensure that all the systems will work properly in

concert. Visits from all these representatives shall be coordinated twice; once at

startup (operational testing), and a second time to check operation after startup

(final acceptance testing).

3.04 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts:

a. One spare set of control and power fuses.

b. One of each spare power and control board.

c. One spare keypad

d. One spare set of power component transistor.

e. One spare cooling fan.

B. Package each part individually or in sets in moisture-proof containers or wrappings,

clearly labeled with part name and manufacturer's part/stock number; submit, in

writing, storage procedures for spare parts to ensure adequate protection after

delivery.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Prior to the completion of the Work, submit operation and maintenance manuals for the

variable frequency drives in accordance with Section 01300.

3.06 WARRANTY AND FULL SERVICE CONTRACT

All equipment shall be guaranteed against defective materials, design, and workmanship for a

period of five years from date of final acceptance. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of

failure of any part during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced

promptly with new parts by and at the expense of the manufacturer. The defective part or

parts shall be returned to the manufacturer.


March 2018 16690-8

The Manufacturer shall provide a 5-year full service contract with warranty on the variable

frequency drives. The warranty shall be in printed form and shall apply to all units, and shall

complement the 5-year full service contract. The 5-year full service contract with warranty

shall include preventative maintenance, all parts and labor, and training (minimum 12 hours:

4 hours at installation, 4 hours at start-up, and 4 hours after start-up to check operation) of

City field operations personnel on proper usage of equipment.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16920-1

SECTION 16920 - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER

1. GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. This specification has been developed to establish minimum requirements for a

solid-state programmable logic controller (PLC) designed to provide high

reliability in industrial applications. The internal wiring of the controller is to be

fixed with the logic functions it must perform in a given application to be

programmed into its memory. The controller shall be supplied with the CPU,

input/output scanner, input/output modules, replaceable battery which shall supply

power necessary to maintain the memory for a minimum of 1 year when AC

power is not available, EEPROM backup memory, power supply, and all power

and interface cables necessary to function as a complete and operable

programmable controller system. PLC to be Micrologix 1400 as manufactured by

Allen Bradley or DVP Series as manufactured by Delta.

B. The PLC shall perform control and monitoring functions for the well facility. The

PLC shall be furnished with input and output modules as required to perform all

specified process control and monitoring functions with at least 25% of each type

of I/O available as spares.

C. The PLC panel fitting to the terminal adapter line surge protector.

D. PLC shall be installed to meet all requirements of manufacturer and in strict

adherence to Rockwell Automation Document #9655 most current edition.

E. The objective of the programmable controller will be to improve reliability,

maintainability, and efficiency by reducing operating costs and downtime.

F. The specification shall be followed in controller with the contract and all areas of

questions or noncompliance shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and

approval.

G. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings of the PLC, ladder logic program and

programming software as part of the submittal package to the Owner and

Engineer. Submit (4) hard copies of the PLC and ladder logic program; and a

licensed copy of the programming software on compact disc.

1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with

Section 01300.


March 2018 16920-2

1.3 The systems control shop/programmer shall provide a licensed copy of all working

programs and programming software on compact disk as well as a printed program

listing. The compact disk of PLC program shall be approved by the City with regard to

ladder logic descriptions and labeling. This information shall be submitted with the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1.4 The system control shop/supplier shall provide a network of field sales and support

personnel located within 75-mile radius of the well facilities with 2-hour response time to

provide telephone consultation, prompt on-site service, and field replacement stock.

1.5 The supplier shall provide product application assistance by trained and experienced

engineers to assist the customer with program and system development through telephone

consultation and on-site checkout, debug, start-up assistance.

1.6 The supplier shall provide a customer training program designed to teach the customer’s

personnel in the understanding and application of the programmable controller. The

training program shall include training manuals and “hands-on” programming experience,

and factory PLC training and troubleshooting and maintenance of the PLC for two

employees (16 hours).

2. ASSEMBLED SYSTEMS

2.1 A supplier shall assume single source responsibility for system assembly. An assembled

system may include mounting and wiring of relays, motor starters, transformers, and

disconnecting means, or other control devices as specified by customer-supplied

documentation.

2.2 The supplier shall provide mounting, wiring, and programming of the programmable

controller system in a NEMA type 4 or other enclosure that may be specified.

2.3 If specified, the enclosure shall be able to accommodate an electrical service of 240 volt,

3 phase, 60 Hz. The enclosure shall have sufficient room for a 240 VAC (primary) to 115

V AC (secondary) control transformer to service the processor, inputs, and outputs.

2.4 The supplier shall be able to provide a sealed plastic window in the NEMA 4 enclosure

door(s) for observing the processor and I/O status indicating lights.

2.5 The supplier shall have the capacity to supply an enclosure with special paint and graphic

displays.

2.6 The supplier shall wire all programmable controller inputs and outputs to customer-

specified terminal blocks.

2.7 The assembled system shall include fuse blocks as sized by the customer's application.


March 2018 16920-3

2.8 Within the enclosure all I/O racks, processor racks, and power supplies shall be grounded

to meet the manufacturer's specifications.

2.9 All outputs from the PLC shall be fused between PLC and terminal block in panel.

2.10 If more than one controller is mounted within an enclosure, the capability must exist to

share a single programming panel or line printer.

2.11 All pushbuttons, switches and other operator devices must be UL listed and/or CSA

approved and sufficiently large and durable to provide dependable, long life operation.

2.12 All cables (with associated plugs, connectors and receptacles) requiring user field

installation, shall be designed for commercial use to withstand an industrial environment.

2.13 Upon receipt of the purchase order, but prior to the start of the manufacturing of the

equipment, the supplier shall meet with the City’s staff to discuss sequence of operation

before submitting drawings of the complete assembled system for approval by the

purchaser or their consultant.

2.14 Drawings which are returned to the supplier for correction or revision shall be

resubmitted for approval before starting fabrication of the work in question unless marked

"approved as noted”.

2.15 All drawings shall include page, sheet, and line numbers.

2.16 The first page of all drawings and schematics shall be a cover sheet consisting of a Bill of

Material, purchase order number, manufacturer’s job number, user’s name, location,

application, and shipping address.

2.17 The drawings shall include a mechanical layout detailing the overall external dimensions

the enclosure. The drawings shall include such pertinent information as location of door

handles, windows, lifting lugs, and enclosure mounted items such as tachometer or

current meters, cooling fans, etc.

2.18 The supplier shall provide documentation detailing the mounting of the processor, I/O

racks, motor starter, disconnect switch, fuse blocks, wireways, etc. All materials shall be

labeled to provide easy cross-reference to Bill of Material listing.

2.19 Electrical prints detailing all hardwiring, done by the supplier, to devices such as relays,

motor starters, disconnect switches, fuse blocks, etc. shall be provided with individual

wire numbers and relay contact cross-reference designations.

2.20 Sections describing inputs shall designate input modules by name, slot module, and

terminal location.


March 2018 16920-4

2.21 The last sheet in the set shall be for terminal block designations each containing their

individual terminal location.

2.22 At the time the equipment is shipped, one (1) reproducible copy of each drawing

mentioned above shall be provided with the equipment.

2.23 The supplier shall provide a disk copy and print out of PLC ladder logic.

2.24 The supplier shall provide a minimum of six (6) spare slots in the PLC. Cover all unused

I/O slots.

3. DESIGN DESCRIPTION

3.1 A major consideration of the programmable controller system shall be its modular, field

expandable design allowing the system to be tailored to the customer’s machine and/or

process control application. The capability shall exist to allow for expansion of the

system by the addition of hardware and/or user software.

3.2 The processor plus input and output circuitry shall be of a modular design with

interchangeability provided for all similar modules.

3.3 Modules are defined as devices, which plug into a chassis and are keyed to allow

installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the

modules. The programmable controller systems must be able to determine the correctness

of the module and chassis configuration prior to executing the user program.

3.4 The programmable controller shall have downward compatibility whereby all new

module designs can be interchanged with all similar modules in an effort to reduce

obsolescence.

3.5 All hardware of the programmable controller shall operate at an ambient temperature of

0° to 60°C (32° to 140°F), with an ambient temperature rating for storage of -40° to +

85°C (-40° to +185°F.)

3.6 The programmable controller hardware shall function continuously humidity range of 5%

to 95% with no condensation.

3.7 The programmable controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in the high

electrical noise environment of an industrial plant.

3.8 The CPU shall have the capability of addressing up to 4096 input and 4096 output points.

3.9 Each input and output module shall be a self-contained unit.


March 2018 16920-5

3.10 The programmable controller system shall include the capability of addressing remote

input and output modules up to 10,000 cable feet from the processor as an optional

module. The communication link between the module and any remote input and output

distribution chassis shall be via a 20 AWG tinned copper twin axial cable with braided

and foil shields. The communications baud rate to the remote locations shall be at least

57.6 Kbaud and user selectable on a per module basis. If the maximum distance is

reduced to 5000 cable feet, the communications speed shall increased to 230.4 Kbaud.

These communication rates shall be translated into the I/O rack scan rates of 10.6 and 4

millisecond per adapter or logical rack, respectively.

3.11 The programmable controller shall use multiple independent scans designated for

processing of input and output information, program logic, and background processing of

other processor tasks. Discrete input and output modules located in the same backplane

(slots 1-30) as the CPU should be scanned in under 32 microseconds per modules. The

processing of a typical logic program shall not exceed 0.5 to 2 milliseconds for 1024

instructions with a maximum overhead of 0.6 milliseconds.

3.12 The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS-

232-C signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and provide support for Point to Point

and Slave SCADA communication protocol systems. Alternatively, it must be usable for

programming purposes or for access to remote programmers via modem or for laptop

access for programming/troubleshooting locally.

3.13 The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS-

485 signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and provide support for DH485 protocol

systems. It must be usable for programming purposes and peer to peer communication

between well facilities.

3.14 The Programmable controller shall execute Boolean conditional instructions (or contacts)

within 0.45 microseconds each. The Programmable controller shall execute Boolean

output instructions (or coils) within 0.64 microseconds each. The Programmable

controller shall execute 3 operand (x 16 bit). Add and Subtract instructions within 1.71

microseconds each. The Programmable controller shall execute 3 operand (x 16 bit)

circular comparison (or limit) instructions within 1.96 microseconds each. The

Programmable controller shall execute 2 operand (x 16 bit) Move instructions within 1.26

microseconds each.

4. MAIN FRAME HARDWARE

4.1 The CPU shall be a self-contained unit, and will provide Ladder Rung program execution

and support remote or local programming. This device will also supply 1/0 scanning and

inter- processor and peripheral communication functions.

4.2 The operating system shall be contained in permanently mounted yet reprogrammable

devices, which allow for easy field upgrades without the need of tools.


March 2018 16920-6

4.3 In a single chassis system all system and signal power to the CPU, support modules shall

be distributed on a single motherboard or backplane. No interconnecting wiring between

these modules via plug-terminated jumpers shall be acceptable.

4.4 The CPU within the system shall perform internal diagnostic checking and give visual

indication to the user by illuminating a "green" indicator when no fault is detected and a

"red" indicator when a fault is detected.

4.5 All system modules, main, and expansion chassis shall be designed to provide for free air

flow convection cooling.

4.6 The main chassis front panel shall include indicators showing the following status

information:

A. Non-Run or Run mode of the CPU

B. The fault status of the CPU

C. Battery status

D. Communications status for channels 0 and 1

E. Forces Present/Active

4.7 Processor mode shall be selected by a key switch mounted on the front panel of the CPU.

The key shall select the following modes: RLTN - No ladder edits possible, program

always executing; PROGRAM - Programming allowed, program execution disabled; and

REMOTE - Programming terminal can make edits and change processor mode, including

TEST mode, whereby the logic executes and inputs are monitored, but output states are

not changed.

4.8 Non-volatile memory shall store the operating system information to protect against loss

in the case of power loss or system shutdown. Only at the time of a hardware change,

shall this configuration status be altered or re-entered.

5. POWER SUPPLIES

5.1 The programmable controller shall operate in compliance with an electrical service of

either 120 VAC, single phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz, 240 VAC, single

phase, in the frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz, or 24 VDC.


March 2018 16920-7

5.2 The manufacturer shall be able to provide as standard equipment a system power supply

capable of converting 120 VAC line power to the DC power required to operate the

programmable controller system. Provide two 24 VDC power supplies in the control

panel to provide power for the 24 V DC programmable controller inputs and for the

pressure transmitters. The power supplies shall be wired in an on-line/backup

configuration using a 24 VDC relay. The power supplies shall be Siemens SITOP or Idec.

5.3 A single main power supply shall have the capability of supplying power to the CPU and

local input/output modules. Auxiliary power supplies shall provide power to each

expansion chassis.

5.4 The power supply shall automatically shut down the programmable controller system

whenever its output current is detected as being excessive.

5.5 When the power supply is wired to utilize 120 VAC power, the system shall function

properly within the range of 85 to 132 VAC. The power supply shall provide surge

protection, isolation, and outage carry-over of at least I cycle of the AC line.

5.6 Install a constant voltage transformer having a sinusoidal output waveform.

5.7 Design features of the programmable controller power supply shall include diagnostic

indicators mounted in a position to be easily viewed by the user. These indicators shall

provide the operator with the status of AC and DC power applied.

5.8 At the time of power-up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the processor and 1/0

modules until the DC voltages are within specifications.

5.9 The power supply shall provide fuse protection.

5.10 Provide a transient voltage surge suppressor in the control panel for component

protection.

6. PROGRAM STORAGE

6.1 The program storage medium shall be of a solid state battery backed RAM type.

6.2 The programmable controller system shall be capable of addressing up to 16 K words,

where each word is comprised of 16 data bits.

6.3 Memory shall be available in 12 K with additional 4 K data word segments of RAM

memory.


March 2018 16920-8

6.4 Memory shall contain battery back-up capable of retaining all stored program data

through a continuous power outage for 24 months under worst case conditions. The

capability shall exist to replace the CPU's battery without incurring a loss of user

program. A low battery condition must be detectable in ladder logic, but shall not

automatically generate a major fault.

6.5 The programmable controller system shall be supplied with EEPROM as a backup for

volatile memory up to the full capacity of the controller. System shall be programmed to

load on power cycling to processor.

6.6 The operator should be able to backup volatile memory, including data and program logic

onto either a 3½-inch floppy diskette or hard disk, at their option.

6.7 All user memory in the processor not used for program storage shall be allocable from

main memory for the purpose of data storage. The programmable controller system shall

be capable of storing the following data types:

A. External Output Status

B. External Input Status

C. Timer Values

D. Counter Values

E. Signed Integer Numbers (16 bit)

F. Binary Numbers

G. BCD Numbers

H. Direct and Indexed addressing

I. Internal Processor Status Information

J. ASCII Character Data

The above listed data types shall be distinguishable to the CPU by the addressing format.

Management of the data types into memory subsections shall be an automatic function of

the CPU operating system. Any data can be displaced in Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal,

Decimal, or ASCII radices. Function-specific data types such as PID, Message, or

Processor Status shall have dedicated displays available annotating the meaning of

specific control bits and words within them and allowing for selective control where

appropriate. A complete PLC logic addressing shall be supplied to the City.

6.8 If contacts or entire rungs are intentionally deleted from an existing logic program, the

remaining program shall be automatically repositioned to fill this void. Whenever

contacts or entire rungs are intentionally inserted into an existing program, the original

program shall automatically be repositioned to accommodate the enlarged program.

6.9 To reduce the effective scan time in order to detect short pulse duration inputs, it shall be

possible to program a select logic rung more than once into memory.


March 2018 16920-9

6.10 The number of times a normally open (N. 0.) and/or normally closed (N.C.) contact of an

internal output can be programmed shall be limited only by the memory capacity to store

these instructions.

6.11 Ladder logic programs shall have immediate access to the subelements of control

structures by address and subelement mnemonic, such as timer accumulator value or

timer done bit.

7. INPUT AND OUTPUT – GENERAL

7.1 Each input or output module shall be a self-contained unit housed within an enclosure.

7.2 The input/output enclosure (chassis) with its respective modules shall be of universal and

compatible with several programmable controllers manufactured by the supplier. Racks

shall be sized to accommodate I/0 in increments of 4, 7, 10, or 13 slots per chassis. A

maximum of 3 chassis may be interconnected and directly controlled by the local CPU I/0

scan.

7.3 Isolation shall be used between all internal logic and external power circuits. This

isolation shall meet the minimum specification of 500 VRMS.

7.4 It shall be possible to replace any 16 or 32 point input or output module without

disturbing field wiring.

7.5 Each I/0 module shall contain a visual indicator to display ON/OFF status of individual

input or output points.

7.6 All user wiring to I/0 modules shall be through a heavy-duty terminal strip, pressure-type

screw terminals shall be used to provide fast, secure wire connections.

7.7 All 16 point, 32 point, and specialty input/output modules shall be color coded and titled

with a distinctive label.

7.8 All input modules shall have a specified filter time constant to limit the effects of voltage

transients.

7.9 The input/output enclosure shall be capable of expansion to accommodate an additional

20% of each type of input and output specified.


March 2018 16920-10

8. INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES

8.1 The programmable controller manufacturer shall offer discrete input/output hardware

consisting of the following types:

A. Inputs:

1. AC/DC input for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz. or 24 VDC

2. AC input for devices which operate at 120 Or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

3. DC input for devices which operate at 5 to 30 VDC

4. TTL (5 volt DC) input for transistor-transistor logic with low true logic,

compatible with input devices such as solid state control and measuring

equipment.

B. Outputs:

1. AC output for devices which operate at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2. AC output for devices which operate at 220/240 VAC, 50/60 H7

3. AC output for devices which operate at 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz

4. DC output for devices which operate at 10 to 60 VDC

5. Isolated Contact output which provides eight (8) isolated outputs capable

of switching 120 VAC, 220 VAC, or 24 VDC power

6. TTL (5 volt DC) output which provides transistor-transistor logic with low

true logic, compatible for operating 5 VDC level electronic devices

7. Combination Contact Output and 120 VAC Input available in two (2) in

two (2) out, four (4) in four (4) out, or six (6) in six (6) out configuration

8. All outputs to be fused.

8.2 Analog I/O modules of the following types shall be offered by the manufacturer.

A. Analog input which accepts analog signals and converts them to sixteen (16) bit

binary values. Digital resolution shall be available in I part in 65536 voltage or I

part in 32767 current Analog inputs shall be differential. Analog inputs shall be

available in the following ranges:


March 2018 16920-11

1. Voltage range: -10 to +10 VDC

2. Current range: -20 to +20 mA

B. Analog output which converts a fifteen (15) bit current or sixteen (16) bit voltage

binary number (14 bit resolution) into an equivalent single-ended analog output

signal. Analog outputs shall be available in the following ranges:

1. Voltage range: -10 to +10 VDC

2. Current range: 4 to +20 ma

8.3 Encoder module capable of accepting input pulses up to 50 KHz in either a single or

quadrature form from an encoder shall be available. Inputs to the module shall be TTL

compatible (5 VDC). Each module shall have four output terminals with open collector

outputs. The counting format of the module shall be 15 bit binary.

8.4 Specialized input modules of the following types shall be available:

A. Thermocouple input module that reads millivolt signals generated by

thermocouple or millivolt devices. These signals shall be displayed as either 14 bit

binary, 16 bit binary, tenths of a degree, whole degrees, hundredths of a millivolt

or tenths of a millivolt. Thermocouple types E, J, K, T, B, R, N, and S are

compatible with this module. Over-range, under-range, and open circuit detection

will be provided as standard status to the CPU. Up to four types of thermocouples

can be connected to a single card simultaneously.

8.5 An axis positioning module shall be available.

A. A module shall be available to control the motion of a closed-loop servo motor

axis. It shall be able to interface to differential line driver encoders and TTL

encoders and shall provide scaleable +10 V signal for various drives. It shall

include hardware and software commands for features such as E-Stop, jog

forward, and jog reverse. It shall provide software configuration for parameters

such as number of encoder lines, resolution, gain, and speed.

8.6 An I/O module that can contain BASIC programs in its resident. Battery-backed memory

shall be available. Non-volatile UVPROM or EEPROM memory will be optional. This

module shall interface to various devices through RS-232-C, RS-422, or RS-423A.

Multiple peripheral devices shall interface to the module at one time.


March 2018 16920-12

9. INTERFACING AND PERIPHERALS

9.1 The programming means shall be an IBM or compatible, portable-, or industrial-quality

programming terminal. The terminal shall include a monochrome or color CRT screen

and a keyboard for program entry, editing, search, and monitoring functions.

9.2 The terminal keyboard shall allow for loading of the program format and ASCII

characters.

9.3 The terminal shall be able to function as a stand-alone ASCII (alphanumeric) data

terminal with an RS-232-C interface allowing connection to an in-house computer, data

terminal, or modem.

9.4 The programming terminal shall be compatible for interfacing, with an electrical service

of either 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. or 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz.

9.5 The terminal shall provide for selecting the communication rate between 110 and 19200

baud for RS-232-C communications.

9.6 The terminal shall be capable of displaying a minimum of thirty (30) graphic (line

drawing) characters.

9.7 The programming terminal shall be capable of displaying a rung consisting of a

maximum of seven (7) series elements and six (6) parallel elements,

9.8 The programming terminal shall have the capability to be remotely located a maximum of

4000 cable feet from the processor.

9.9 The means to indicate contact or output status shall be by intensification of the contact or

output on the CRT screen. Each element's status shall be shown independently, regardless

of circuit configuration.

9.10 The programmable controller system shall be able to interface with a data terminal, which

is RS-232-C compatible (up to 19200 baud) to generate hard copy logic diagrams and/or

message generation.

9.11 The system shall have the capability to interface to a 3½ or 5¼-inch magnetic floppy disk

and/or a hard disk for loading a user program into, or recording the contents of, the

processor's memory. It shall be possible to load or record the entire contents or selected

portions of memory.

9.12 The manufacturer shall offer a multi-point communication network providing a data

transfer path for up to 32 programmable controllers and/or mini/micro-computers. The

communicating stations shall be distributed anywhere along a single bus that extends a

maximum of 4,000 cable feet in length. The communication network shall support the


March 2018 16920-13

following features:

A. Token passing system

B. Peer-to-peer communication

C. Message error checking

D. Retries of unacknowledged messages

E. Diagnostic checks on other stations

F. Interface to more than one network

G. A user-oriented command language for manipulation of data structures of variable

size and organization, such as setting or resetting bits, word and file transfers, and

program loading.

H. Bi-directional communication between the programmable controllers and the

communication network via a standard modern interface. The protocols shall meet

EIA RS-232-C electrical standards and ANSI standard communication protocols.

I. The ability to communicate with all other models of programmable controller

manufactured by said manufacturer.

J. The ability to monitor the status of any processor remotely via the network.

10. PROGRAMMING Techniques

10.1 The programming format shall be traditional relay ladder diagram. The programming

shall be accomplished using RS Logix by Rockwell Automation. A copy of the RS Logix

shall be furnished on compact disc to the Owner as part of the O & M Manuals.

10.2 It shall be possible to program a maximum instruction matrix containing as many as 128

instructions.

10.3 The capability shall exist to change a contact from normally open to normally closed, add

instructions, change addresses, etc. It shall not be necessary to delete and reprogram the

entire rung.

10.4 It shall be possible to insert relay ladder diagram rungs anywhere in the program, even

between existing rungs, insofar as there is sufficient memory to accommodate these

additions.


March 2018 16920-14

10.5 A single program command or instruction shall suffice to delete an individual ladder

diagram rung from memory. It shall not be necessary to delete the rung contact by

contact.

10.6 It shall be necessary to issue a two part command in order to delete all relay ladder rungs

from memory. This will provide a safeguard wherein the operator must verify, their

intentions before erasing the entire program.

10.7 A clock/calendar feature shall be included within the CPU. Access to the time and date

shall be from the programming terminal, user program, or message generation.

10.8 Latch functions shall be internal and programmable.

10.9 The system shall have the capability to address software timers and software counters in

any combination and quantity up to the limit of available memory. All management of

these instructions into memory shall be handled by the CPU. Instructions shall permit

programming timers in the "ON" or "OFF" delay modes. Timer programming shall also

include the capability to interrupt timing without resetting the timers. Counters shall be

programmable using up-increment and down-increment.

10.10 Timer instructions shall include selectable time bases in increments of 1.0 second and 10

milliseconds. The timing range of each timer shall be from 0 to 32,767 increments. It

shall be possible to program and display separately the timer's preset and accumulated

values.

10.11 The programmable controller shall use a signed integer format ranging from -32,768 to

+32,767 for data storage of the counter preset and accumulated values.

10.12 The programmable controller shall store data in the following formats:

A. Signed Integer Numbers ranging from -32,768 to +32,767

10.13 The programmable controller shall have support for integer signed math functions

consisting of addition, subtraction, multiplication, divisions and square root,

10.14 When using modules such as analog where multiple channels are terminated on one

module, it shall be possible to transfer the current status of all channels to the CPU upon

execution of one program instruction. This instruction shall be bi-directional to include

data transfer from the CPU to the module or from the module to the CPU.


March 2018 16920-15

10.15 Instructions shall be provided for grouping contiguous 16 bit data words into a file. The

system shall address up to 256 files with up to 256 words per file. File manipulation

instructions such as high speed "file copy" and "file fill", "file to file" move, "element to

file" move, "file to element" move, and "first in-first out" shall be supported by the

system. The four function math instructions and instructions for performing "logical

OR!”, "logical AND", “exclusive OR!”, and comparison instructions such as "less than",

"greater than", and "equal to" shall be included within the system. All instructions shall

execute on either single words or files.

10.16 The system shall contain instructions, which will construct synchronous 16 bit word shift

registers. Additional instructions shall be provided to construct synchronous bit shift

registers.

10.17 The programmable controller shall have a jump instruction, which will allow the

programmer to jump over portions of the user program to a portion marked a matching

label instruction.

10.18 In applications requiring repeatable logic rungs it shall be possible to place such rungs in

a subroutine section. Instructions, which call the subroutine and return to the main

program, shall be included, within the system. It shall be possible to program several

subroutines and define each subroutine by a unique label. The processor will support

nesting of subroutines up to eight levels deep. The program format as displayed on the

CRT shall clearly define the main program and all subroutines.

10.19 The program format shall display all instructions on a CRT programming panel with

appropriate mnemonics to define all data entered by the programmer. The system shall be

capable of providing a "HELP" instruction which when called by the programmer will

display on the CRT a list of instructions and all data required to enter an instruction into

the system memory.

10.20 At the request of the programmer, data contained in system memory shall be displayed on

the CRT programming panel. This monitoring feature shall be provided for input/output

status, timer/counter data, files, and system status. Ladder logic rungs shall be displayed

on the CRT with rung numbers in sequential order.

10.21 The system shall have the capability to enter rung comments above ladder logic rungs.

These comments may be entered at the same time the ladder logic is entered.

10.22 The capability shall exist for adding, removing, or modifying ladder logic rungs during

program execution. When changes to ladder logic are made or new logic rungs are added,

it shall be possible to test the edits of such rungs before removal of the prior logic rung is

executed.


March 2018 16920-16

10.23 It shall be possible to manually set (force) either on or off all hardwired input or output

points or Analog values from the CRT programming panel or the main chassis front

panel. Removal of these forced 1/0 points shall be either individually or totally through

selected keystrokes. The programming terminal shall be able to display forced 1/0 points,

10.24 The execution of the program logic shall be accelerated by scanning the rung only until a

positive decision as to the state of the outputs has been made. In many cases, this will

mean slopping over logic elements if the output condition has been predetermined.

10.25 A means to program a fault recovery routine shall exist. When a major system fault

occurs in the system, the fault recovery routine shall be executed and then the system

shall determine if the fault has been eliminated. If the fault is eliminated, program

execution resumes. If the fault still exists, the system will shut down.

10.26 An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routine shall be executed

regularly. The interval at which the routine is executed shall be user-specified in the range

of 1 to 32767 milliseconds. This routine must be able to close an asynchronous control

loop consisting of 32 Input points, 32 output points, 100 contact/coils, 10 addition

instructions, 10 subtraction instructions and 32 circular comparison (Limit) instructions

while never exceeding a 2 millisecond interval. The measurement of this interval is from

the Input filter delay time to the time that the physical output transitions.

10.27 The ability to program ladder logic via symbols from the global database of the

programmable controller shall exist.

10.28 An instruction shall be supported to incorporate closed loop control systems. The

"proportional", "Integral", and "derivative" elements shall be accessible to the user in

order to tune a closed loop system.

10.29 The CPU shall support indexed addressing of inputs and outputs, along with all data table

words (integer, binary, timers, and counters) for the software instruction set,

10.30 The system shall support both bit and word level diagnostic instructions.

10.31 To facilitate conditional event detection programming, output instructions shall include a

"one shot" instruction, which may be triggered on the low-to-high (rising) rung condition.

10.32 The processor shall support Master Control Reset (Relay) type functionality to selectively

disable sections of relay ladder logic.

10.33 An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routines shall be executed based

upon the input conditions of up to eight discrete hardware inputs in the processor chassis.

The routine will be executed within 500 microseconds of the detection of the input

signals. The 8 inputs will be repetitively examined/scanned within a 100 microsecond

time period.


March 2018 16920-17

10.34 Ladder logic shall feature full and detailed documentation. Each bit, rung, instruction, and

block shall include written description of that item and details of its function in the

control routine.

11. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

11.1 The programmable controller processor shall be able to withstand conducted

susceptibility tests as outlined in NEMA ICS 2-230.

END OF SECTION


March 2018 16920-18


REPORT OF SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONANDGEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES

Pump Station #22

Hampton, Virginia

G E T Project No: WM17-150G

August 28, 2017

PREPARED FOR:

Woolpert

676 Independence Parkway, Suite 100

Chesapeake, Virginia 23320

1592-E Penniman Road • Williamsburg, VA 23185 Phone: (757)-564-6452

www.getsolutionsinc.com

1592-E Penniman Road Williamsburg, VA 23185 Phone: (757)-564-6452 Fax: (757)[email protected]

August 28, 2017

TO: Woolpert676 Independence Parkway, Suite 100Chesapeake, Virginia 23320

Attn: Mr. Mike Mull, P.E.

RE: Report of Subsurface Investigation and Geotechnical Engineering ServicesPump Station #22Hampton, VirginiaG E T Project No: WM17-150G

Dear Mr. Mull:

In compliance with your instructions, we have completed our Subsurface Investigationand Geotechnical Engineering Services for the referenced project. The results of thisstudy and our recommendations for geotechnical aspects of the project are presented inthis report.

Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questionsarise concerning subsurface conditions. G E T Solutions, Inc. would be pleased tocontinue its role as Geotechnical Engineer during the project implementation.

Thank you for the opportunity to work with you on this project. We trust that theinformation contained herein meets your immediate needs. Should you have anyquestions or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact us.

Respectfully Submitted,G E T Solutions, Inc.

James R. Wheeler, P.G.Senior Project Geologist

Camille A. Kattan, P.E.Principal EngineerVA Lic. No. 018045

Copies: (1) Client

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 1

1.1 Project Authorization........................................................................................... 11.2 Project Site Location and Description.................................................................. 11.3 Project Construction Description......................................................................... 21.4 Purpose and Scope of Services.......................................................................... 2

2.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY PROCEDURES ................................................................ 3

2.1 Field Investigation ............................................................................................... 32.2 Laboratory Testing .............................................................................................. 4

3.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS...................................................................... 4

3.1 Site Geology ....................................................................................................... 43.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions ................................................................................. 53.3 Shrink/Swell Characteristics................................................................................ 63.4 Groundwater Information .................................................................................... 6

4.0 EVALUATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................... 7

4.1 Clearing and Grading (Above Grade Structure) ...................................................74.2 Subgrade Preparation (Above Grade Structure)...................................................84.3 Structural Fill and Placement (Above Grade Structure)........................................94.4 Suitability of On-Site Soils..................................................................................104.5 Foundation Design Recommendations (Above Grade Structure) .......................104.6 Settlements (Above Grade Structure) ................................................................114.7 Foundation Excavations (Above Grade Structure) .............................................114.8 Slab-on-Grade Design (Above Grade Structure)................................................124.9 Below Grade Walls (Wet Well and Vaults) .........................................................124.10 Earth Pressures From Earthquakes .................................................................. 144.11 Seismic Evaluation............................................................................................ 15

5.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................ 15

5.1 Drainage and Groundwater Concerns............................................................... 155.2 Site Utility Installation........................................................................................ 155.3 Excavations ...................................................................................................... 16

6.0 REPORT LIMITATIONS............................................................................................... 17

APPENDIX I BORING LOCATION PLANAPPENDIX II SUMMARY OF SOIL CLASSIFICATIONAPPENDIX III BORING LOG

Report of Subsurface Investigation and Geotechnical Engineering Services August 28, 2017Pump Station #22Hampton, VirginiaG E T Project No: WM17-150G

1

1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

1.1 Project Authorization

G E T Solutions, Inc. has completed our subsurface investigation and geotechnicalengineering services for Pump Station #22 project located in Hampton, Virginia.Authorization to proceed with our services was received in the form of an executedsubcontractor agreement.

1.2 Project Site Location and Description

The project site is located at 279 West Gilbert Street in Hampton, Virginia. A site vicinitymap obtained from Google Earth is provided below.

Figure 1- Site Vicinity Map


2

Currently, the project site contains an existing pump station situated towards thewestern end of the property. Currently, the project site is mainly a grass covered lot withtrees and various fencing around its perimeter. The pump station site has a grassovergrown gravel entrance from the alley located behind the residences at 255 and 257West Gilbert Street. The site is secured with a locked chain gate across its entrance.The project site is relatively flat and based on the provided drawing the site elevationsare generally around 6 feet MSL. Evidence of multiple underground utilities werepresent throughout the site along with a below grade vault-type structure at the pumpstation.

1.3 Project Construction Description

The construction at this site will consist of building a new pump station adjacent to theexisting pump station. The existing pump station is planned for demolition and removalonce the new proposed pump station is constructed and operational. The new pumpstation is planned to include a 120-ft2 above grade structure, a below grade wet well forthe sanitary gravity sewer, and two below grade vault structures for the sanitary force mainsewer. The wet well will consist of a 8-foot diameter precast concrete structure with aninvert elevation of around -3.1 feet MSL, which corresponds to roughly 9.5 to 10 feet belowexisting grades. The below grade vault structures will likely consist of concrete structures,possibly precast, with invert elevations around 0 and 4 feet MSL, which corresponds toroughly 2 and 6 feet below existing grades. The construction at this site is also expected toconsist of installing associated below grade utilities, surface concrete pavement, and otherassociated infrastructure components.

If any of the noted information is incorrect or has changed, please inform G E TSolutions, Inc. so that we may amend the recommendations presented in thisreport, if appropriate.

1.4 Purpose and Scope of Services

The purpose of this study was to obtain information on the general subsurfaceconditions at the proposed project sites. The subsurface conditions encountered werethen evaluated with respect to the available project characteristics. In this regard,engineering assessments for the following items were formulated:

1. General assessment of the soils revealed by the boring performed at the proposeddevelopment.

2. General location and description of potentially deleterious material encountered inthe boring that may interfere with construction progress or structure performance,including existing fills or surficial/subsurface organics.

3. Soil subgrade preparation, including stripping, grading and compaction. Engineeringcriteria for placement and compaction of approved structural fill material.


3

4. Construction considerations for fill placement, subgrade preparation, and foundationexcavations.

5. Evaluation of the on-site soils for re-use as structural fill.

6. Feasibility of utilizing a shallow foundation system for support of the proposed pumpstation building. Design parameters required for the foundation system, includingfoundation sizes, allowable bearing pressures, foundation levels and expected totaland differential settlements.

7. Feasibility of utilizing a mat foundation for the base of the below grade structures(wet well and vaults). Soil design parameters required for establishing lateral stressdistribution diagrams and hydrostatic design recommendations for the wall system,as well as providing allowable bearing pressure and expected settlement.

8. Seismic site class determination in accordance with the 2012 International BuildingCode and our experience with similar soil conditions in the local area.

The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment for determining thepresence or absence of wetlands or hazardous or toxic material in the soil, bedrock,surface water, groundwater or air, on or below or around this site. Prior to developmentof this site, an environmental assessment is advisable.

2.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY PROCEDURES

2.1 Field Investigation

In order to explore the general subsurface soil types and to aid in developing associatedfoundation design parameters, one (1) 40-foot deep SPT boring (designated as B-1)was drilled within the vicinity of the proposed pump station’s footprint.

Standard Penetration Tests were performed in the field in general accordance withASTM D 1586. The tests were performed continuously from the existing ground surfaceto a depth of 12 feet, and at 5-foot intervals thereafter. The soil samples were obtainedwith a standard 1.4” I.D., 2” O.D., 30” long split-spoon sampler. The sampler was drivenwith blows of a 140 lb. hammer falling 30 inches, using an automatic hammer. Thenumber of blows required to drive the sampler each 6-inch increment of penetration wasrecorded and is shown on the boring logs. The sum of the second and third penetrationincrements is termed the SPT N-value (uncorrected for automatic hammer). Arepresentative portion of each disturbed split-spoon sample was collected with eachSPT, placed in a glass jar, sealed, labeled, and returned to our laboratory for review.

The boring location was established and staked in the field by a representative of G E TSolutions, Inc. The approximate boring location is shown on the attached “BoringLocation Plan” (Appendix I), which was reproduced based on the site plan provided bythe client.


4

2.2 Laboratory Testing

Representative portions of all soil samples collected during drilling were sealed in glassjars, labeled and transferred to our laboratory for classification and analysis. AGeotechnical Engineer performed the soil classification in general accordance withASTM Specification D 2487. A summary of the soil classification system is provided inAppendix II.

Two (2) representative split spoon soil samples were selected and subjected to naturalmoisture and -#200 sieve wash testing and analysis in order to corroborate the visualclassification. These test results are tabulated below (Table I) and are also presentedon the “Boring Log” sheet (Appendix III).

Table I - Laboratory Test Results

BoringNo.

Depth(ft.)

NaturalMoisture (%)

Percent Passing#200

USCSClassification

B-1 7-8 34 28 SMB-1 18-20 35 19 SM

3.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

3.1 Site Geology

The project site lies within a major physiographic province called the Atlantic CoastalPlain. Numerous transgressions and regressions of the Atlantic Ocean have depositedmarine, lagoonal, and fluvial (stream lain) sediments. The regional geology is verycomplex, and generally consists of interbedded layers of varying mixtures of sands, siltsand clays. Based on our review of existing geologic and soil boring data, the geologicstratigraphy encountered in our subsurface Investigations generally consisted of marinedeposited sands, silts and clays.


5

3.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions

The results of our soil test boring are below in Table II.

Table II – Subsurface Soil Conditions

Notes: (1) SPT = Standard Penetration Test, N-Values in Blows-per-foot (uncorrected)

It is noted that the topsoil designation references the presence of surficial organic ladensoil, and does not represent any particular quality specification. This material should betested for approval prior to its use.

As boring B-1 is located adjacent to an existing pump station, we speculate that theFILL material encountered in this boring is related to the construction of the below gradecomponents for the pump station.

The subsurface description is of a generalized nature provided to highlight the major soilstrata encountered. The records of the subsurface Investigation are included inAppendix III (Boring Log sheet), which should be reviewed for specific information as tothe individual boring. The stratifications shown on the records of the subsurfaceInvestigation represent the conditions only at the actual boring location. Variations mayoccur and should be expected across the site. The stratifications represent theapproximate boundary between subsurface materials and the transition may be gradual.It is noted that the topsoil designation references the presence of surficial organic ladensoil, and does not represent any particular quality specification. It is recommended thatthis material be tested for approval prior to use.

AVERAGEDEPTH(Feet)

STRATUM DESCRIPTIONRANGES OF

SPT(1)

N-VALUES0to0.2

Topsoil 2 inches of Topsoil -

0.2to7.0

FILL FILL materials generally comprised of Clayey SAND (SC) with

trace Gravel and/or organics and Sandy Lean CLAY (CL) withtrace Gravel

4 - 10

7.0to8.0

I Silty SAND (SM) with trace Clay, contains marine shellfragments 5

8.0to

40.0II Silty SAND (SM), contains marine shell fragments, “Yorktown

Formation” 4 - 10


6

3.3 Shrink/Swell Characteristics

The soils recovered during our field investigation were tested and evaluated for theirpotential to expand or contract with moisture changes (typically termed shrink-swell).Shallow foundations constructed on expansive soils at certain depths may be subjectedto detrimental uplift or horizontal forces caused by the swelling of these soils as a resultof an increase in the moisture content. Conversely, as these soils lose moisture theymay shrink, adversely affecting the foundations. The depth to which soils are normallyaffected by moisture changes extends to about 3 to 6 feet below existing grades in thisarea, depending on site topography and drainage characteristics.

The soils within the project site are mapped by the Soil Survey of Hampton as theNewflat-Urban Land Soil Series. The urban land designation indicates “man-placed”FILL material could be present. Our investigation revealed similar conditions with about7 feet of Uncontrolled FILL material encountered at the boring location. Based on ourfield and laboratory investigation, the natural soils at this project site encounteredbeneath the FILL material and extending to 10 feet below existing grades areconsidered to have a low expansive (shrink-swell) potential.

In order to minimize shrink-swell concerns and possibilities, the following preventativemeasures are typically practiced:

Increasing footing bearing depth.

Do not plant deep-rooted trees and shrubs within 10 feet of the foundations.

Moderately moisten the soils within 5 feet of the foundations during hot weatherconditions.

Tie roof drains to the storm water system and situate downspouts in such a mannerto prevent ponding water near the foundation.

3.4 Groundwater Information

The groundwater level was recorded at the boring location and as observed through thewetness of the recovered soil samples during the drilling operations. The initialgroundwater table was measured to occur at a depth of 7 feet below the existing sitegrades at the boring location. The borehole was backfilled upon completion for safetyconsiderations. As such, the reported groundwater level may not be indicative of thestatic groundwater level.


7

Groundwater conditions will vary with environmental variations and seasonal conditions,such as the frequency and magnitude of rainfall patterns, as well as man-madeinfluences, such as existing swales, drainage ponds, underdrains and areas of coveredsoil (paved parking lots, sidewalks, etc.). Seasonal groundwater fluctuations of 2 feetare common in the project’s area; however, greater fluctuations have been documented.We recommend that the contractor determine the actual groundwater levels at the timeof the construction to determine groundwater impact on the construction procedures.

4.0 EVALUATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Our recommendations are based on the previously discussed project information, ourinterpretation of the soil test boring and laboratory data, and our observations during oursite reconnaissance. If the proposed construction should vary from what was described,we request the opportunity to review our recommendations and make any necessarychanges.

4.1 Clearing and Grading (Above-Grade Structure)

The proposed construction area should be cleared by means of removing vegetation,topsoil, root mat, fibrous materials, existing concrete, and any soft or otherwiseunsuitable subgrade soils. It is estimated that a cut of about 4 inches in depth will berequired to remove the majority of the topsoil and root mat materials. This cut isexpected to extend deeper in isolated areas to remove deeper deposits of topsoil, rootmat and any otherwise unsuitable soils. It is noted that Uncontrolled FILL materialwas observed at the boring location. Some of this Uncontrolled FILL material maypotentially remain in place under slabs and pavements if approved by theGeotechnical Engineer (to be determined following the completion of the test pits,proofroll, and compaction testing). Regardless, all Uncontrolled FILL materialmust be removed from below the base of all footing excavations. It isrecommended that the clearing operations extend laterally at least 5 feet beyond theperimeter of the proposed above grade structure area.

Following the initial clearing, the resulting exposed subgrade will generally becomprised of Uncontrolled FILL material consisting of Clayey SAND (SC) containing anappreciable amount of fines. Accordingly, combinations of excess surface moisture fromprecipitation ponding on the site and the construction traffic, including heavy compactionequipment, may create pumping and general deterioration of the bearing capabilities ofthe surface soils. Therefore, undercutting to remove loose/soft soils in isolated areasshould be expected. The extent of the undercut will be determined in the field duringconstruction based on the outcome of the field testing procedures (subgrade proofroll).In this regard, and in order to reduce undercutting, care should be exercised during thegrading and construction operations at the site.


8

Inherently wet subgrade soils combined with potential poor site drainage make this siteparticularly susceptible to subgrade deterioration. Thus, grading operations at this sitewill be more economical if performed during the drier months of the year (historicallyApril through November). This should minimize these potential problems, although theymay not be eliminated. If grading is attempted during the winter months, undercutting ofwet soils should be anticipated. However, during the drier months of the year, wet soilscould be dried by disking or other drying procedures to achieve moisture contentsnecessary to achieve adequate degrees of compaction.

Similar projects have required significant improvements to stabilize or bridge unstablesubgrade soils, which tend to deteriorate when exposed to construction traffic andmoisture. The subgrade improvements typically consist of additional cuts of up to 1-footand replacement with structural fill to improve poor subgrade soil conditions. Theproject’s budget should include an allowance for subgrade improvements (undercut andbackfill with structural fill).

The site should be graded to enhance surface water runoff to reduce the ponding ofwater. Ponding of water often results in softening of the near-surface soils. In the eventof heavy rainfall within areas to receive fill, we recommend that the grading operationscease until the site has had a chance to dry.

4.2 Subgrade Preparation (Above-Grade Structure)

Following the clearing operation, the exposed subgrade soils within the slab-on-gradearea (above grade structure) should be densified with a large static drum or sheepsfootroller. Subgrades to a depth of at least 6 inches should be compacted to a dry density ofat least 98% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density, in accordance with ASTM D698 (if possible). The moisture content of the subgrade should be within +/- 2% of theoptimum moisture content at the time of compaction. These compaction and moisturerecommendations may not be achievable in the relatively wet environment. As such,some subgrade improvements should be expected.

After the subgrade soils have been compacted, they should be evaluated by G E TSolutions, Inc. for stability. Accordingly, the subgrade soils should be proofrolled tocheck for pockets of loose material hidden beneath a crust of better soil. Several passesshould be made by a large rubber-tired roller or loaded dump truck over the constructionareas. The number of passes will be determined in the field by the GeotechnicalEngineer depending on the soil conditions. Any pumping and unstable areas observedduring proofrolling (beyond the initial cut) should be undercut and/or stabilized at thedirection of the Geotechnical Engineer. These improvement recommendations (whererequired) should also consider the thickness of the subbase and its ability to bridgemarginal areas.


9

In addition to the proofroll, several 6 to 8-foot deep test pits should be excavated withinthe proposed construction areas. The test pits are considered necessary to determinethe thickness and composition of the Uncontrolled FILL material. The test pits should beperformed under the observation of a representative G E T Solutions, Inc., who willevaluate the composition of the recovered soils. In addition to the test pits and proofroll,several compaction tests should be performed on the Uncontrolled FILL material withinthe proposed slab and pavement areas and to further substantiate the suitability of theexisting material. It is likely that some subgrade improvements will be required toprovide suitable soils for slab and pavement support. The Uncontrolled FILL materialmay potentially remain in place under slabs and pavements if approved by theGeotechnical Engineer (to be determined following the completion of the test pits,proofroll, and compaction testing). Regardless, all Uncontrolled FILL material must beremoved from below the base of all footing excavations.

Recommendations concerning the subgrade improvements (as necessary) will beprovided in the field following the testing procedures. The project’s budget shouldinclude an allowance for subgrade improvements (undercut and backfill with structuralfill).

4.3 Structural Fill and Placement (Above-Grade Structure)

Following the approval of the natural sub-grade soils by the Geotechnical Engineer andimplementation of any recommended subgrade modification, the placement of the fillrequired to establish the design grades may begin (if required). Any material to be usedfor select fill should be evaluated prior to placement to determine if they are suitable forthe intended use.

Any material to be used for structural fill should be evaluated and tested by G E TSolutions, Inc. prior to placement to determine if they are suitable for the intended use.Suitable structural fill material should consist of sand or gravel containing less than 25%by weight of fines (SP, SM, SW, GP, GW - with dimensions not to exceed 2 inches indiameter), having a liquid limit less than 20 and plastic limit less than 6, and should befree of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material.

All structural fill should be compacted to a dry density of at least 98% of the StandardProctor maximum dry density, in accordance with ASTM D 698. The moisture contentof the structural fill should be within +/- 2% of the optimum moisture content at the timeof placement. In general, the compaction should be accomplished by placing the fill inmaximum 8-inch loose lifts and mechanically compacting each lift to at least thespecified minimum dry density.

Backfill material in utility trenches within the construction areas should consist ofstructural fill (as previously described), and should be compacted to at least 98% ofASTM D 698. This fill should be placed in 4 to 6 inch loose lifts when hand compactionequipment is used.


10

We recommend that fill placement be monitored on a full-time basis by a qualifiedGeotechnical Engineering firm to verify that the specified materials are used and therequired degree of compaction is achieved. The monitoring should follow the guidelinesin the VDOT Specifications.

Surface water control measures should be instituted to protect the new fill from erosion.A protective cover of grass or other vegetation should be established on permanentslopes as soon as possible during construction.

4.4 Suitability of On-Site Soils

The Uncontrolled FILL material and Stratum I soils do not appear to meet the criteriarecommended in this report for reuse as structural fill, but may be used as fill withingreen areas. Stratum II soils, which was comprised of Silty SAND (SM), appears tomeet the criteria recommended in this report for reuse as structural fill. However, thesesoils were encountered below the groundwater table and would therefore requiresignificant moisture manipulation prior to their reuse. As such, it will be necessary toimport structural fill to expedite the utility backfilling. Further classification testing(natural moisture content, gradation analysis, and Proctor testing) should be performedin the field during construction to evaluate the suitability of excavated soils for reuse asfill within the utility alignments.

4.5 Foundation Design Recommendations (Above-Grade Structure)

Provided that the previous construction procedures are properly performed, theproposed above-grade structure can be supported by shallow foundations over firmnatural soil or well compacted select fill. These may consist of slabs with turn downedges, or a simple mat foundation. Uncontrolled FILL material is not consideredsuitable for foundation support and must be removed from below all footings.The Uncontrolled FILL material extended to about 7 feet below existing grades atour boring location, but could vary at other locations across the project site.

The turn down edges can be designed using a net allowable soil pressure of 2,000pounds per square foot (psf) or a mat foundation can be designed using a net allowablesoil pressure of 500 psf. In using net pressures, the weight of the turn down edges,including the weight of the floor slab, need not be considered. Hence, only loadsapplied at or above the finished floor need to be used for dimensioning the turn downedges.

In order to develop the recommended bearing capacity, the base of the turn downedges should have an embedment of at least 18 inches beneath finished grades andthe turn down edges should have a minimum width of 18 inches. The recommended18-inch turn down edge foundation embedment is considered sufficient to provideadequate cover against frost penetration to the bearing soils.


11

4.6 Settlements (Above Grade Structure)

It is estimated that, with proper site preparation, the maximum resulting total settlementof the proposed above-grade structure foundations should be up to 1 inch. Themaximum differential settlement magnitude is expected to be less than 1/2-inch acrossthe foundations in areas subjected to varying loading conditions. The settlements wereestimated on the basis of the results of the field penetration tests. Careful field controlwill contribute substantially towards minimizing the settlements.

4.7 Foundation Excavations (Above Grade Structure)

In preparation for shallow foundation support, the foundation excavations should extendinto firm natural soil or well compacted select fill. Again, Uncontrolled FILL material isnot considered suitable for foundation support and must be removed from below allfootings. Uncontrolled FILL material was encountered to as deep as 7 feet belowexisting grades at the boring location. This Uncontrolled FILL depth may extend deeperat other locations across the project site. All foundation excavations should be observedby G E T Solutions, Inc. At that time, the Geotechnical Engineer should also explorethe extent of excessively loose, soft, or otherwise unsuitable material within the exposedexcavations. Also, at the time of turn down foundation observations, the GeotechnicalEngineer may find it necessary to perform hand auger borings or use a handpenetration device in the bases of the foundation excavations. The necessary depth ofpenetration will be established during the subgrade observations.

If unsuitable soils (such as the Uncontrolled FILL) requiring undercut are encountered inthe foundation excavations, the proposed footing elevation should be re-established bybackfilling after the unsuitable material has been removed. This backfilling may be donewith very lean concrete, VDOT No. 57 stone, or with a well-compacted, suitable selectfill such as sand (as described in Section 4.3 of this report). It is noted that thegroundwater table was encountered at the same depth as the upper limits ofStratum I, about 7 feet below existing grades. Since the foundation excavationswill likely need to extend to a similar depth to penetrate through the UncontrolledFILL material it is anticipated that some means of dewatering will be required forfoundation construction. We recommend that the contractor determine the actualgroundwater levels at the time of the construction to determine groundwater impact onthe construction procedures.

Immediately prior to reinforcing steel placement, it is suggested that the bearingsurfaces of all turn down edge foundation and floor slab areas be compacted usinghand operated mechanical tampers, to a dry density of at least 98% of the StandardProctor maximum dry density (ASTM D698) as tested to a depth of 12 inches, forbearing capacity considerations. In this manner, any localized areas, which have beenloosened by excavation operations, should be adequately recompacted.


12

Soils exposed in the bases of all satisfactory foundation excavations should beprotected against any detrimental change in condition such as from physicaldisturbance, rain or frost. Surface run-off water should be drained away from theexcavations and not be allowed to pond. If possible, all foundation concrete should beplaced the same day the excavation is made. If this is not possible, the footingexcavations should be adequately protected.

4.8 Slab-on-grade Design (Above Grade Structure)

As an alternative to slabs with turn down edges, the floor slab may be constructed asslab-on-grade members provided the previously recommended earthwork activities andevaluations are carried out properly. It is recommended that all ground floor slabs bedirectly supported by at least a 4-inch layer of relatively clean, compacted, poorlygraded sand (SP) or gravel (GP) with less than 5% passing the No. 200 Sieve (0.074mm). The purpose of the 4-inch layer is to act as a capillary barrier and equalizemoisture conditions beneath the slab.

It is recommended that all slab-on-grade floors be "floating". That is, generally groundsupported and not rigidly connected to walls or foundations. This is to minimize thepossibility of cracking and displacement of the floor slabs because of differentialmovements between the slab and the foundation.

It is also recommended that the floor slab bearing soils be covered by a vapor barrier orretarder in order to minimize the potential for floor dampness, which can affect theperformance of glued tile and carpet. Generally, use a vapor retarder for minimal vaporresistance protection below the slab on grade. When floor finishes, site conditions orother considerations require greater vapor resistance protection, consideration shouldbe given to using a vapor barrier. Selection of a vapor retarder or barrier should bemade by the Architect based on project requirements.

4.9 Below Grade Walls (Wet Well and Vaults)

It is expected that the below grade walls will consist of earth-retaining structures (wetwell and vaults) supported over a mat foundation bearing at a depths ranging from 2 to10 feet below existing grades. Uncontrolled FILL material is not considered suitablefor foundation support and must be removed from below all mat foundations.Although the mat foundation for the wet well is expected to extend below thedepth of the Uncontrolled FILL material it is likely the below grade vaults mayrequire over-excavation to expose natural soils. Undercut excavations required toremove the Uncontrolled FILL material from the base of the vault excavations can be re-established with VDOT No. 57 stone.


13

These mats can be designed using a net allowable soil pressure of 1,000 psf. It is notedthat in order to promote excavation base stability and facilitate the cast-in-placeplacement, a bedding layer of 12 to 18 inches of VDOT No. 57 stone is recommendedto be placed in the base of the excavation. Furthermore, the resultant of the soilpressure distribution across the width of the mat foundation should pass through themiddle third of the foundation cross section.

In order to reduce the magnitude of lateral loads being applied to the below grade wallsand to promote positive water drainage, it is recommended that a granular backfill beplaced directly behind the walls. These granular soils should be a relatively clean, freedraining granular material (SAND) classified as SP-SM or better, containing less than12% passing the No. 200 sieve (0.074 mm). Filter fabric should be installed between thedrainage material and the existing site soils to prevent fines from contaminating thedrainage material. The compaction behind these walls should be in the range of 95% to97% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). The soils in this zoneshould not be over-compacted. In order to minimize the potential for wall damage due toexcessive compaction, hand operated mechanical tampers should be used to compactthe granular materials. Heavy compaction equipment should not be allowed within fivefeet of the below grade walls.

The walls should be sized with consideration given to hydrostatic pressures. Thesepressures should assume the water table to occur near the ground surface. In all cases,the below grade walls should be designed for the 100 year FEMA flood loads.

A representative of G E T Solutions, Inc. should visit the site during the below gradewall construction to verify that the soils in the base of the excavation are consistent withthose encountered during our subsurface investigation.

With regard to the design of the below grade walls to resist lateral earth pressures, theestimated soil parameters presented in Table III can be used.


14

Table III - Below Grade Estimated Soil Parameters

Soil Type SAND(SM, SP, SP-SM) CLAY (CL) SAND (SM, SC)

Stratum Structural Fill FILL FILL, I, II

Average SPT N-value - 4 6Estimated Moist Unit Weight

(pcf) 120 110 115

Estimated Saturated UnitWeight (pcf) 125 115 120

Estimated Submerged UnitWeight (pcf) 63 53 58

Friction Angle ( )degrees 32 5 30

Cohesion (c)pcf 0 300 0

Active Soil PressureKa 0.31 0.83 0.33

At-Rest Soil PressureKo 0.47 0.91 0.5

Passive Soil PressureKp 3.2 1.2 3.0

Coefficient of Friction 0.42 0.06 0.38

4.10 Earth Pressures From Earthquakes

The lateral earth pressure may be increased against a retaining wall because of thevibrations of the ground. The combined affect of static and dynamic force should becalculated using the following formula (as adopted from Naval Facilities EngineeringCommand, Design Manual 7.02):

PAE=1/2 H2Ka+3/8 H2Kh

Where Kh is the horizontal acceleration in g’s, and H is the height of the wall. Thedynamic lateral force PE acts at 0.6H above the walls base. Additionally, hydrodynamicpressure should be incorporated into the wall design, and is computed as follow:

(Pw)z = 1.5 Kh w (h.z) ½

Where (Pw) z is the hydrodynamic pressure at depth z below water surface, h is thedepth of water, and z is the depth below the water surface.

It is noted that under the combined effect of static an earthquake loads, a factor ofsafety between 1.1 and 1.2 is acceptable.


15

4.11 Seismic Evaluation

Based on our experience within the vicinity of the project site and the recovered soils atthis location, it is our opinion that this site may be classified as a Site Class “D” inaccordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7 as referenced by the 2012 International BuildingCode. However, the seismic evaluation requires soils information associated with theupper 100 feet. If the site classification is critical to the structural design it will benecessary to perform a 100-foot deep CPT boring with shear wave velocity testing tosubstantiate the site classification.

5.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

5.1 Drainage and Groundwater Concerns

It is expected that dewatering will be required for excavations that extend near or belowthe existing groundwater table. Dewatering above the groundwater level could probablybe accomplished by pumping from sumps. Dewatering at depths below the groundwaterlevel will require well pointing.

It would be advantageous to construct all fills early in the construction. If this is notaccomplished, disturbance of the existing site drainage could result in collection ofsurface water in some areas, thus rendering these areas wet and very loose.Temporary drainage ditches should be employed by the contractor to accentuatedrainage during construction. Again, we recommend that the contractor determine theactual groundwater levels at the time of construction to determine groundwater impacton this project.

5.2 Site Utility Installation

The base of the utility trenches should be observed by a qualified inspector prior to thepipe and structure placement to verify the suitability of the bearing soils. Based on theresults of our field investigation program it is expected that the utilities and structures atthis site will bear in the granular or cohesive soils. In some instances the bearing soilsmay require some stabilization to provide suitable bedding. This stabilization is typicallyaccomplished by providing additional VDOT No. 57 stone bedding (typically 12 inches).

It is expected that excavations within the granular soils will experience varying degreesof cave-in as a result of the soils composition (Sand). Shoring should be implemented toreduce the potential cave-ins.

The resulting excavations should be backfilled with structural fill, as described in Section4.3 of this report. A majority of the subsurface soils will not be suitable for reuse asbackfill. As such, it is likely that imported structural fill material will be required toexpedite the utility installation.


16

5.3 Excavations

In Federal Register, Volume 54, No. 209 (October, 1989), the United States Departmentof Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) amended its“Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR, part 1926, Subpart P”. Thisdocument was issued to better insure the safety of workmen entering trenches orexcavations. It is mandated by this federal regulation that all excavations, whether theybe utility trenches, basement excavation or footing excavations, be constructed inaccordance with the new (OSHA) guidelines. It is our understanding that theseregulations are being strictly enforced and if they are not closely followed, the ownerand the contractor could be liable for substantial penalties.

The contractor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporaryexcavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as requiredto maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The contractor’sresponsible person, as defined in 29 CFR Part 1926, should evaluate the soil exposedin the excavations as part of the contractor’s safety procedures. In no case shouldslope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavationdepth, exceed those specified in local, state, and federal safety regulations.

We are providing this information solely as a service to our client. G E T Solutions,Inc. is not assuming responsibility for construction site safety or the contractor’sactivities; such responsibility is not being implied and should not be inferred.


17

6.0 REPORT LIMITATIONS

The recommendations submitted are based on the available soil information obtainedby G E T Solutions, Inc. and the information supplied by the client and theirconsultants for the proposed project. If there are any revisions to the plans for thisproject or if deviations from the subsurface conditions noted in this report areencountered during construction, G E T Solutions, Inc. should be notified immediatelyto determine if changes in the foundation recommendations are required. IfG E T Solutions, Inc. is not retained to perform these functions, G E T Solutions, Inc.can not be responsible for the impact of those conditions on the geotechnicalrecommendations for the project.

The Geotechnical Engineer warrants that the findings, recommendations, specificationsor professional advice contained herein have been made in accordance with generallyaccepted professional geotechnical engineering practices in the local area. No otherwarranties are implied or expressed.

After the plans and specifications are more complete the Geotechnical Engineer shouldbe provided the opportunity to review the final design plans and specifications to assureour engineering recommendations have been properly incorporated into the designdocuments, in order that the earthwork and foundation recommendations may beproperly interpreted and implemented. At that time, it may be necessary to submitsupplementary recommendations. This report has been prepared for the exclusive useof Woolpert and their consultants for the specific application to the Pump Station #22project located in Hampton, Virginia.

APPENDICES

APPENDIX I BORING LOCATION PLAN

APPENDIX II SUMMARY OF SOIL CLASSIFICATION

APPENDIX III BORING LOG

APPENDIX I

BORING LOCATION PLAN

Locations are approximate based on site visit sketch.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Boring Location Plan

Project: Pump Station #22Hampton, Virginia Scale: As Drawn

Project No: WM17-150G Date: 8/24/2017Client: Woolpert Plot By: JW

B-1

APPENDIX II

SUMMARY OF SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Very Loose 4 blows/ft. or less Very Soft 2 blows/ft. or lessLoose 5 to 10 blows/ft. Soft 3 to 4 blows/ft.Medium Dense 11 to 30 blows/ft. Medium Stiff 5 to 8 blows/ft.Dense 31 to 50 blows/ft. Stiff 9 to 15 blows/ft.Very Dense 51 blows/ft. or more Very Stiff 16 to 30 blows/ft.

Hard 31 blows/ft. or more

Boulders 8 inch diameter or moreCobbles 3 to 8 inch diameterGravel Coarse 1 to 3 inch diameter

Medium 1/2 to 1 inch diameterFine 1/4 to

1/2 inch diameterSand Coarse 2.00 mm to 1/4 inch

(diameter of pencil lead)Medium 0.42 to 2.00 mm

(diameter of broom straw)Fine 0.074 to 0.42 mm

(diameter of human hair)Silt 0.002 to 0.074 mm

(cannot see particles)

GW - Well-graded Gravel CL - Lean ClayGP - Poorly graded Gravel CL-ML - Silty ClayGW-GM - Well-graded Gravel w/Silt ML - SiltGW-GC - Well-graded Gravel w/Clay OL - Organic Clay/SiltGP-GM - Poorly graded Gravel w/Silt Less than 5 percent GW, GP, SW,SPGP-GC - Poorly graded Gravel w/Clay CH - Fat Clay More than 12 percent GM, GC, SM, SCGM - Silty Gravel MH - Elastic Silt 5 to 12 percentGC - Clayey Gravel OH - Organic Clay/SiltGC-GM - Silty, Clayey GravelSW - Well-graded SandSP - Poorly graded Sand PT - PeatSW-SM - Well-graded Sand w/SiltSW-SC - Well-graded Sand w/ClaySP-SM - Poorly graded Sand w/SiltSP-SC - Poorly graded Sand w/ClaySM - Silty SandSC - Clayey SandSC-SM - Silty, Clayey Sand

CLASSIFICATION SYMBOLS (ASTM D 2487 and D 2488)

More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve

Groundwater conditions will vary with environmentalvariations and seasonal conditions, such as the frequency andmagnitude of rainfall patterns, as well as tidal influences andman-made influences, such as existing swales, drainage ponds,underdrains and areas of covered soil (paved parking lots, sidewalks, etc.).

LittleSome

Mostly 50-100

Borderline cases requiring dualsymbols

Plasticity Chart

Strata ChangesIn the column “Description” on the boring log, the horizontallines represent approximate strata changes.

Groundwater Readings

Depending on percentage of fines (fraction smaller than No.200 sieve size), coarse-grained soils are classified as follows:

15-2530-45

Few

COHESIVE SOILS(CLAY, SILT and Combinations)

Relative ProportionsDescriptive Term Percent

0-55-10

Jacksonville Office415A Western BoulevardJacksonville, NC 28546

(910) 478-9915

Virginia Beach Office204 Grayson Road

Virginia Beach, VA 23462(757) 518-1703

Relative Density

NON COHESIVE SOILS(SILT, SAND, GRAVEL and Combinations)

Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) were performed in the field in general accordance with ASTM D 1586. The soil samples were obtained with astandard 1.4” I.D., 2” O.D., 30” long split-spoon sampler. The sampler was driven with blows of a 140 lb. hammer falling 30 inches. The number ofblows required to drive the sampler each 6-inch increment (4 increments for each soil sample) of penetration was recorded and is shown on the boringlogs. The sum of the second and third penetration increments is termed the SPT N-value.

CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM FOR SOIL EXPLORATION

Standard Penetration Test (SPT), N-value

1592 Penniman Rd. Suite EWilliamsburg, VA 23185

Particle Size Identification

Consistency

Page 1 of 1GET Revision 12/12/07

Coarse Grained Soils Fine-Grained Soils

Highly Organic Soils

50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve

Liquid Limit 50% or greater

Trace

Williamsburg Office

(757) 564-6452

Elizabeth City Office106 Capital Trace, Suite EElizabeth City, NC 27909

(252) 335-9765

APPENDIX III

BORING LOG

2-4-5-5(9)

3-5-5-4(10)

3-2-2-3(4)

2-2-3-3(5)

3-5-5-6(10)

4-4-6-8(10)

2-3-5-4(8)

2-2-3-2(5)

1-2-2-2(4)

1-2-2-3(4)

1-2-2-2(4)

2-2-2-3(4)

2-in of Topsoil

Dark brown and brown, moist, Clayey fine to coarse SAND (SC)with trace Gravel and organics, loose, "FILL"

Dark gray and brown, moist, Clayey fine to medium SAND (SC)with trace Gravel, loose, "FILL"

Orange-brown and dark brown, moist, Sandy lean CLAY (CL)with trace Gravel, soft to medium stiff, "FILL"

Orange-brown, wet, Silty fine to medium SAND (SM) with traceClay, contains marine shell fragments, loose

Dark gray, wet, Silty fine to medium SAND (SM), containsmarine shell fragments, very loose to loose, "Yorktown

Formation"

Boring terminated at 40 feet below existing grade.

28

19

8

12

6

18

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

0.2

2.0

4.0

7.0

8.0

40.0

INITIAL (ft) : 7 CAVE-IN (ft) :

Notes:

x

Blo

wC

ount

s(N

-Val

ues)

RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONBORING ID

B-1

10 20 30 40 50 60 70

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

AFTER HOURS (ft) :

STRATA DESCRIPTION

%<

#200

Sam

ple

Rec

over

y (in

.)

GROUNDWATER*:

PROJECT LOCATION: Hampton, Virginia

CLIENT: Woolpert

PROJECT NAME: Pump Station #22

DATE COMPLETED: 7/31/2017

SURFACE ELEVATION (MSL) (ft):

Dep

th (

ft)

Water Content -

Sample Type(s):

Liquid Limit

Virginia Beach204 Grayson Road

Virginia Beach, VA 23642757-518-1703

Ele

vatio

n (f

t)

PAGE 1 OF 1

Sam

ple

Typ

e

Sam

ple

ID

Str

ata

Lege

nd

The initial groundwater readings are not intended to indicate the static groundwater level.

Thi

s in

form

atio

n pe

rta

ins

only

to th

is b

orin

g an

d sh

oul

d no

t be

inte

rpre

ted

as b

eing

indi

citiv

e of

the

site

.

DRILLER: GET Solutions, Inc.

DATE STARTED: 7/31/2017

LOGGED BY: T. Vaughn

PROJECT NUMBER: WM17-150G

Williamsburg1592-E Penniman RoadWilliamsburg, VA 23185

757-564-6452

BORING LOCATION: See Attached Boring Location Plan

Elizabeth City106 Capital Trace Unit EElizabeth City, NC 27909

252-335-9765

Jacksonville415-A Western Blvd

Jacksonville, NC 28546910-478-9915

TEST RESULTS

Penetration -

SPT - StandardPenetration Test

DRILLING METHOD(S): Rotary wash "mud"

Plastic Limit x